O&M Manaul P000047

Fuel Oil Treatment System
Operation and Maintenance Instructions Manual
GENERAL ELECTRIC
HOUSTON, TX - USA
PURCHASE ORDER NO: 411509836

PROJECT: ST. THOMAS
ALFA LAVAL NO: P000047

Separator Model: P636
WARNING
The centrifuge must spin at operating speed for an
hour every 2 weeks. The date, start, and stop time
must be logged. Failure to follow this instruction
voids the manufacturer warranty.
Failure to follow the centrifuge maintenance schedule

voids the manufacturer warranty
Parts & Service

USA: +1 215-443-4000
ALFA LAVAL INC. USA

www.alfalaval.us
DECEMBER 2012
POWER BUSINESS UNIT
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Concerns: Job No. :
Table of Contents and Revision Status P000047

Page: 1 of 1 Rev. : 0
Reviewed and Approved By: Position: Date:
Pradeep Shah Project Manager 02/04/13

It is hereby certified that the Technical Manual prepared for the above job number has been reviewed and approved by the responsible Project Engineer.
SECTION 1: Storage & Preservation
SECTION 2: Safety
SECTION 3: System Overview
SECTION 4: Installation System Reference & Drawings
SECTION 5: Operating Instruction
SECTION 6: Parameter List
SECTION 7: Alarms and Fault Finding
SECTION 8: Maintenance Instructions

A) Centrifuge
B) Valve Block, Water
C) Feed Pump
SECTION 9: Spare Parts Catalog

A) Recommended Spare Parts List
B) Centrifuge
C) Centrifuge Ancillary Parts
D) Sludge Removal Kit
SECTION 10: Bill of Materials / Catalog – Local Device
Requests for changes to this Technical Manual must be made in writing to the issuing and approving authority together with documentation on which to base the review and approval.
Listed below is the record of changes for this Technical Manual. Revision level and approval of revisions are recorded above.
Rev Date Page Paragraph Nature of change
0 02/04/13 Original Issue.

SECTION 1
Storage & Preservation

STORAGE AND PRESERVATION
APPLICATION:
This procedure may be used for preserving the fuel oil treatment system after arrival at an
intermediate storage facility and before installation at site. It applies to the centrifuge itself
including, pump, drive motors and other support equipment; the associated process equipment
and piping; the controls enclosure.
REFERENCE:
Alfa Laval Instruction Book No.592410-02 Rev. 1; Section 9.2.2 Protection and Storage of
Goods, and 9.4 Storage (enclosed)
ABB - Low voltage motor manual 01-2009; Section 2 Handling, and Section 3 Installation and
Commissioning.(enclosed)
Viking Pump; Storage Policy (enclosed)
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS:
Condensation of moisture due to ambient temperature differences and direct water leakage must
be addressed.
Centrifuge dive motor, Pump drive motor:

Windings must be kept dry for electrical considerations.
Motor starters and controls enclosure:

Controls must be kept dry for electrical considerations.
GENERAL:
Factory preservation: Fuel oil treatment system has been factory preserved after run test and
before shipment. The maximum expected duration of this preservation is 12 months from the
date of pre-shipment preservation.
Warranty: Factory Preservation does not guarantee freedom from corrosion, nor does the
warranty cover damage to equipment caused by corrosion. However, the factory preservation
procedure has proven to provide satisfactory protection from corrosion for 12 months for typical
shipments and in most environments PROVIDED after arrival at site the owner provides a proper
storage environment, proper connection of electrical power and periodic inspections.
Special conditions of the storage environment: These procedures presume that the owner is
familiar with all special conditions of the storage environment and has developed effective
means of addressing these special conditions. Some special conditions that the owner is expected
to address are: rainfall; atmospheric dust, dirt, chemical vapors, mists containing salt (marine or
near-marine environment); extreme heat and cold; unusual condensation conditions; electrical
transients and lightning; mechanical conditions such as unusual vibration.
ABB Motors
Motors with the same frame may have a different center of
2. Handling gravity because of different output, mounting arrangements
and auxiliary equipment.
2.1 Reception check
Damaged lifting lugs must not be used. Check that
Immediately upon receipt check the motor for external eyebolts or integrated lifting lugs are undamaged before
damage (e.g. shaft-ends and flanges and painted surfaces) lifting.
and if found, inform the forwarding agent without delay.
Lifting eyebolts must be tightened before lifting. If needed,
Check all rating plate data, especially voltage and winding the position of the eyebolt can be adjusted using suitable
connection (star or delta). The type of bearing is specified washers as spacers.
on the rating plate of all motors except the smallest frame
sizes. Ensure that proper lifting equipment is used and that the
sizes of the hooks are suitable for the lifting lugs.
2.2 Transportation and storage Care must be taken not to damage auxiliary equipment and
cables connected to the motor.
The motor should always be stored indoors (above
–20°C), in dry, vibration free and dust free conditions.
During transportation, shocks, falls and humidity should be 2.4 Machine weight
avoided. In other conditions, please contact ABB. The total machine weight can vary within the same
Unprotected machined surfaces (shaft-ends and flanges) frame size (center height) depending on different output,
should be treated against corrosion. mounting arrangement and auxiliaries.
It is recommended that shafts are rotated periodically by The following table shows estimated maximum weights
hand to prevent grease migration. for machines in their basic versions as a function of frame
material.
Anti-condensation heaters, if fitted, are recommended to
be used to avoid water condensing in the motor. The actual weight of all ABB’s motors, except the smallest
frame sizes (56 and 63) is shown on the rating plate.
The motor must not be subject to any external vibrations at
standstill so as to avoid causing damage to the bearings. Frame Aluminum Cast iron Steel
size Add.
Motors fitted with cylindrical-roller and/or angular contact Weight Weight Weight for brake
kg kg kg
bearings must be fitted with locking devices during
56 4.5 - -
transport.
63 6 - -
71 8 13 5
2.3 Lifting 80 12 20 8
90 17 30 10
All ABB motors above 25 kg are equipped with lifting lugs 100 25 40 16
or eyebolts. 112 36 50 20
132 63 90 30
Only the main lifting lugs or eyebolts of the motor should be 160 95 130 30
used for lifting the motor. They must not be used to lift the 180 135 190 45
motor when it is attached to other equipment. 200 200 275 55
225 265 360 75
Lifting lugs for auxiliaries (e.g. brakes, separate cooling 250 305 405 75
fans) or terminal boxes must not be used for lifting the 280 390 800 600 -
motor. 315 - 1700 1000 -
355 - 2700 2200 -
400 - 3500 3000 -
450 - 4500 - -
EN-6 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motor manual 01-2009
SECTION 2
Safety
SECTION 3
System Overview

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM OVERVIEW

REFERENCES
Alfa Laval P&ID Dwg No. 8732224

GENERAL
The Fuel Oil Treatment System (FOTS) is intended to “conditioning” the liquid fuel by reducing
particulates and free water during periods of fuel quality upsets, and to transfer into clean fuel oil
storage tank.

Operating fuel temperature range is above the fuel cloud point by 6C/10F, above fuel water freezing
point, and above the temperature where fuel has a kinematic viscosity of between 1.5 to 12 centistokes,
to 60C/140F. However, the FOTS may be operated with fuel temperature as high as 65C/149F to allow
circulation of fuel back to the local source tank, provided fuel temperature has been reduced to
60C/140F prior to process the fuel.

During storage, operation, and installed‐idle service, protection from freezing is the customer’s
responsibility, and should be based on the severity and duration of the expected conditions. For short
durations of below‐freezing temperatures, heat tracing may suffice. For extended durations of below‐
freezing temperatures, a heated building is required.

Protection from extreme local conditions, such as extreme UV or dust storms, and from degradation
during storage and idleness, is the end customer’s responsibility.

The major process components of the skid are: inlet strainer, feed pump, and centrifuge. Piping is
stainless steel, to ASME B31.3. Other components are mainly carbon steel.

Motor starters and controls for the feed pumps and centrifuges are included, on the skid mounted
controls panel. Connection from and to the skid mounted panel is by plug‐and‐play cables.

The skid pan of the base serves to collect and contain liquid spills.

Overall dimensions are shown on the mechanical drawings.

CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS

Source Tank
The FOTS shall be installed between the source tank and the clean fuel oil storage tank. The FOTS
requires a fuel feed line from the source tank outlet, plus a return line to the inlet or top of the source
tank. Tank vents should be filtered in dusty environments, to avoid drawing dust into the tank, and have
bottom drains, with a regular program of settled‐water drain‐off.

During commissioning, debris and contaminants will initially be circulated to the source tank, so a source
tank during circulation cleaning should be temporary connected to the FOTS outlet connection.

1

Pipe Connections
Connection (201) Liquid fuel pipe from source tank to FOTS skid fuel inlet
• 4 inch ANSI 150 RF
• #2 diesel fuel
• Maximum allowed pressure 1 bar/15 psi. Operating pressure should not, when flowing 120
gpm, shall be 5 psi and fuel must be free from vapors.

Connection (209) FOTS fuel return outlet to return pipe to source tank or supply line.
• #2 diesel fuel
• Normal pressure determined by backpressure on return pipe. Operating pressure should not,
exceed 50 psi.

Connection (222) Centrifuge sludge output
• 35 psi back‐pressure during sludge pump operation
• Oily water, potentially #2 diesel, and particulates. Special precautions required to avoid plugging
drain line, especially if fuel can be expected to contain significant quantities of particulates.
One solution: Customer to provide a vented tank or barrel directly beneath the downward‐
pointing sludge discharge pipe. The tank is to be drained by a separate pump in customer’s
supply directly to disposal facilities.
Other solution: Customer discharges to an open drain with facility for flushing.
Solution should allow inspection of the sludge contents to determine what is being removed
from the incoming fuel.
• DO NOT RETURN SLUDGE TO THE SOURCE TANK OR TO THE UPSTREAM FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM!

Connection (463) FOTS skid pan drain to oily water drain (open drain)
• 2 inch NPTF
• Oily water
• Atmospheric pressure
• Pipe to customer’s oily water disposal tank

Connection (371) Treated water delivery to FOTS skid treated water inlet
• Treated water per Alfa Laval water quality specification
• 6.2 bar/ 90 psi maximum ;
• 4.5 bar/65 psi min nominal water pressure; 2 Bar/30 psi low water pressure trip set point

Connection (501) Instrument air delivery to FOTS skid
• 1/2 inch ANSI 150 RF
• Dry instrument air per Alfa Laval air quality specification
• 5.5 bar/ 80 psi maximum

Electrical Connections
• Power supply 460VAC/3Ph/60Hz
• Shielded Ethernet cable for remote mounted HMI
• Low/High storage tanks level connections.
2

STORAGE POWER
When the unit is in storage, the customer shall energize the motor heater.

FUNCTION
Item numbers in parenthesis refer to Alfa Laval P&ID item numbers

When operating, the FOTS draws fuel from the customer’s source tank through strainer (DS‐1)using the
centrifuge feed pump (P‐1, P‐2, P‐3), then regulates fuel flow to the centrifuge (CG‐1, CG‐2, CG‐3) using
pressure regulating valve (PRV‐1) and manual throttle valve (RV5‐1, 2,3), cleans fuel within the
centrifuge, and delivers cleaned fuel to the clean fuel storage tank.

During periods when the gas turbine is not operating, or operating on gas fuel:
Operating the FOTS one or more hours every week or two in 100% recirculation keeps the equipment in
good running order and slows the effects of fuel degradation, especially in sun‐heated pipes and hoses,
so available fuel presented to the gas turbine will be of higher quality when liquid fuel operation is
required. The mandatory minimum operating schedule is the centrifuge must spin at operating speed
for an hour every 2 weeks. The date, start, and stop time must be logged. Failure to follow this
instruction voids the manufacturer warranty.

INTERNAL OF THE CENTRIFUGE
Reference: SECTION 8; Maintenance Instructions, Section 4 Design

The separator/centrifuge comprises a process section and a drive section powered by an electric motor.
The separator frame comprises a lower body and a frame hood. The motor is attached to the frame. The
frame feet dampen vibration. The bottom part of the separator contains a flat belt transmission, a
centrifugal clutch and a vertical spindle. The lower body also contains an oil sump for lubrication of
spindle bearings. The inlet and outlet device contains the processing parts of the separator; the inlets,
outlets and piping. The process liquid is cleaned in the separator bowl. The bowl is fitted on the upper
part of a vertical spindle and rotates at high speed inside the frame hood. The bowl also contains the
discharge mechanism which empties the sludge during operation. A speed sensor and an unbalance
sensor are part of the equipment for monitoring the separator functions.

FUEL CONDIITONIG PROCESS
Definition of Terms
Purifier ‐ A separator that cleans the oil from water and sludge with continuous evacuating of separated
water.
Water seal ‐ Water, added to the separator bowl to prevent oil from escaping at the water outlet.
Displacement water – Water, added to the separator bowl to displace the oil and ensure there is
reduced loss of oil at sludge discharge.
Close water – Water, added to the bowl operating slide to close discharge slide.
Opening water – Water, added to close the bowl operating slide valves and drop discharge slide.

The fuel conditioning process is controlled by one air solenoid (SV‐1), which opens and closes the fuel
inlet divert valve (V‐1), and three water solenoids, which: Water seal and Displacement (SV‐10); close
the bowl, (SV‐15); and opening the bowl (SV‐16). Solenoid valves are controlled automatically by the
FOTS control panel. Operation is not “self adapting” so entered parameters must be changed
(password protected and special software required) to adapt to significantly different contaminants or
fuel. However, the factory set parameters are correct for typical #2 diesel fuel.
3

Process cycle:
1) A specific amount of water is added to the separator bowl to form a water seal.
2) The feeding of unprocessed oil to the centre of the separator bowl starts.
3) During the separation process sludge and water accumulate at the periphery of the separator bowl.
Cleaned oil is fed from the separator by the integrated paring disc. Excessive water leaves the bowl
through the water/sludge outlet to the sludge tank.
4) After the preset time between discharge sequence, the oil feeding stops.
5) Displacement water is added to the bowl. The displacement water reduces the oil loss at the
following sludge discharge.
6) A sludge discharge is initiated.
The next process cycle starts with adding of water for a new water seal.

A sludge discharge interval is typically set to 120 minutes. Minimum normal cycle time is 30 minutes.
Usually, the as‐shipped interval is set to 30 minutes, to accommodate the initial recirculation cleaning
period, and must be re‐adjusted after the initial operating period, and based on cleaning experience
with the particular fuel. In extreme conditions, cycle time can be set to as little as 10 minutes, although
additional adjustments to the unit will be required, maximum cleaned fuel throughput will be reduced,
and treated water requirements increased. Each bowl cleaning event takes about 1 minute.

Fuel Flow From The Source Tank
Fuel flow from the customer’s source tank to the FOTS is always equal to the rated flow of the feed
pump, unless the feed pump is cavitating. Cavitation is not an expected condition unless the fuel
delivery pipe is too restrictive or the pump inlet strainer, (DS‐1), is restricted by collected debris. A +/‐
reading DP gage and DP switch are installed at the feed pump inlet as a troubleshooting aid. Cavitation
noticeably increases pump noise and severely decreases service life.

Fuel Flow Returning To The Source Tank
Fuel flow from the FOTS returning to the customer’s local source tank or fuel supply piping is equal to
the flow of the feed pump, less fuel process by centrifuge.

There are two ways to determine centrifuge throughput.
• The centrifuge software computes and displays expected flow based on analysis of all the
parameters it measures. This is not actually a flow measurement, but an indication of predicted
flow.
• (FI) is a local flow measuring instrument. It is a simple target/spring device, with the indicator
needle coupled magnetically to the target movement to indicate flow.

Treated Water Flow
During steady operation between cleaning events, on‐line consumption of treated water by the
centrifuge is very low, a few cc’s every 5 minutes. Each cleaning cycle consumes between 4 and 9 liters,
at a peak demand flow rate of 15 ltr/m. Thus daily treated water consumption depends primarily on the
interval between cleaning cycles.

Sludge Outlet Flow
All of the treated water sent into the centrifuge by the operating the bowl, plus all of the free water
separated by the centrifuge, leaves the centrifuge by the sludge outlet. Treated water sent into the
centrifuge by the solenoid valves leaves the sludge outlet primarily during the cleaning event, at bowl
opening. However, water arriving with raw fuel, and removed by the centrifuge, leaves the sludge
4

outlet continuously, by over‐flowing the gravity disk weir. Observing when and how much water flow
from the sludge outlet can give a rough idea of the amount of water being separated by the centrifuge
from the arriving fuel.

EFFECTIVE PERFORMANCE RANGE OF THE FOTS SKID
Performance Range of the Centrifuge
The centrifuge is very effective in removing dense materials, such as rust, metal slag, and water
droplets, but less effective, or ineffective, in removing materials close to, or less than, the density of
fuel.

The physics of the centrifugal separation process creates a rather sharply defined minimum particle size
that can be separated at a particular centrifuge throughput. Within the bowl, fuel flows upward and
inward. Every dense particle thus feels a fluid drag force inward from the cleaned fuel flow, which
opposes the centrifugal force pushing the particle outward for collection and disposal. For very small
particles, and particles with high drag for their mass, inward fluid drag forces are larger than outward
centrifugal forces and the particle passes through the centrifuge without removal. While particle
density and shape affect the size removal limit, iron oxide particle size where the centrifuge at rated
throughput loses effectiveness is on the order of 5‐10 microns.

The particulate separation capacity is affected by the time between bowl cleaning cycles, since high
particulate input can over‐load the spinning ring of water.

Separation effectiveness is affected by throughput. Lowering throughput increases the dwell time the
particulates are subject to outward centrifugal force, and also lowers the inward drag forces of the fuel
flowing through the centrifuge bowl. Since drag forces vary approximately as the square of the
throughput, small decreases in throughput can make significant improvements in cleaning.

The same physical effects determine the effectiveness of removing water droplets. Large droplets are
easily removed, and very small droplets, water‐fuel emulsions, and water dissolved in the fuel are not
removed.

Since water quantities great enough to over‐fill the spinning ring of water continuously overflows
through a weir (the “gravity disk”) at the top of the spinning bowl out the sludge port of the centrifuge,
water separation capacity is not limited by the operating time between bowl cleaning cycles.

Products of fuel degradation are close to the mass density of fuel so they are not effectively removed in
the centrifuge, although the heavier products may be partially removed.

Proper selection of the “gravity disc,” centrifuge throughput RV‐5, centrifuge back pressure RV‐4, plus
the sequence and timing of the water control solenoid valves, are essential to keep the spinning water
ring at the correct position so that only water flows over the “gravity disc” weir to the sludge outlet, and
only sludge is released during bowl opening in the cleaning cycle.

Water‐soluble salts introduce metal ions, such as sodium and potassium, that are very damaging to gas
turbine hot‐section components, especially in combination with sulfur. The centrifuge removes water
soluble salts to the extent that their carrier water is removed. Materials dissolved in fuel, such as sulfur
and vanadium, are not removed by the centrifuge.

5

Advantages of the centrifuge are that it can remove very large quantities of particulates and free water
within its performance range, and does so without the cost, labor, and disposal difficulties from
removing the same quantities of material exclusively using disposable filter elements. And, such
removal continues to be effective in the presence of fuel degradation products that would coat, and
thus defeat, water‐coalescing filter elements. The centrifuge throughput is adjusted to be well below
the centrifuge design maximum throughput, to decrease the minimum removal size of particulates and
water droplets.

Contaminants Not Removed By The Centrifuge
Contaminants dissolved in fuel, such as vanadium, dissolved sulfur, and dissolved water are not
removed. Water‐fuel emulsions are not removed. Very small particulates and very small water droplets
are not removed.

Since fuel degradation products are close to the density of fuel, the centrifuge is only partially effective
in removing them. A short cleaning interval, 30 minutes, will increase removal effectiveness and extend
filter life. Soft materials, such as degradation products, extrude through filter pores as differential
pressure rises.

Fuel degradation problems must be solved to achieve expected gas turbine performance and lifetime.
This may require a program for water and settled contaminant removal from tank bottoms: floating
suction connection in storage tanks; sterilization of tanks, contents, pipes and equipment; very large
area/low differential pressure filters; or special chemical treatment programs. The efforts may be
necessary upstream, all the way to the refinery.

Liquid fuel subject to long storage should be periodically tested for quality, especially in warm and
humid climates, or climates with substantial atmospheric dust.

MONITORING FUEL QUALITY AND FOTS PERFORMANCE
The following are methods of fuel quality monitoring associated with the FOTS.
There are, in addition to these, other indications of fuel quality, such as:
• Gas Turbine hot section analysis
• Gas Turbine temperature spread monitoring
• Analysis of fuel samples at the point of supplier delivery, and within storage tanks
• Analysis of performance and effluent of upstream fuel cleaning processes.

Fuel Sampling
The most important practice for ongoing fuel quantity monitoring is fuel sample analysis. Sample
analysis must be in accordance with GE Specification MID‐TD‐0000‐2:
• Analytical methods as defined by MID‐TD‐0000‐2
• Results tabulated side‐by‐side for comparison to MID‐TD‐0000‐2 limits

The analysis should be performed by a Trusted Laboratory, or a laboratory validated by comparison to
a Trusted Laboratory by split‐sample analysis.

The FOTS skid has two dedicated sample points, identified on the P&ID, each with a sample valve.
#1 (BV‐5), UNCLEANED FUEL, upstream of the centrifuge
#2 (BV‐6), CLEANED FUEL downstream of the centrifuge, upstream of the buffer tank
6

Sample procedures should be in accordance with ASTM PROCEDURE D4057, Practice for Manual
Sampling of Petroleum and Petroleum Products, Sample analysis is expensive. Samples with poor
records, or collected without proper procedures, are useless, or worse, deceptive.

Generally:
• Standard 1 ltr sample containers should be used, filled to 80%, only. Sample bottles must be
clean, and hands must be clean. Sweat contains sodium and other salts, so gloves should be
worn to prevent contamination.
• Samples must be captured under normal flowing operation, with stabilized flow. Samples
should not be taken when fuel is stagnant or not flowing at normal velocity through pipes.
• Samples having the same title must be taken from exactly the same point using exactly the same
procedures each time.
• A minimum of 2 liters of fuel must be drawn immediately before the sample is captured, to flush
the local stagnant volume in the sample line, which will otherwise serve as a contaminant
reservoir.
• The flushing and sample must be drawn at the maximum spigot flow.
• After flushing the spigot, rinse the sample bottle with sample fluid at least twice, and drain.
• The sample container must be labeled immediately after capture with the location of the site,
date, time, technician, customer witness, and reference number. Additional special conditions
should be noted, such as “Barge‐load of fuel arrived 6 hours ago.”
• If samples to be analyzed by more than one laboratory must be taken by the “split‐sample”
method: a larger sample must be captured, shaken at least two minutes for mixing, then
immediately split into two or more sample bottles, alternately filling each bottle 25% at a time .

Sludge Collection Monitoring
Visual inspection of the solids contents of the sludge collection can help quantify and identify removed
contaminants, and also establish that the centrifuge is removing them.

Larger than expected water quantities can indicate large amounts of free water in the fuel.

Excessive oily materials in the sludge barrel can indicate presence of fuel degradation products, leaking
centrifuge seals, miss‐adjusted or malfunctioning solenoid valves, or “break‐over.”
Flows from the centrifuge sludge outlet can also be observed at an inspection port accessible on the
centrifuge mini‐skid, in the discharge tube. Four causes of break over are:
• Too little seal water injected at the start of cleaning (SV‐10) not opening or open to short a time,
or flowing at too low a pressure)
• Leaking main seal (“seal ring”) l
• High centrifuge backpressure, as adjusted by RV‐4
• Incorrect gravity disk

STARTING AND STOPPING OF THE FOTS
Reference: SECTION 5, Operating Instructions.

7

Normal Starting and Stopping of the FOTS
At the FOTS HMI located on local control panel, on the MAIN screen, place the system in SYSTEM IN
LOCAL CONTROL and press START / STOP key side of the master screen. The system only monitor from
remote HMI.

At the FOTS HMI located on local control panel, on the MAIN screen, place the system in SYSTEM IN
REMOTE CONTROL. Now local HMI is disabling and remote HMI will be unable to operate the system.
START / STOP key side of the master screen.

EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
A FIRE/EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN command from the gas turbine or BOP fire panel stops the FOTS.

The ESD pushbutton on the face on the local control panel on the unit (not the HMI) is hardwired to the
gas turbine /BOP emergency panel, and can be initiates a full emergency shutdown. This ESD button is
active at all times.

MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of individual components is included in the manual SECTION 8

On the process unit level, three maintenance activities are particularly important: periodic scheduled
centrifuge operation; 4000 hr service, and water & air filters element changing.

Operating the FOTS every two weeks, minimum
The requirement that the FOTS be operated every two weeks, minimum, intends to assure that the
centrifuge itself, pumps and other equipment all kept ready to perform. And, periodic operation
freshens fuel, especially in pipes and hoses.

4000 Hour Service
4000 hour service for the centrifuge is critical to continued operation without damage or miss‐
performance of the centrifuge.

The FOTS control panel announces a warning alert at 3000 operating hours that a 4000 hour service is
approaching.

At 4000 operating hours, the centrifuge is shut down, and cannot be restarted without password
protected confirmation that the 4000 hour service has been performed.

8

SECTION 4
Installation System Reference & Drawings
SECTION 5
Operating Instructions
Issued by Date Ref. Page
ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (1) Of (18)

Subject Document type
FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Approved by
Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual
Basic Operating Instructions

Triplex Unit
Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM



Approved by
Index
GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 3
OPERATING SCREENS ......................................................................................................................... 4
Main Screen – Skid Overview ............................................................................................................... 5
Status Indication ................................................................................................................................... 6
Local Pushbuttons ................................................................................................................................. 6
Pump Selection..................................................................................................................................... 6
Local / Remote System Operation....................................................................................................... 6
Skid Settings - Login Screen .................................................................................................................. 7
Skid Parameter Screen ........................................................................................................................... 8
CG-1 Detail Screen ................................................................................................................................. 9
Status Indication ................................................................................................................................. 10
Local Pushbuttons ............................................................................................................................... 10
CG-1 Manual Screen ............................................................................................................................ 11
CG-1 Settings - Login Screen ............................................................................................................... 12
CG-1 Timer Screen ............................................................................................................................... 13
CG-1 Process Parameter Screen .......................................................................................................... 14
CG-1 Vibration Setup Screen .............................................................................................................. 15
Vibration Sensor Installation Proceedure ........................................................................................... 15
CG-1 Factory Parameter Screen ......................................................................................................... 16
CG-1 Maintenance Screen.................................................................................................................... 17
Alarm Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 18



Approved by
GENERAL
All centrifuge control and system monitoring is accomplished through the operator interface unit
(OIU) with the exception of emergency stop pushbuttons, which are hard wired to the front of
the control panel.
The OIU is an Allen Bradley PanelView Plus 700. Refer to Allen Bradley User Manual, Catalog
Number 2711P for detailed information on the unit.



Approved by
OPERATING SCREENS
Information is provided to the operator through a series of process operating screens. These
screens provide the operator with all of the necessary system status and performance
information. Below is a list of the available screens:
1. Main Screen - Skid Overview
2. Skid Settings / Login Screen
3. Skid Parameter Screen
4. CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 Detail Screen
5. CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 Manual Operation Screen
6. CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 Login Screen
7. CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 Timer Screen
8. CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 Process Parameter Screen
9. CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 Vibration Setup Screen
10. CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 Factory Parameter Screen
11. CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 Maintenance Screen
12. Alarm Screen



Approved by

Main Screen – Skid Overview
The Main Screen is the default screen that appears when power is turned on. The main screen
provides an overview of the skid.
Status Indication
1. Untreated Fuel Storage Tank Level UFST LLS – Level status; RED=Ok, GRN=Low
2. Treated Fuel Storage Tank Level TFST HLS – Level status; RED=Ok, GRN=High
3. Water Pressure Switch PS – Status; RED=Ok, GRN=Low pressure
4. Duplex Strainer PDS – Status; Red=Ok, GRN=High pressure
5. Feed Pump P-1, 2, 3 - Status; RED=On, GRN=Off; Auto/Man status
6. Flow Switch FS-1, 2, 3 – Status; RED=Ok, GRN=Low Flow
7. Fuel Inlet Temperature TT-1 – Readout in degrees Fahrenheit
8. Fuel Supply Header Pressure PT-3 – Readout in PSI
9. Fuel Flow to CG-1, 2, 3 – Readout in GPM
10. Centrifuge CG-1, 2, 3 - Drive Motor Status; RED=On, GRN=Off; Auto/Man status;
System” “Out of Service” “Fault” status
11. Total Flow FT – Readout in GPM
12. Centrifuge CG-1, 2, 3 sequence and time remaining (Sec) indication



Approved by

Local Pushbuttons
K7: System Start Pushbutton – Press to start the liquid fuel treatment skid.
K8: System Stop Pushbutton – Press to stop the liquid fuel treatment skid.
System in Local / Remote – Press this button to toggle between local control mode and
remote control mode. In remote control mode, the system can only be started via the
remotely mounted HMI.
K9: Skid Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the skid parameter screen
K11: Alarm Screen – Screen jump to the alarm screen.
Pump Selection
Feed Pump P-1, 2, 3 can be assigned to Centrifuge CG-1, 2, or 3 by
pressing the button labeled “P-1”, “P-2”, or “P-3”. One pump can only be
assigned to one Centrifuge.
Press the button labeled “CG-1”, “CG-2”, or “CG-3” to set Centrifuge CG-
1, 2, or 3 to System or Out Of Service Mode.
Note: Pump Selection and Centrifuge Mode can only be changed

when the skid is in Standstill.
System Operation
Press to change “System In Remote”. All controls from remote HMI
Press to change “System In Local”. All controls from local HMI



Approved by
Skid Settings - Login Screen

This screen contains links to the skid parameter screen, CG-1, CG-2, CG-3 detail screens and
return to main screen Skid Overview. The skid parameter screen is not accessiable until
successful login.
A login pushbutton is provided to gain access to the password protected screens. Press the
Login pushbutton and enter the password using the keypad. Contact Alfa Laval prior to making
any changes to the settings.
Local Pushbuttons
Skid Parameter Screen – Press this button to gain acess to the skid parameter screen
F6: CG-1 Detail Screen – Press this button to gain access to the detail screen
K12: Skid Overview – Screen jump to main screen (Skid Overview)



Approved by
Skid Parameter Screen
This screen is password protected and contains fuel supply header pressure parameters that
are adjustable to help meet process requirements. To change a parameter value, touch the
appropriate data field. Enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, then press the enter
key.
Local Pushbuttons



Approved by
CG-1 Detain Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)
The centrifuge detail screen provides an overview of the centrifuge and auxiliaries status
indication. Also, provides the access to settings and manual operation screens.



Approved by
CG-1 Detain Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)
Status Indication
1. Feed Inlet Valve V1 – On/Off status and Auto/Man status.

2. Fuel Inlet Pressure PT1 – Readout in PSI
3. Fuel Outlet Pressure PT4 – Readout in PSI
4. Fuel Flow to Centrifuge – Readout in GPM
5. Centrifuge - Drive Motor – On/Off status. Auto/Man status indication; “System” “Out of
Service” “Fault” status
6. Centrifuge Speed – Readout in RPM.
7. Vibration – Readout in millimeters.
8. Operating Water Valves SV-10, 15, 16 – On/Off status. Auto/Man status indication
9. Sludge Pump – On/Off status. Auto/Man status indication
10. Sludge Tank Level LS – RED=Ok; GRN=High Level
11. Next Discharge – Displays the time remaining before the next discharge cleaning cycle.
12. Next Maintenance – Displays the time remaining before the next maintenance.
Local Pushbuttons
Production / Standby- Press this button while in operation to toggle between Production and
Standby. While in Stanby mode, feed inlet valve V1 is off, diverting oil from the
centrifuge.
K9: Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the timer screen, parameter
screen, process parameter screen, vibration setup parameter, maintenance screen.
K10: CG-1 Manual – Press this button to gain acess to manual control screen
K11: Alarm Screen – Screen jump to the alarm screen.



Approved by
CG-1 Manual Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)
The manual screen provides control for skid related devices. Pressing the function key labeled
“Manual Screen” will produce the following screen.
The Manual Screen provides Auto/Manual and On/Off control for the devices listed above. To
place a device into Auto/Manual, press the appropriate pushbutton located next to the tag name
of the desired device. Once the device is placed into manual, press the On/Off pushbutton to
activate or deactivate the device. Local control is provided only for maintenance
troubleshooting. The normal position is Auto.
Local Pushbuttons
F6: CG-1 Detail Screen – Press to return to the detail screen.
F8: CG-1 Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the setting screen.
Manual Discharge – Press this button while the system is in operation to initiate a cleaning cycle.
All Devices to Auto Control – This is a convenience pushbutton to place all devices in Automatic
Mode.



Approved by
CG-1 Settings Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)
This screen has login access and contains links to the CG-1 detail screens and return to main
screen Skid Overview. The timer screen, process parameter screen, vibration setup screen,
factory parameter screen, and maintenance screen are not accessiable until successful login.
A login pushbutton is provided to gain access to the password protected screens. Press the
Login pushbutton and enter the password using the keypad. Contact Alfa Laval prior to making
any changes to the settings.
Local Pushbuttons



Approved by
CG-1 Timer Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)
The timer screen contains a list of timers that are adjustable to help meet process requirements.
Refer to Centrifuge Manaul for descriptions of the timers. To change a timer value, touch the
appropriate data field. Enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, then press the Enter
key.
Local Pushbuttons
F8: CG-1 Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the setting/Login screen



Approved by
CG-1 Process Parameter Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)
The process parameter screen contains a list of parameters that are adjustable to help meet
process requirements. Refer to Centrifuge Manual for descriptions of the parameters. To
change a parameter value, touch the appropriate data field. Enter the desired value using the
numeric keypad, then press the Enter key.
Local Pushbuttons
F8: CG-1 Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the settings/Login screen



Approved by
CG-1 Vibration Setup Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)
The vibration setup screen allows the operator to set the vibration sensor and adjust it for
optimal performance.
Vibration Sensor Installation Procedure

Perform the following when the system is in Standstill and the centrifuge has completely
stopped (0 rpm).
1. Touch the Fa18 – Vibration Sensor Adjustment Zero reading to bring up the numeric
touchpad and enter “Zero” (0).
2. As the sensor is inserted, the indication of the screen, Vibration Sensor True Depth or
the Vibration Sensor Depth will show the position of the sensor relative to the shaft.
3. Adjust the sensor till the Vibration Sensor Depth analog input reads approximately 12
mA +/- 1mA and lock it in place.
4. The Vibration Sensor Position display should read at or near 0 mm.
5. Touch the Fa18 – Vibration Sensor Adjustment Zero display again to bring up the
numeric display and enter the absolute value shown in the Vibration Sensor Position
display. This will zero out the Vibration Sensor Display, which is also on the main
display panel.
Local Pushbuttons



Approved by
CG-1 Factory Parameter Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)
The factory parameter screen contains a list of parameters that are adjustable to ensure safety
and performance requirements are met. Refer to Centrifuge Manual for descriptions of the
parameters. To change a parameter value, touch the appropriate data field. Enter the desired
value using the numeric keypad, then press the enter key.
Local Pushbuttons
F8: CG-1 Settings Screen – Press this button to gain access to the setting/Login screen
CG-1 Maintenance Screen (CG-2 and CG-3 screens are same as CG-1)



Approved by
The maintenance screen provides maintenance information and access to program shutdown.
Pressing the function key labeled “Maintenance Screen” will produce the following screen.
The Maintenance Screen provides Total Hours as well as a service time setting and an
indication as to when the next service is due. Also, there is a program shutdown pushbutton
that will take the PanelView out of its normal program and revert to the base screen for service
purposes.
Local Pushbuttons
K7: CG-1 Reset – Press this button to reset the maintenance service timer



Approved by
Alarm Screen
Press the Alarm Screen pushbutton to view active alarms or alarm history.
The top window displays active alarms, and the bottom window displays the alarm history. To
clear an active alarm, press the “Alarm Reset” pushbutton. To acknowledge the alarm on the
screen, press the “Ack Alarm” pushbutton. If the alarm is no longer active and has been
acknowledged, the alarm text in the top window will disappear. The alarm history will remain in
bottom window.

SECTION 6
Parameter List
Parameter List
Pass As-
Change By
Parameter word Description Shipped Unit Date
Set point whom
level Set point
Skid Parameter
- 1 High header pressure limit (PT3) 75 PSI
- 1 Low header pressure limit (PT3) 10 PSI
- HC High fuel oil temperature (TT) 151 F
Factory Parameter (CG-1, 2, 3)
Fa10 1 Bowl speed high 12000 RPM
Fa11 1 Bowl speed low 9500 RPM
Bowl speed decrease during
P161 1 300 RPM
discharge
Fa16 1 High vibration shutdown 0.50 mm
Fa17 1 High vibration Prewarning 0.30 mm
Fa18 1 Vibration sensor adjustment zero 0.103 mm
Maintenance Service Parameter (CG-1, 2, 3)
- 1 Service time setting 4000 Hr
Process Parameters (CG-1, 2, 3)
P153 1 High oil pressure limit (PT4) 50 PSI
P154 1 Low oil pressure limit (PT4) 25 PSI
P157 1 High feed pressure limit (PT1) 45 PSI
P158 1 Low feed pressure limit (PT1) 5 PSI
Timer Setting (CG-1, 2, 3)
Ti52 1 Separator startup 2 min
Ti55 1 Standby too long 5 min
Ti60 1 Initial bowl discharge (SV15 open) 5 sec
Ti61 1 Initial bowl drain 15 sec
Ti62 1 Initial bowl close (SV16 open) 20 sec
Ti63 1 Initial bowl sealing (SV10 open) 15 sec
P258 1 Feed on after initial discharge 30 sec
Ti68 1 Bowl discharge interval 30 min
Ti70 1 Feed off 15 sec
Ti72 1 Oil displacement (SV10 open) 10 sec
Ti74 1 Bowl discharge (SV15 open) 3 sec
Ti75 1 Bowl drain 15 sec
Ti76 1 Bowl close (SV16 open) 12 sec
Ti77 1 Bowl sealing (SV10 open) 12 sec
Feed on after di
P238 1 10 sec
scharge
Ti86 1 Check motor off 180 sec
Ti89 1 Wait for zero speed 30 min
Page 1 of 2

Parameter List
Pass As-
Device Change By
word Description Shipped Unit Date
Tag no Set point whom
level Set point
Local Device Setting
PRV-1 - Backpressure regulating valve 30 PSI
PRV-2 - Backpressure regulating valve 35 PSI
LS - Water supply pressure switch 30 PSI
DS-1 - DP alarm 5 PSI
Vent fan temp switch - Control
TS313 - 90 F
panel
Control panel enclosure temp
TS618 - 131 F
switch
Control panel space heater temp
TS825 - 50 F
switch
Feed pump internal relief valve
P-1, 2, 3 - 60 PSI
cracking pressure
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 7
Alarms and Fault Finding
Alarms and Fault Finding– P636

Alarm text Alarm type Why? What to do

Cover Switch - OPEN Fault - Separator not properly Assembled the separator
assembled according to instructions.
- Cover switch not made Check cover switch
Bowl Speed Sensor Error Fault - Sensor or cable damage Replace sensor or cable
Separator Run-up Too Long Fault - Separator friction blocks
Check the friction blocks
slipping
- Belt slipping Check the belt
- Height position of paring
Stop. Check and adjust the height
disc is incorrect
- Motor failure Replace the motor
- Bearing (s) damaged or
worn in coupling or Replace all bearings
spindle drive
Bowl Speed High Fault - High power net
Check power supply before start
frequency
- Incorrect transmission Disintegration hazard
parts (50Hz belt pulley Stop and change the belt
used for 60Hz power transmission to suit the power
supply) supply frequency.
Bowl Speed Low Fault - Slipping belt Change belt
- Worn coupling pads Check / change pads
Check closing water supply
(SV16)
- Bowl not properly closed
Check bowl operating system for
leakage. Check nozzle.
- Bowl not properly
Check that the lock ring is in place
assembled
- Low power net frequency Check power
- Motor failure Change motor
- Bearing(s) damaged Replace all bearings

- Incorrect transmission Disintegration hazard
parts (60Hz belt pulley Stop and change the belt
used for 50Hz power transmission to suit the power
supply) supply frequency.
Bowl Speed Decrease During Fault Check opening water supply
Discharge Is Too Low (SV15)
- Fail to discharge Check closing water supply
- Bowl not properly closed (SV16)
Check bowl operating system for
leakage. Check nozzle.
Feed Pressure Sensor PT1 -
Fault - Sensor or cable damage Replace sensor or cable
ERROR
Adjust PRV-1 set pressure
Feed Pressure PT1 - HIGH Fault - Fuel flow restricted
Adjust feed valve RV5
Feed Pressure PT1 - LOW Fault Check function of change-over
- No flow through PT1
valve V1
- Pump not working Check pump
Check feed line
- Pressure in feed line too Adjust feed valve RV5
low
Page 1 of 4



Oil Backpressure Sensor PT4
– ERROR
Oil Backpressure PT4 – HIGH Fault Check flow
- Increased throughput
Adjust valve RV5 and RV4.
- Valve RV4 too restricted. Adjust valve RV4.
Oil Backpressure PT4 – LOW Fault - Decreased throughput Check feed pump and adjust flow
- Regulation valve RV4
Adjust backpressure valve RV4
open too much
Check seal water flow (SV10=15
- Fuel dump into oily water
l/m)
/sludge tank.
-Bowl opens
Check bowl is not open during
unintentionally during
process
operation
Measure the water flow in the
- Too little or no water in three hoses from the water block
the operating water and compare the correct value.
system SV10=15 l/m, SV15=11 l/m,
SV16=2.8 l/m.
- Hoses between the
supply valves and
Fit hoses correctly
separator are incorrectly
fitted.
- Nozzle in bowl body Clean the nozzle.
clogged. Perform Inspection service
- Valve SV15 and SV16
Rectify the leak
are leaking
Sludge Tank Level High Fault Check bowl is not open during
process
Check PT4 pressure
- Fuel dump into oily water
Check seal water valve (SV10)
/sludge tank.
flow
Adjust timer (Ti63)
Check level switch LS
Fuel Temperature Sensor
TT1 - ERROR
Run feed pump to circulate fuel
- Fuel temperature higher
Fuel Temperature - HIGH Fault Pump shall run manually from skid
than set point
mounted panel
Vibration Sensor Fault Fault - Sensor or cable damage Replace sensor or cable
Vibration Level Approaching Fault Disintegration hazard
- Sludge remaining in part
Shutdown Dismantle, clean and check the
of the bowl
bowl before restart.
- Bowl wrongly mounted Check assembly
- Disc stack compression
Check assembly
incorrect
- Bowl assembled with
Check assembly
parts from other centrifuge
- Height position of paring Stop the centrifuge, measure and
disc is incorrect if necessary adjust the height
- Bowl spindle bent Replace the bowl spindle
- Bearing(s) damage or
Replace all bearings
worn
- The frame feet are worn
Replace the frame feet
out
- Spindle top bearing
Replace all spring
spring broken
Page 2 of 4



High Vibration Fault Disintegration hazard
- Sludge remaining in part
Dismantle, clean and check the
of the bowl
Disintegration hazard bowl before restart.
If excessive vibration occurs, - Bowl wrongly mounted Check assembly
stop centrifuge and keep bowl
- Disc stack compression
filled with liquid during Check assembly
incorrect
rundown. The cause of the
- Bowl assembled with
vibration must be identified Check assembly
parts from other centrifuge
and corrected before the
centrifuge is restarted. - Height position of paring Stop the centrifuge, measure and
disc is incorrect if necessary adjust the height
- Bowl spindle bent Replace the bowl spindle
- Bearing(s) damage or
Replace all bearings
worn
- The frame feet are worn
Replace the frame feet
out
- Spindle top bearing
Replace all spring
spring broken
System Water Pressure Too Fault - Water supply pressure Check water supply pressure
Low low
- Clogged water filter Clean the filter
Separator In Standby Too
Fault - Time in standby expired Clear alarm before time expired
Long
Check the contactor to see if it
- Centrifuge motor pulls in when starting the
contactor feedback centrifuge
Separator Running FB Or OL-
Fault missing, or overload Reset the overload
ERROR
tripped when commanded Check overload setting
to run Check motor and/or cable for
cause for overload
Feed Pump Selection Not Feed pump select is not From main screen, assign feed
Fault
Made made with Centrifuge pump with centrifuge
- Feed pump motor
Check the contactor to see if it
Feed Pump #1, 2, 3 Run contactor feedback
Fault pulls in when starting the feed
Feedback Fault missing when
pump
commanded to run
Reset the overload
- Feed pump motor
Feed Pump #1, 2, 3 Overload Check overload setting
Fault overload tripped when
Fault Check motor and/or cable for
commanded to run
cause for overload
- No fuel flow through flow Check fuel supply
Feed Pump #1, 2, 3 No Flow Fault switch FS-1, 2, 3 when Check valve position
feed pump is on Check pump
Fuel supply header pressure
Sensor PT3 - ERROR
Fuel supply header pressure Adjust PRV-1 set pressure
Fault - Fuel flow restricted
PT3 - HIGH
Fuel supply header pressure Fault - Pump not working Check pump
PT3 - LOW
Check fuel supply line
- Pressure in fuel supply
line too low
Inlet Strainer Clogged Warning - High DP across the Switch strainer
strainer Clean the basket
Fill the fuel
Untreated Fuel Tank Level
Fault - Fuel level low
Low
Page 3 of 4



Lower the fuel level
Treated Fuel Tank Level High Fault - Fuel level high
Arrange service
Reset Service Timer after service
Service Timer CG-1, 2, 3 Warning Warning timer expired

System Shutdown
Arrange service
Service Time Expired CG-1, Reset Service Timer after service
Fault Timer expired
2, 3

Check air inlet/exhaust filters

Control panel inside temp Check ventilation fan
Cabinet High Temp Warning
reached 135F/57C
Check for cause

Emergency Stop - BUTTON Emergency stop button Reset pushbutton
Fault
PUSHED pushed
Page 4 of 4

SECTION 8
Maintenance Instructions
A) Centrifuge
B) Valve Block, Water
C) Feed Pump
Separator Manual
High Speed Separator
P 636
Product No. 881202-08-01

Book No. 592410-02 Rev. 1
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB January 2010
Original instructions
This publication or any part there of may not be

reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 Read This First .............................................................. .7
2 Safety Instructions ..................................................... .9

2.1 Warning signs in text ............................................. 14
2.2 Environmental issues ............................................ 15
2.3 Requirements of personnel.................................. 16
3 Basic Principles Of Separation ....................... .17

3.1 Separation By Gravity............................................ 17
3.2 Centrifugal Separation .......................................... 18
3.3 Temperatures ........................................................... 18
4 Design ............................................................................... .19

4.1 Overview .................................................................... 19
4.2 The Drive Section.................................................... 20
4.3 The Process Section .............................................. 21
4.3.1 Inlet and outlet............................................................... 21
4.3.2 Separator bowl .............................................................. 23
4.3.3 Selection of gravity disc ................................................ 29
4.4 Sensors (optional) ................................................... 33
4.5 Separating Function ............................................... 34
4.5.1 The liquid balance in the bowl ...................................... 34
4.5.2 Liquid flow ..................................................................... 35
5 Operating Instructions.......................................... .37

5.1 Before First Start-up .............................................. 37
5.2 Before Start............................................................... 38
5.3 Start ............................................................................. 40
5.3.1 Starting and running-up procedure............................... 41
5.4 Operating ................................................................... 44
5.4.1 Sludge discharge .......................................................... 45
5.5 Stopping procedure ................................................ 46
5.6 Emergency stop....................................................... 47
5.7 After Emergency Stop ........................................... 48
6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly..................... .51

6.1 Periodic Maintenance ............................................ 51
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals ................................................... 51
6.1.2 Maintenance procedures .............................................. 51
6.1.3 Tightening of screws ..................................................... 52
6.1.4 Service kits .................................................................... 52
6.2 Maintenance Log ..................................................... 53
6.3 Dismantling ............................................................... 56
6.3.1 Introduction.................................................................... 56
592410-02
6.3.2 Tools............................................................................... 56
6.3.3 Frame hood ................................................................... 58
6.3.4 Bowl ............................................................................... 61
6.3.5 Driving device................................................................ 71
6.3.6 Centrifugal clutch .......................................................... 84
6.4 Actions Before Assembly ..................................... 91
6.4.1 Cleaning ...................................................................... 91
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion ............................................... 93
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks ................................................... 94
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion .................................................. 95
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet ................................................. 97
6.4.6 Lubrication of bowl parts ............................................... 98
6.4.7 How to lubricate bowl parts with slide lacquer.............. 99
6.4.8 Check for galling on operating slide and bowl body . 100
6.5 Assembly .................................................................. 101
6.5.1 Centrifugal clutch ........................................................ 101
6.5.2 Driving device.............................................................. 107
6.5.3 Bowl ............................................................................. 120
6.5.4 Frame hood ................................................................. 134
6.5.5 Unbalance sensor (optional) ....................................... 137
6.5.6 Speed sensor (optional) .............................................. 138
6.6 Actions After Assembly....................................... 139
6.6.1 Control of machine plates and safety labels .............. 139
6.7 Oil Change ............................................................... 141
6.7.1 Lubricating oil .............................................................. 141
6.7.2 Check oil level ............................................................. 142
6.7.3 Oil change procedure.................................................. 142
6.7.4 Lubrication chart.......................................................... 143
6.7.5 Lubricants.................................................................... 145
6.7.6 Lubricating oils ............................................................ 148
6.8 Lifting instructions ............................................... 150
6.8.1 Lifting the separator..................................................... 150
6.8.2 Lifting the bowl ............................................................ 151
7 Fault Finding ............................................................. .153

7.1 Mechanical Functions.......................................... 153
7.1.1 Separator vibration ...................................................... 153
7.1.2 Smell ............................................................................ 154
7.1.3 Noise............................................................................ 154
7.1.4 Speed too low .............................................................. 154
7.1.5 Speed too high ............................................................ 155
7.1.6 Starting power too high ............................................... 155
7.1.7 Starting power too low ................................................. 155
7.1.8 Starting time too long................................................... 156
7.2 Separating Functions ........................................... 157
7.2.1 Bowl opens accidentally during operation .................. 157
592410-02
7.2.2 Bowl fails to open for sludge discharge ...................... 157
7.2.3 Unsatisfactory separation result .................................. 157
7.2.4 Bowl fails to close........................................................ 158
8 Technical Reference .............................................159

8.1 Product description .............................................. 159
8.2 Technical Data ....................................................... 161
8.3 Connection List...................................................... 162
8.4 Interface Description ........................................... 164
8.4.1 Scope .......................................................................... 164
8.4.2 References .................................................................. 164
8.4.3 Definitions .................................................................... 165
8.4.4 Goal ............................................................................. 165
8.4.5 Description of separator modes .................................. 166
8.4.6 Remote start ................................................................ 167
8.4.7 Handling of connection interfaces .............................. 168
8.5 Demand Specification Water............................. 175
8.6 Drawings .................................................................. 176
8.6.1 Basic size drawing ...................................................... 176
8.6.2 Foundation drawing..................................................... 177
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram ............................................. 178
8.6.4 Performance data in- and outlet device ...................... 179
8.6.5 Power consumption ..................................................... 181
8.6.6 Operating water interface............................................ 185
8.6.7 Electric motor .............................................................. 187
9 Installation ...................................................................189
9.1 Introduction ............................................................ 189
9.2 Upon Arrival At The Storage Area ................... 190
9.2.1 Transport...................................................................... 190
9.2.2 Protection and storage of goods
..................................................................................... 191
9.3 Planning of Installation ....................................... 192
9.3.1 Important measurements ............................................ 192
9.3.2 Maintenance service ................................................... 193
9.3.3 Connections to surrounding equipment ...................... 194
9.4 Storage ..................................................................... 195
9.5 Before start-up ....................................................... 195
592410-02
592410-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 1 READ THIS FIRST
1 Read This First

This manual is designed for operators,
maintenance personnel and service engineers
working with the Alfa Laval P 636 separator.
If the separator has been delivered and

installed by Alfa Laval as part of a
processing system, this manual should be
viewed as part of the System Documentation.
Study carefully all instructions in any
System Documentation.
In addition to this Separator Manual a

Spare Parts Catalogue, SPC is supplied.
The Separator Manual consists of:
Safety Instructions
Pay special attention to the safety instructions
for the separator. Accidents causing damage to
equipment and/or serious injury to persons or
personnel can result if the safety instructions
are not followed.
Basic Principles of Separation

This chapter describes the purpose of separation
and separation principles.
Design and function

This chapter contains a description of the
separator.
Operating Instructions
This chapter contains operating instructions for
the separator only.
592410-02 7
SEPARATOR MANUAL 1 READ THIS FIRST
Service, Dismantling, Assembly

This chapter gives instructions for the
maintenance procedures. It also contains step-
by-step instructions for dismantling and
assembly of the separator for service and
repair.
Fault Finding
Refer to this chapter if the separator functions
abnormally.
If the separator has been installed as a part of a
processing system, always refer to the trouble-
tracing instructions, in the System
Documentation.
Technical Reference
This chapter contains technical data
concerning the separator and drawings.
Installation
This chapter contains specifications and
recommendations concerning separator
installation.
NOTE
A complete reading of this manual by personnel in

contact with the machine is essential to safety.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate
or maintain the separator until they have read and
fully understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the machine and the work to be carried
out.
8
592410-02
2 Safety Instructions
The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at high

speed. This means that:
• Kinetic energy is high
• Great forces are generated
G0010421
• Stopping time is long
Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

Rotating parts are carefully balanced to reduce
undesired vibrations that can cause a breakdown.
Material properties have been considered
carefully during design to withstand stress and
fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a
specific separation duty (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density etc.) and must not be
used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result in
unbalance due to build-up of sediment, reduction
of material strength, etc., that subsequently could
lead to serious damage and/or injury.
The following basic safety instructions therefore
apply:
• Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.
• Strictly follow the instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance.
• Ensure that personnel are competent and
have sufficient knowledge of maintenance
and operation, especially concerning
emergency stopping procedures.
S0151211
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts

and the special tools supplied.
9
Disintegration hazards
• When power cables are connected,

always check direction of motor rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could
unscrew.
S01512F1
• If excessive vibration occurs, stop
separator and keep bowl filled with
liquid during rundown.
S01512N1
• Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.
S01512P1
• Check that the gear ratio is correct for
power frequency used. If incorrect,
subsequent overspeed may result in a
serious break down.
• Welding or heating of parts that rotate S01512L1
can seriously affect material strength.

S0151241
• Inspect regularly for corrosion and

erosion damage. Inspect frequently if
process liquid is corrosive or erosive.
S01512H1
10
Entrapment hazards
• Make sure that rotating parts have come

to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.
S01512O1
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and
lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
S0151261
Assemble the machine completely
before start. All covers and guards must
be in place.
Electrical hazard
• Follow local regulations for electrical

installation and earthing (grounding).
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and
S0151271
lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Crush hazards
• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.
S01512M1
Do not work under a hanging load.

S01512Y1
11
Noise hazards
• Use ear protection in noisy

environments.
S0151291
Burn hazards
• Lubrication oil, machine parts and

various machine surfaces can be hot and
cause burns. Wear protective gloves.
S01512A1
Skin irritation hazards
• When using chemical cleaning agents,

make sure you follow the general rules
and suppliers recommendation
regarding ventilation, personnel S01512D1
protection etc.
• Use of lubricants in various situations.
12
Cut hazards
• Sharp edges, especially on bowl discs

and threads, can cause cuts. Wear
protective gloves.
S01512B1
Flying objects
• Risk for accidental release of snap rings

and springs when dismantling and
assembly. Wear safety goggles.
S01512C1
Health hazard
• Risk for unhealthy dust when handling

friction blocks/pads. Use a dust mask to
make sure not to inhale any dust.
S01512V1
13
2.1 Warning signs in text

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three grades
of warning signs used in the text where there is a
risk for injury to personnel.
R
! DANGE
DANGER indicates an imminently

hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
ING
WARN
!
WARNING indicates a potentially

could result in death or serious injury.
ON
CAUTI
!
CAUTION indicates a potentially

may result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTE
NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, may result
in property damage.
14
2.2 Environmental issues
Unpacking
Packing material consists of wood, plastics,
cardboard boxes and in some cases metal straps.
Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused,
recycled or used for energy recovery.
Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant.
Metal straps should be sent for material recycling.
Maintenance
During maintenance oil and wear parts in the
machine are replaced.
Oil must be taken care of in agreement with local
regulations.
Rubber and plastics should be burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant. If not available they
should be disposed to a suitable licensed land fill
site.
Bearings and other metal parts should be sent to
a licensed handler for material recycling.
Seal rings and friction linings should be disposed
to a licensed land fill site. Check your local
regulations.
Worn out or defected electronic parts should be
sent to a licensed handler for material recycling.
15
2.3 Requirements of
personnel
Only skilled or instructed persons are allowed to
operate the machine, e.g. operating and
maintenance staff.
• Skilled person: A person with technical
knowledge or sufficient experience to enable
him or her to perceive risks and to avoid
hazards which electricity/mechanics can
create.
• Instructed person: A person adequately
advised or supervised by a skilled person to
enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics
can create.
In some cases special skilled personnel may
need to be hired, like electricians and others. In
some of these cases the personnel has to be
certified according to local regulations with
experience of similar types of work.
16
SEPARATOR MANUAL 3 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF SEPARATION
3 Basic Principles Of Separation

The purpose of separation can be to
• free a liquid of solid particles,

• separate two mutually insoluble liquids
with different densities while removing
any solids present at the same time,
• separate and concentrate solid particles
from a liquid.
3.1 Separation By Gravity

A liquid mixture in a stationary bowl will clear
slowly as the heavy particles in the liquid
mixture sink to the bottom under the influence
of gravity.
A lighter liquid rises while a heavier liquid and
solids sink.
G 08 70 11 1
Continuous separation and sedimentation can be
achieved in a settling tank having outlets
arranged according to the difference in density of
the liquids.
Heavier particles in the liquid mixture will settle Gravity
and form a sediment layer on the tank bottom.
Lighter
liquid
Heavier
liquid Sediment layer of
heavier particles
G 0 87 02 1 1
592410-02 17
SEPARATOR MANUAL 3 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF SEPARATION
3.2 Centrifugal Separation

In a rapidly rotating bowl, the force of gravity
is replaced by centrifugal force, which is many Lighter liquid
times greater. Heavier liquid
Separation and sedimentation is continuous

and takes place very quickly.
The centrifugal force in the separator bowl can
achieve in a few seconds that which takes many
hours in a tank under influence of gravity.
The separation efficiency is influenced by
changes in the oil viscosity, separating
temperatures and in throughput.
G 0 87 03 1 1
Centrifugal force
3.3 Temperatures
For some types of process liquids (e.g.
mineral oils) a high separating temperature
will normally increase the separation
capacity. The temperature influences oil
viscosity and density and should be kept
constant throughout the separation.
Viscosity Density difference

Viscosity is a fluids resistance against movement. Density is mass per volume unit. The greater the density
Low viscosity facilitates separation. Viscosity can be difference between the two liquids, the easier the
reduced by heating. separation. The density difference can be increased by
heating.
Low density difference

G 0 88 6 01 1
G 08 85 91 1
High density difference.

High viscosity Low viscosity
18
592410-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 4 DESIGN
4 Design
Process section
The feed inlet and outlets
are situated at the top of Electric motor
the separator. The rotating bowl is driven
by the electric motor via a
The liquid is cleaned in the belt transmission.
rotating separator bowl
inside the frame hood.
Sensors (optional)
Drive section
The separator can be
monitored by a speed The rotating separator
sensor, an unbalance bowl is driven by a flat
sensor and an interlocking belt transmission.
switch.
Frame feet
Sludge outlet
The separator rests
on vibration damping Separated solids are discharged at
frame feet. preset intervals.
G 0 8 70 68 1
4.1 Overview The inlet and outlet device contains the

processing parts of the separator; the inlets,
The separator comprises a process section and outlets and piping.
a drive section powered by an electric motor.
The process liquid is cleaned in the separator
The separator frame comprises a lower body bowl. The bowl is fitted on the upper part of a
and a frame hood. The motor is attached to the vertical spindle and rotates at high speed
frame. The frame feet dampen vibration. inside the frame hood. The bowl also contains
the discharge mechanism which empties the
The bottom part of the separator contains a flat
sludge during operation.
belt transmission, a centrifugal clutch and a
vertical spindle. The lower body also contains A speed sensor (option) and an unbalance
an oil sump for lubrication of spindle bearings. sensor (option) are part of the equipment for
monitoring the separator functions.
592410-02 19
4.2 The Drive Section

The separator bowl is driven by an electric
motor via a belt transmission. The belt
pulley on the motor shaft includes a
centrifugal clutch.
Flat belt
The flat belt transmission has a
ratio which increases the bowl
speed several times compared
with the motor speed.
To reduce bearing wear and the

transmission of bowl vibrations to The centrifugal clutch ensures a
the frame and foundation, the top gentle start and smooth acceleration,
bearing of the bowl spindle is and at the same time prevents
mounted in a spring dampened overloading of the belt and motor.
bearing seat.
The bearings on the spindle are

lubricated by the oil spray produced
by an oil pump mounted on the
lower end of the spindle.
G 0 87 07 7 1
20
592410-02
4 DESIGN SEPARATOR MANUAL
4.3 The Process Section

The separation process takes place inside
the rotating separator bowl. The feed and
outlet of process liquid takes place in the
inlet and outlet unit on top of the separator
frame hood.
4.3.1 Inlet and outlet

The inlet and outlet unit consists of the
following parts:
A connecting housing for pipe connections.
A pipe with a paring disc is located inside the
connecting housing. The pipe has channels for
incoming and outgoing process liquid.
The paring disc, pumps the cleaned oil out of
the bowl.
Separated water leaves the bowl through holes
in the bowl hood and is discharged through the
sludge outlet.
The paring disc is located inside and at the top
of the separator bowl.
The inlet and outlet device is held together
against the frame hood by a nut on the end of
the inlet pipe.
Height adjusting rings determine the height
position of the paring disc relative to the bowl.
21
592410-02
Uncleaned oil Pipe
Cleaned oil Water
Paring disc
Connecting housing
G 08 8 61 81
22
592410-02
4.3.2 Separator bowl

The separator bowl, with its sludge discharge
mechanism, is built-up as follows:
The bowl body and bowl hood are held together
by a lock ring (Centrilock). Inside the bowl are
the distributor and the disc stack. The disc
stack is kept compressed by the bowl hood. The
discharge slide forms a separate bottom in the
bowl body.
The upper space between the bowl hood and the
top disc forms the water chamber. From here
the separated water is discharged through
holes in the bowl hood.
The oil paring chamber, with its paring disc, is
located inside the top of the distributor. From
here the cleaned oil is pumped out of the bowl.
The sludge space is in the bowl periphery. The
bowl is kept closed by the discharge slide,
which seals against a seal ring in the bowl
hood.
At fixed intervals, decided by the operator, the
discharge slide drops down to empty the bowl of
sludge.
The sludge discharge mechanism, which
controls the movement of the discharge slide, is
comprised of an operating slide and an
operating water ring. Passive parts are: nozzle
and valve plugs. The operating water cover,
beneath the bowl, supplies operating water to
the discharge mechanism via the operating
water ring.
23
592410-02
Bowl hood
Gravity disc
Top disc
Level ring Oil paring chamber
Disc stack
Bowl body Lock ring
Seal ring
Discharge
slide
Operating slide
Sludge space
Operating water ring
Distributor support
G 08 86 9 91
Nozzle
Holder Distributor
24
592410-02
Purifier bowl
The illustration shows the characteristic part of 0
the purifier bowl, the gravity disc. The disc

should be chosen according to directions in
‘‘4.3.3 Selection of gravity disc” on page 29.
The gravity disc determines the interface
position in a purifier bowl.
A purifier bowl has two liquid outlets, 220 (oil)
and 221 (water).
G 0 6 85 5A 1
Position of interface
An interface (1) is formed between the oil and
water in the bowl. In order to achieve optimum
separation of the oil, the interface must be
maintained in the correct position, which is
between the disc stack and the outer edge of
the top disc. If the interface moves outside the
outer edge of the top disc the water seal will
break and oil will be discharged with the water.
An interface positioned inside the disc stack
G 0 0 47 03 1
will cause bad separation results.
The position of the interface is adjusted by
altering the pressure balance of the liquid
phases oil and water inside the separator,
which is done by exchanging the gravity disc.
For this purpose a number of gravity discs with
various hole diameters are delivered with the
separator.
25
592410-02
A Correct interface position
B. Wrong interface position - broken water seal
G 00 11 72 1
C. Wrong interface position - bad separation
26
592410-02
Factors influencing the interface position

1 Oil viscosity, density and throughput
Oil with high density and/or high viscosity, as
well as high throughput, will position the oil/
water interface closer to the bowl periphery
than for oil with low properties.
G 0 01 18 2 1
A. High viscosity/density/ B. Low viscosity/density/
throughput throughput
2 Gravity disc
To compensate for the above factors the
interface is adjusted to a correct position by
altering the outlet for the water, i.e. exchanging
the gravity disc. Changing to a gravity disc
with a larger hole diameter will move the
interface towards the bowl periphery, whereas,
a disc with a smaller hole diameter will move
the interface closer to the bowl centre.
G 0 0 11 92 1
A. Gravity disc with large B. Gravity disc with small
hole diameter hole diameter
3 Excessive back pressure

Excessively high back pressure in the oil outlet
prevents the oil from being pumped out. The
inner oil level will then move towards centre of
the bowl and, at the same time, push the oil/
water interface outwards towards the bowl
periphery. The effect is a wrong interface
G 0 01 20 2 1
position, which may cause broken water seal.
A. Excessive back pressure B. Normal back pressure
27
592410-02
Clarifier bowl
The illustration shows the characteristic part of 0
the clarifier bowl. In clarification the gravity

disc is replaced by a so called clarifier disc, i.e. a
disc with the smallest possible hole diameter
(Ø) which seals off the water outlet. No liquid
seal is needed when clarifying.
G 0 6 85 5B 1
28
592410-02
4.3.3 Selection of gravity disc

The separator is delivered with a set of gravity 0
discs.
Clarification
When running the separator as a clarifier,
select the gravity disc with the smallest hole
diameter, the so-called clarifier disc. See the
Spare Parts Catalogue for correct hole
diameter.
Purification
G 0 68 55 A 1
A number of gravity discs are delivered for
operating the separator as a purifier. The
diameter of a gravity disc sets the position of
the oil-water interface in the separator. The
separation efficiency can be optimized by
selection of the correct diameter for each
process.
When selecting a gravity disc the general rule
is to use the disc having the largest possible
hole without causing a break of the water seal.
The heavier or more viscous the light phase
(oil) and the larger the liquid feed the smaller
the diameter should be.
To remove more of the light phase (oil) from the
heavy phase (water), the interface should be
placed nearer the bowl centre, however not
inside the outer edge of the discs (too small
gravity disc), as this would prevent the liquid
flow.
For a more detailed description of the interface
position, see ‘‘ Purifier bowl” on page 25.
Some gravity discs have four small holes drilled
outside the large hole. You must pay regard to
these holes when measure the hole diameter Ø,
see the illustration. Measure between the
centres of the holes.
G 0 73 2 92 1
All gravity discs have their hole diameters

Where to measure the hole diameter of a gravity disc
stamped on them.
A. Gravity disc without holes
B. Gravity disc with four small holes
29
592410-02
As an aid, use the nomogram on page 31 to find

the correct gravity disc. It can be used when the
density of the oil at a temperature of 15 °C is
known. However, note that the nomogram is
purely theoretical. In practical operation,
practice the following general rule:
1 Fit a gravity disc one size larger than the
recommended in the nomogram.
2 Run the separator.
3 Observe if oil flows through the sludge outlet.
– If Yes, stop the separator and fit the next
smaller gravity disc.
– If No, stop the separator and fit the next
larger gravity disc.
4 Repeat steps 1-3 above until having the
gravity disc with the largest hole diameter
without causing a break of the water seal
30
592410-02
Nomogram, gravity disc

Alfa Laval ref. 592591 rev. 0
Density above 991 at 15oC not allowed
1,00
53,2 Max
54,7
56,1
57,4
58,7
0,95
60,2
62
64,2
66,8
69,9
0,90
Density ratio
73,6
77,9
0,85
83
89
0,80
0,75
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G 0 86 9 66 8
3
m /h
NOTE
Use level ring with ∅ 52.
31
592410-02
How to use the nomogram

The presence of salt water may demand the use
of a gravity disc with a larger hole diameter
than indicated in the nomogram (the
nomogram is based on the properties of fresh
water).
Example I in nomogram
Reference in graph:_________________
Oil density:945 kg/m3 at 15 °C
Separating temperature:75 °C
Throughput:3 m3/h
The nomogram indicates that a gravity disc
with a hole diameter of 66,5 mm should be
tried.
r = Density of oil in kg/m3 at 15 °C
Q = Throughput in m3/h
T = Separating temperature in °C or °F
Ø = Gravity disc hole diameter in mm
D = Density ratio
Example II in nomogram
Reference in graph:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Oil density:845 kg/m3 at 15 °C
Separating temperature:55 °C
Throughput:6 m3/h
The nomogram indicates that a gravity disc
with a hole diameter of 81 mm should be tried.
32
592410-02
4.4 Sensors (optional)

The separator can be equipped with a speed
sensor, unbalance sensor, and interlocking
switch.
Speed sensor (option) Unbalance sensor (option)

A speed sensor indicates the speed of the separator. The For indication of any abnormal unbalance, the separator can
correct speed is needed to achieve the best separating be equipped with a sensor monitoring the radial position of
results and for reasons of safety. Refer to type plate for speed the bowl spindle.
particulars.
Cover interlocking switch (option)
When the cover is closed the interlocking circuit in the control
system is closed which makes it possible to start the
separator.
Cover interlocking switch
Unbalance sensor
Speed sensor
G 08 73 47 1
33
592410-02
4.5 Separating Function

The separator separates water and solids
from the uncleaned oil. Water normally
leaves the separator through the sludge
outlet. During sludge discharge, solids
(sludge) and water are removed through the
discharge ports.
4.5.1 The liquid balance in the bowl

The liquid levels in the bowl depend on many
factors (bowl geometry, liquid densities, flow
rates etc.). To get a picture of how the liquids
are distributed in the bowl, imagine that the
bowl is at standstill and turned 90° (only
influenced by gravity). The bowl can now be
compared with a settling tank:
SEPARATOR BOWL TURNED 90°
Level ring
Unseparated oil
Separated oil
G Water
R
Top disc
A Distributor
V
I Oil/water interface
T
Unseparated oil
G 08 86 4 71
Y
Separated oil
Water
SETTLING TANK
34
592410-02
4.5.2 Liquid flow

Unseparated oil is fed into the bowl through
the inlet pipe and travels via the distributor
towards the periphery of the bowl.
When the oil reaches slots in the disc stack, it
rises through the channels formed by the disc
stack, where it is evenly distributed.
The oil is continuously cleaned as it travels
towards the centre of the bowl. When the
cleaned oil leaves the disc stack, it flows
through a number of holes in the distributor
and enters the oil paring chamber, over a level
ring. From here it is pumped by the oil paring
disc, and leaves the bowl through the oil outlet.
Separated water, sludge and solid particles,
which are heavier than the oil, are forced
towards the periphery of the bowl and collect in
the sludge space.
The space between the bowl hood and top disc,
as well as the water chamber, is filled with
water, which flows over the gravity disc
through holes in the bowl hood.
35
592410-02
DISCHARGE OF WATER THROUGH WATER OUTLET
Unseparated oil
Water
Separated oil
Water chamber
Bowl hood
Level ring Water

outlet
Top disc
Oil paring chamber
Sludge
space
Oil/water interface
Uncleaned oil
Cleaned oil
G 0 8 86 28 1
Liquid seal / displacement-

/ separated water
36
592410-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5 Operating Instructions
These operating instructions describe routine
procedures to be followed before and during
the start sequence, during the running and
stopping sequence of the separator.
If system documentation is available, always

follow the operating instructions therein. If
there is no system documentation, the
instructions below are to be followed.
5.1 Before First Start-up

Technical demands for connections and
limitations for the separator are listed in chapter
‘‘8 Technical Reference” on page 159:
• Technical data
• Connection list
• Interface description
• Operating water interface
• Basic size drawing
• Foundation drawing.
Before first start:
• Ensure the machine is installed correctly
and that feed lines and drains have been
flushed clean.
• Fill oil in the oil bath. See ‘‘6.7 Oil Change”
on page 141. Quality of oil see ‘‘6.7.6
Lubricating oils” on page 148.
• Check the direction of rotation by doing a
quick start/stop. The motor fan should rotate
clockwise.
• Make sure that the bearings on the spindle
are pre-lubricated.
592410-02 37
5.2 Before Start

Technical demands for connections and logical
limitations for separator are listed in chapter
‘‘8 Technical Reference” on page 159.
1 Ensure that the separator is correctly installed and

that feed lines and drains have been flushed clean.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and properly
tightened. Non compliance may lead to breakdown.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation and
earthing (grounding).
G 08 70 6B 1
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement with the
machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed may cause 50 Hz?
breakdown. 60 Hz?
P0 0 39 92 A
ING
WARN
!
Use the separation system for the purpose, and within the
limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to do so could cause a
violent breakdown.
38
592410-02
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SEPARATOR MANUAL
2 Check the oil sump level and top up if

necessary.
• Remove the oil pin and make sure that the oil
level is above the lower end of the pin see
‘‘6.7.2 Check oil level” on page 142.
NOTE
Too much or too little oil can damage the separator

bearings.
NOTE
The separator should be level and at

standstill when oil is filled.
G 08 68 7K 1
39
592410-02
5.3 Start
1 Make sure that the bowl is clean and that the separator is properly assembled and check..
... the direction of rotation by doing a quick

start/stop. The motor fan should rotate
clockwise.
... that all couplings and connections are

securely tightened to prevent leakages.
Leaking hot liquid can cause burns.
ON
CAUTI
!
If power cable polarity has been

reversed, the separator will rotate
... that all frame hood bolts in reverse, and vital rotating parts
as well as the clutch cover can loosen.
are fully tightened
G 0 87 06 B 1
... the oil sump level.
Top up if necessary
ON
CAUTI
!
After change of feed the sludge discharge interval
must be adjusted.
Breakdown may result if the intervals between
discharges are too long.
40
592410-02
5.3.1 Starting and running-up

procedure
1 Start of separator
a Open the water supply valve.

Make sure that the water supply
pressure is 150-600 kPa (1,5-6 bar)
b Start the separator by pushing

the start button at the starter
unit.
NOTE G 0 8 71 78 1
After every start the separator must always be run

continuously for a minimum of 1 hour to ensure
proper lubrication.
41
592410-02
2 Check the separator for vibration
NOTE
Normal vibration
Note the normal occurrence of critical speed periods.
Some vibrations occur for short periods during the
starting cycle, when the separator passes through its
critical speeds. This is normal and passes without
danger. Try to learn the vibration characteristics of
the critical speed pattern.
ING
WARN
!
Excessive vibration
If vibration increases, or
continues at full speed, keep
bowl filled and stop the
separator.
The cause of the vibration must
G 0 8 71 87 1
be determined and corrected
before starting again!
Excessive vibration may be due
to incorrect assembly or
insufficient cleaning of the bowl.
NOTE
Be alert for unusual noises and

any other unusal conditions.
42
592410-02
3 Ensure that the separator is at full speed (after about 60 - 150 seconds).
The time by full speed can be checked by

studying the ammeter
Current increases during

start...
...to decrease to a stable

value when full speed has
been reached.
For normal length of the start-up period
G 08 71 9 21
see ‘‘8.2 Technical Data” on page 161
4 For purification:
Supply water to form the water-seal. The

water should have the same temperature as
the process liquid.
a. Close the water feed when water flows
out through the water outlet.
b. Start the oil feed slowly to avoid
breaking the water seal.
5 For clarification:
a. Start the oil feed with full flow.
6 Adjust to desired throughput.
7 For both purification and clarification modes:
Check the separator inlet and outlet

pressures. See recommended values in your
system documentation.
43
592410-02
5.4 Operating
1 Checkpoints during operation:
a Check all connections for leakage.
b Check that the feed has correct flow and

temperature.
c Check the back pressure.
d Check that the starter ammeter reading

is the normal low and steady value.
e Check for abnormal vibrations

and sounds.
f Check motor current.
ING ING
WARN WARN
! !
Disintegration hazard Burning hazard

Do not discharge a vibrating separator. Lubricating oil and various machine
Vibration can increase if solidified surfaces can be hot and cause burns.
sludge is only partially discharged.
G 08 71 5 81
44
592410-02
5.4.1 Sludge discharge
1 Performing a discharge
a Close the feed (connection 201)
b Perform a displacement (of the

interface) by opening connection
206 for 10 seconds.
c Initiate a discharge by supplying

discharge water (connection 375)
for 3 seconds.
d Pause for 15 seconds.
G08 7 06 C1
NOTE
Before turning on the feed,

make sure that the oil has the
correct temperature.
e Close the bowl by supplying make up

water (connection 375) for 15 seconds.
f Apply liquid seal by opening

connection 206 for 9 seconds.
g Open the feed (connection 201).
45
592410-02
5.5 Stopping procedure
1 Stopping the separator
a Turn off the oil feed.
b Feed displacement water

until water flows out through
the water outlet. Then close
this feed.
c Stop the separator.
d Wait until the separator has

come to a complete
standstill.
Check rotation of motor fan.
G0 87 0 6C1
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come
to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.
46
592410-02
5.6 Emergency stop
1 If the separator vibrates excessively...
... push the emergency stop button.
G 08 71 27 1
NOTE
Keep the bowl filled during run-down to

minimize the vibrations.
2 Evacuate the room.
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration hazard
Never discharge a vibrating
separator.
G 08 7 13 71
ING
WARN
!
ING
WARN Entrapment hazard
!
Make sure that rotating parts
have come to a complete
Disintegration hazard standstill before starting any
After an emergency stop, the cause of the fault must be dismantling work.
identified.
If all parts have been checked and the cause not found,
contact Alfa Laval for advice before restarting the
separator.
47
592410-02
5.7 After Emergency Stop
Separator standstill
Dismantling work must not be started before all

rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work.
Avoid accidental start
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
supply before starting any dismantling work.
Remedy the cause
The cause of the emergency stop must be

remedied before attempting to restart the
separator.
If the cause is not found, an overhaul must be
performed on the separator, and all moving parts
thoroughly checked
ING
WARN
!
Do not start the separator after a emergency stop
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
Make sure that the bowl is clean before restart.
48
592410-02
Separator reassembled
The separator must be fully reassembled before

unlocking the power supply and restarting the
separator.
ING
WARN
!
Breakdown hazard
All couplings, covers, and guards must be in place
and properly tightened.
If not, a breakdown may result!
G 08 7 06 B1
49
592410-02
50
592410-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly

6.1 Periodic Maintenance 6.1.2 Maintenance procedures
Periodic (preventive) maintenance reduces At each Inspection and/or Overhaul, take a

the risk of unexpected stoppages and copy of the maintenance log and use it to make
breakdowns. Follow the maintenance log in notes during the service.
this chapter in order to facilitate the An inspection and overhaul should be carried
periodic maintenance. out as follows:
1 Dismantle the parts as described in ‘‘6.3
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals Dismantling” on page 56.
The following directions for periodic Place the separator parts on clean, soft
maintenance give a brief description of parts to surfaces such as pallets.
be cleaned, checked and renewed at different 2 Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
maintenance intervals. parts according to the maintenance log and
The maintenance log for each maintenance description in ‘‘6.4 Actions Before
interval on page 53 gives a detailed list of Assembly” on page 91.
actions to be performed. 3 Fit all the parts delivered in the service kit
while assembling the separator as
described in chapter ‘‘6.5 Assembly” on
Inspection i i page 101.
An Inspection consists of an overhaul of the
4 When the separator is assembled, make
separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating
final checks described in ‘‘6.6 Actions After
water device at max. 6 months or 4000
Assembly” on page 139.
operating hours.
Seals in bowl and gaskets in inlet/outlet device
are renewed.
ING
WARN
!
Overhaul o
Disintegration Hazards
An Overhaul consists of an overhaul of the Separator parts that are either missing, worn
complete separator (including separator bowl, beyond their safe limits or incorrectly
assembled, may cause severe damage or fatal
inlet/outlet and operating device) at max. 18
injury.
months or 12000 operating hours. Seals,
bearings, friction blocks and flat belt in the
separator are renewed.
ON
CAUTI
Oil change !
The oil should be changed every 4000 hours, or

at least once every year if the total number of Burn and Corrode Hazards
Escaping hot and/or corroding process
operating hours is less than 4000 hours/year. material, which can be hazardous, may still
remain in the separator after stop.
592410-02 51
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY SEPARATOR MANUAL
The use of service symbols in the 6.1.4 Service kits

dismantling/assembly instructions
A Commissioning kit is included in the delivery
Parts that have to be renewed from the service
which contain various O-rings that might need
kits (see below) are marked i i and/or o in
to be changed when assembled for the first
the assembly instructions.
time.
Special service kits are available for Inspection
Example: and Overhaul.
a Fit the O-ring ii . For other services, a Support kit is available.
When dismantling and assembling between Spare parts not included in the Support kit
the service periods, some procedures do not have to be ordered separately.
have to be carried out. These procedures are
Note that the parts for Inspection are included
marked i i and/or o .
in the Overhaul kit.
Example:
The contents of the kits are described in the
5 Renew the valve plugs on the operating Spare Parts Catalogue.
slide i i .
All symbols used in the instructions refer to
NOTE
activities mentioned in the maintenance logs.
Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as
otherwise the warranty may become invalid.
Alfa Laval takes no responsibility for the
6.1.3 Tightening of screws safe operation of the equipment if non-
genuine spare parts are used.
Tightening all screws with the correct torque
value is important.
These figures apply unless otherwise stated:
ING
WARN
Torque !
Metric Stainless steel Carbon steel Disintegration hazards

thread Use of imitation spare parts may cause severe
Nm kpm Ib.ft Nm kpm Ib.ft damage.
M4 1,7 0,17 1,2 2,25 0,25 1,8
M5 3,4 0,34 2,5 4,9 0,49 3,6
M6 7 0,7 5 8 0,8 5,9
M8 17 1,7 13 20 2 14,7
M10 33 3,4 24 39 3,9 28,7
M12 57 5,8 42 68 6,9 50
M16 140 14 100 155 15,8 114
M20 270 28 200 325 33 239
M24 470 48 340 570 58 420
The figures apply to lubricated screws

tightened with a torque wrench.
52 592410-02
6.2 Maintenance Log
Name of ship/plant: Local identification:
Separator: P 636 Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No.: 881202-08-01
Date: Signature:
Inspection
Overhaul
Check
Part i o Action Page Note

Frame hood
- All parts x x Clean 91
- All parts x x Check for corrosion 93
- All parts x x Check for cracks 94
- Connecting housing x x Check for erosion damages 95
x x Check for erosion from water spraying
- Frame hood x x Renew O-ring 134
x Control measure of paring disc height 135
x Check height adjusting rings 135
-Inlet pipe x x Lubricate the thread 136
Bowl
- All parts x x Clean and change O-rings 91
- All parts x x Check for corrosion 93
- All parts x x Check for cracks 94
- All parts x x Check for erosion damages 95
- Bowl body x x Check for impact marks and corrosion 120
x x Renew rectangular ring 121
x x Renew O-rings 122, 125
x x Renew holder screws and washers 121
- Operating slide x x Renew rectangular ring 121
x x Renew valve plugs 120
- Discharge slide x x Renew rectangular ring 125
- Inlet and outlet pipe x x Renew O-rings 129
- Gravity disc x x Clean and check
- Distributor x x Change O-ring 126
- Disributor support x x Renew O-rings 126
- Level ring x x Change O-rings 126
- Top disk x x Renew O-rings 130
- Bowl hood x x Renew seal ring 131
x x Renew O-ring 131
- Operating water ring x x Renew seal ring and screws 122
53
592410-02
Inspection
Overhaul
Check
Frame
- Frame feet Renew frame feet (including washers 97 Has to be ordered
and screws) separately
- Drain and oil filling holes x x Renew washers 119
- Oil pin x x Renew O-ring 119
Driving device
- All parts x Clean 91
- All parts x Check for corrosion 93
- All parts x Check for cracks 94
- Bottom bearing housing x Renew O-ring 108
- Labyrinth ring holder x Renew labyrinth ring 109
x Renew O-ring 109
- Top bearing housing x Renew springs 111
- Flat belt x Renew flat belt 115
- Bowl spindle x Pre-lubricate and renew ball bearing 110
x Pre-lubricate and renew self-aligning
roller bearing 112
x Lubricate the spindle
x Measure the radial wobble 118
- Neck bearing cover x Renew O-ring 117
- Deflector ring x Renew O-ring 117
- Water inlet pipe x Renew O-ring 118
- Operating water cover x Renew seal ring and O-ring 118
- Fan x Renew the O-ring 114
Coupling
- All parts x Clean 91
- All parts x Check for corrosion 93
- All parts x Check for cracks 94
- Coupling hub x Renew single row ball bearings 101
x Renew snap rings 101
- Friction blocks x Renew friction pads (if they are worn) 101
or clean the pads if they are oily
Electrical motor
- Electrical motor x Lubricate if nipples are fitted. See sign ---
on motor
54
592410-02
Inspection
Overhaul
Check
Signs and labels on separator
- Machine plate x Check attachment and legibility 139
- Power supply frequency x Check attachment and legibility 139
- Lifting instructions x Check attachment and legibility 139
- Safety labels x Check attachment and legibility 139
- Name plate x Check attachment and legibility 139
- Representative label x Check attachment and legibility 139
55
592410-02
6.3 Dismantling
6.3.1 Introduction
The frame hood and heavy bowl parts must
be lifted by means of a hoist. Position the
hoist exactly above the bowl centre. Use a
lifting sling and lifting hooks with safety
catches.
The parts must be handled carefully. Don’t

place parts directly on the floor, but on a
clean rubber mat, fibreboard or a suitable
pallet.
NOTE
For safety reasons, it is essential that all personnel

who work with the separator read this manual
thoroughly and completely.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate
or maintain the separator until they have read and
fully understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the separator and the work to be
carried out.
6.3.2 Tools
Special tools from the tool kit must be used
for dismantling and assembly, as well as
Standard tools (not included). The special
tools are specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue
and are illustrated at the beginning of each
dismantling section.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-
out power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Make sure that machine has come to a complete

standstill before starting any dismantling work
(takes about 30 minutes from switch off).
56
592410-02
Standard Tools
3 4
1 2 6
7 12
9 11
10
8
13
14
G 09 11 6 61
1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (capacity 0-200 Nm)
3 Drift ( Ø 4 mm)
4 Dial indicator with magnetic base
5 Hexagon head keys, various sizes
6 Heating equipment for bearings
7 Sliding calliper
8 Hammers (standard and soft-faced)
(not lead)
9 Pliers for internal snap rings
10 Pliers for external snap rings
11 T-handle with extension rod, sockets
(various sizes)
12 Spanners (various sizes)
13 Adjustable spanner
14 Shackle
57
592410-02
6.3.3 Frame hood Inlet bend

O-ring
Snap ring
Nut
Safety device
Screw
Connecting housing
O-ring
G 0 8 63 3B 1
Screws
Support ring
Height adjusting rings
Frame hood
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
out the power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
G 0 8 63 4B 1
Make sure that machine has come to a
complete standstill before starting any
O-ring
dismantling work
(after about 30 minutes from switch off).
58
592410-02
1 Removing the inlet and outlet device.
a Remove the screw holding

NOTE
the safety device.
Remove connections before
starting dismantling.
ON
CAUTI
!
Check, through the hole,

that the bowl has stopped
rotating.
b Detach the snap
ring and remove the
inlet bend.
c Remove the nut.
NOTE
Left hand thread!
d Remove the connecting

housing.
G 0 8 63 5A 1
59
592410-02
2 Removing the frame hood.
c Lift off the frame

a Remove the screws holding hood.
the frame hood.
NOTE
Do not place
the hood
upside down.
G 08 6 36 F1
b Loosen the hood
by bending with
a screwdriver in
all grooves in the
hood.
60
592410-02
6.3.4 Bowl Lock ring
Bowl hood
Seal ring
O-ring
Gravity disc
O-rings
Top disc
G 0 8 61 66 1
O-rings
Inlet and outlet

pipe
Bowl disc
(without caulks)
1
2 Bowl discs
O-ring
Distributor
5 O-rings
Level ring
Distributor support
3
Cap nut
4 Screw
6
Nut
Discharge slide
7
Rectangular ring
8 O-ring
9 Bowl body
10
G 0 86 05 I1
Rectangular ring
O-ring
1 Compressing tool (lock ring)
Valve plugs
2 Lifting eyes
3 Spanner for nut (nut/discharge slide)
Operating slide
4 Puller (discharge slide)
5 Lifting tool (distributor, spindle) Nozzle
Rectangular ring
6 Puller (Bowl body)
7 Screw (lock ring) (M5) O-ring
8 Hexagon head key Holder
9 Chisel (seal ring)
G 0 86 98 7 1
10 Pin (distributor/lifting tool)

Operating water ring
Screws &
lock Screws
washers Seal ring
61
592410-02
1 Removing the lock ring
a Fit the compressing tool.
b Fit the clamps and the c Compress the disc stack by

screws to stop. alternately tightening the inner
screws on the compressing
NOTE tool to a maximum of 60 Nm.
3 2
Be sure not to
cover the threaded
holes.
4
1
Screw
d Fit the dismantling screws

Clamp
to the bowl body and
5
press out the lock ring by
6 tightening the screws
successively according to
the numbering on the
illustration (1-6). Start with
the screw nearest the lock
ring end (1).
The lock ring can be
removed when it has
passed the edge of the
groove.
e Remove the lock ring

from the groove.
NOTE
G 0 86 27 A 1
f Remove the dismantling screws.
62
592410-02
2 Removing the bowl hood.
a Remove the compressing

screws.
b Loosen the screws
on the clamp tool.
Remove the tool.
Remove the lock
ring.
NOTE
The bowl hood must be pulled off

straight up, in order not to get stuck.
Recommendation: Take
measurements with a calliper around
the bowl, between the upper edge of
the bowl body and the bowl hood, to
check that the bowl hood is being
pulled off straight up.
c Fit the compressing tool and the

puller screws.
Pull the bowl hood off by
screwing the screws alternately
(max. 1/2 turn) and gradually
increase the momentum evenly
until the bowl hood come loose.
d Remove the clamps

and attach lifting eyes
to the compressing
tool and lift off the
bowl hood.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The top disc can adhere to the
bowl hood when lifting. Be
careful not to accidentally drop
G 08 6 28 I1
it.
63
592410-02
3 Removing the top disc, level ring, and inlet and outlet pipe.
a Carefully tap out the top b Carefully prise off the level
disc, together with the ring.
gravity disc, and lift up the
bowl hood.
c Lift out the inlet and outlet

pipe.
G 08 62 9 B1
4 Removing the seal ring.
a Place the bowl hood on a support b Turn the bowl hood upside down
and tap out a piece of the seal ring and remove the seal ring by
using a drift in the holes. carefully knocking pieces of the
seal ring out of the groove, using
the special tool: chisel.
NOTE
It is very important not

to damage the bottom of
the groove!
Seal ring
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying seal ring

parts
The seal ring breaks when removed from the bowl
G 08 6 24 41
hood.
Wear eye protection!
64
592410-02
5 Removing the disc stack.
c Carefully lift off the

a Assemble the lifting tool with the pin. disc stack assembly.
b Fit the assembled tool into the

distributor and ease off the disc stack.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the bowl
discs may cause cuts
G 0 86 31 A 1
6 Removing the distributor and distributor support.
a Remove the distributor.
b Unscrew the screws and remove the

distributor support.
Distributor support
G 0 8 62 6Q 1
65
592410-02
7 Removing the nut
b Use the T-handle

with extension rod
and socket to
remove the nut.
Nut Sling
Screw
a To prevent the bowl body from rotating

when removing the nut;
Fit one of the clamps (see page 62) to
the bowl body and one of the screws
G 09 23 86 1
for the frame hood in the frame. Fasten
a sling between the clamp and the
screw around the bowl body.
Clamp
66
592410-02
8 Removing the discharge slide.
a Fit the lifting tool by

pressing the puller rods
towards each other and
position them into the
two slots on the bowl b Ease off the discharge slide
bottom. by turning the central screw.
Slide metal ring down
over bowl nave.
NOTE
If discharge slide is
difficult to remove,
tap lightly on outside
edge with a soft
faced hammer.
Ring on tool
Puller rod
Discharge slide
Bowl body
c Lift out the discharge slide.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be
pushed down against the discharge
slide, otherwise the discharge slide
G 0 86 32 7 1
may come loose from the tool.
67
592410-02
9 Removing the cap nut.
a Remove the cap nut
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
G 08 60 6 71
10 Removing the bowl body
a Fit the lifting tool to the bowl body.
b Raise the bowl body off the spindle taper

by turning the lifting eye clock-wise.
c Lift off the bowl body

G 0 8 60 73 1
68
592410-02
11 Turn the bowl body upside down.
ING
WARN
!
G 0 86 08 21
Crush hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to prevent it from rolling.
12 Removing the holder.
a Remove and discard the screws and washers.

New screws and washers are included in the
Inspection kit.
b Lift off the holder.
NOTE
If the ring sticks, use two M8

screws in threaded holes to
raise the operating slide
holder up and away from the
bowl body.
G 0 8 60 92 1
69
592410-02
13 Removing the operating slide.
a Lift off the operating slide.
NOTE

screws in threaded holes to raise
the operating slide holder up and
away from the bowl body.
G 0 86 10 21
14 Removing the operating water ring.
a Remove and discard the screws.
New screws are included in the Inspection kit.
b Lift off the ring.
NOTE

screws in threaded holes to
raise the operating water
ring up and away from the
bowl body.
G 0 86 11 21
70
592410-02
6.3.5 Driving device 1 3 4 5
G 08 57 9 72
G 08 57 85 1
7
1 Puller (spindle pulley, 4 Lifting tool

ball bearing). (spindle assembly)
2 Tool (bearing housing). 5 Drift (bottom bearing).
3 Cover puller 6 Sleeve (ball bearing in
(neck bearing cover). top bearing seat
7 Pin spanner (oil fan).
Seal ring
Operating water cover Screw
O-ring
O-ring
Air deflector
Pipe
O-rings
Deflector ring
Seal rings Spindle pulley
Elbow
Bushing Self-aligning roller
bearing
Neck bearing cover
O-ring Oil pump
O-rings Nozzle
Fan Screw
Snap ring
Labyrinth ring holder
O-ring
Bowl spindle
Labyrinth ring
Pipe
Ball bearing O-ring

Bottom bearing
Top bearing seat holder
Helical spring Screw
Composite spring O-ring

Plug
Top bearing housing
G 1 01 7 91 1
Strainer
71
592410-02
1 Removing the clutch cover.
a Remove the screws.
b Remove the clutch cover.
G 0 85 8 13 1
2 Empty the oil sump.
Unscrew the oil plug and

empty the oil sump.
G 0 86 85 7 1
72
592410-02
3 Loosen the flat belt, by tilting the motor.
a Loosen, but do not remove, the screws holding

the motor. Start with the two screws at the bottom. Motor
Do not loosen more than shown in the illustration.
Separator frame
Nut
Screw
b Loosen the two upper screws a little bit more so

that the motor can be tilted. Do not loosen more
than shown in the illustration.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
c Remove the flat belt from the motor pulley. The motor will come off if the screws
G 08 58 8A 1
are unscrewed.
73
592410-02
4 Removing the operating water cover.
b Lift off the operating water cover.
NOTE
If the cover sticks, fit

two M8 screws to the
threaded holes and
tighten.
G 0 85 89 3 1
5 Removing the neck bearing cover and deflector ring.
d Lift off the neck bearing cover

together with the deflector ring.
a Attach the neck bearing

cover puller.
b Fasten the tool to

c Ease off the the cover.
cover by
tightening
the screw.
G 08 5 90 51
Cover
Frame
74
592410-02
6 Prepare for removal of spindle assembly.
NOTE
To facilitate later removal

of plugs, loosen (do not
remove) the plugs on the
bearing housing.
a Remove the screws
NOTE
If the cover sticks, fit

two M8 screws to the
threaded holes and
tighten.
G 0 85 91 51
75
592410-02
7 Lifting the spindle assembly from the frame.
a Fit the lifting tool to the spindle end.
b Slowly raise and lift out the spindle

assembly.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly
during lifting. The spindle assembly
may otherwise come loose from the
lifting tool.
NOTE
Take care not to

damage the oil pump.
NOTE
Protect the inside of the frame

G 0 90 7 85 1
by covering the hole.
76
592410-02
8 Place the spindle assembly upside down on a support.
Make a support
~185 mm
~120 mm
~6,5 mm
free space
G 08 59 2 51
9 Removing the air deflector.
Remove the screws and the air

deflector.
G 08 5 92 61
77
592410-02
10 Removing the fan.

a Turn the spindle assembly the right way up.
b Place a spanner (or other

suitable tool) on the spindle
pulley key-grip to stop it from
moving.
c Fit the pin spanner and

remove the fan.
Key-grip
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
G 0 92 3 96 1
11 Removing the bottom bearing assembly.
a Turn the spindle assembly up-side down and Puller tool
remove the oil pump by using spanners.
b Pull off the belt pulley and the

self-aligning roller bearing using
the puller tool.
NOTE
Always discard a used

bearing.
c Remove the two nozzles

using an Allen key.
G 1 01 8 02 1
78
592410-02
12 Removing the top bearing housing.

a Turn the spindle
Composite b Remove the plugs
assembly over.
springs and the composite
springs.
c Carefully remove the spindle

from the top bearing seat.
Plug
NOTE
Be careful not to damage

d Collect the
the vibration indicator.
axial springs.
G 08 5 82 21
79
592410-02
13 Removing the ball bearing.
a Remove the snap ring.
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

Use the correct pliers for dismantling of snap
ring to avoid accidental release.
b Fit the cap nut on the spindle to

protect the threads.
c Use the puller tool to remove the

top bearing seat from the spindle.
NOTE
Do not damage threads on

spindle. NOTE
Take care not to damage the

vibration indicator when
separating the top bearing
seat from the spindle.
Vibration indicator
Piece of wood to
protect the spindle
threads.
d Place the top bearing seat on a support to NOTE

protect the vibration indicator.
Remove the bearing. Use a drift in the two Always discard
used bearings.
holes.
NOTE
G 0 85 83 5 1
Be careful not to damage the bearing seat.
80
592410-02
14 Removing the labyrinth ring.
a Remove the ring using a

screwdriver.
NOTE
Be careful not do damage the

groove.
G 0 85 8 6C 1
81
592410-02
15 Removing the bottom bearing holder.
a Fit the tool into the bottom bearing holder and attach the
socket, extension rod and T-handle.
T-handle
Extension rod
Socket
Tool
b Loosen the bottom bearing

holder by turning it counter
clockwise.
Remove it by hand. G 0 86 98 01
82
592410-02
16 Dismantling the bottom bearing holder (where necessary)
a Unscrew the screw
b Remove the pipe, O-rings

and strainer.
G 10 15 70 3 1
83
592410-02
6.3.6 Centrifugal clutch

Snap rings
Ball bearings
Spacing ring
G 08 64 78 1
Belt pulley
Coupling
ING hub
WARN
!
Parallel pin
Entrapment hazard
out power supply before starting any
dismantling work. Friction blocks
(3=60 Hz)
Make sure that machine has come to a complete Cover
standstill before starting any dismantling work
(takes about 22 minutes from switch off).
Snap ring
G 08 65 1 B1
NOTE
50 Hz = 5 Friction blocks
1
G 0 86 5 04 1
84
592410-02
1 Removing the clutch cover.
b Remove the clutch cover.
G 0 85 81 3 1
2 Removing the fan.
G 0 8 58 8J 1
85
592410-02
3 Loosen the flat belt, by tilting the motor.
a Loosen, but do not remove,

the screws holding the b Attach shackle with lifting sling to the
motor. Start with the two upper hole in the motor frame and remove
screws at the bottom. the upper screws.
Motor Separator
frame
Nut Screw
c Remove the two upper screws so that the motor

can be tilted. Do not loosen more than shown in
the illustration.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Always use a shackle with lifting slings when
removing the upper screws.
G 08 5 88 G 1
d Remove the flat belt from the motor pulley.
86
592410-02
4 Removing the motor.
a Disconnect the electrical cables.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
If the cables are not disconnected during lifting
procedures, they may become damaged.
b Fit a sling to the c Tense the lifting sling to support the motor and
motor using a remove the screws. Lift the motor while supported.
shackle on the upper
part.
Weight of motor with
ING
coupling: approx. WARN
!
60 kg.
Crush hazard
If not supported, the motor with
coupling will drop when removing the
screws.
G 0 86 46 A 1
d Lower the motor onto a suitable pallet.
5 Removing the friction blocks.
a Remove the snap ring, cover

and friction blocks.
Friction blocks
(3=60 Hz)
Cover
Snap ring
NOTE
G 0 86 52 3 1
87
592410-02
6 Checking the condition of the friction blocks o .
If the blocks are worn:

Fit new friction blocks.
ON
CAUTI
!
NOTE
Inhalation Replace all blocks, even if only one is
hazard worn.
When handling
friction blocks/
pads wear a mask
to avoid inhalation
of dust.
Do not use
compressed air to
a Clean the pins of coupling hub and apply a thin
remove dust.
Remove dust using film of lubricating paste to the pins.
vacuum or a damp
cloth.
NOTE
Make sure that there is no oil on the

pads.
b If only friction block service is to be done,

proceed to ‘‘Assembly of friction blocks” on page
103.
G 08 65 3 31
88
592410-02
Complete dismantling of centrifugal clutch
7 Removing the coupling from the motor.
a Remove the screw, spring washer and washer.
Washer
Spring washer
Screw
Attach a socket with extension

rod and handle to the screw.
Place a piece of wood according
to the illustration. Push the
handle to start the rotor moving,
when the handle hits the piece of
wood, the weight and movement
of the rotor loosens the screw.
Repeat until screw is loose.
Piece of wood
b Check that the brass plug is mounted

on the puller tool.
Fit the tool to the friction clutch.
Puller tool
c Ease off the friction coupling.
Flat areas for spanner.
ING
WARN
!
NOTE Crush hazard

The centrifugal clutch is heavy
See dismantling with optional and can fall, causing injury,
hydraulic puller tool (if when loosened from the motor
G 0 86 5 4G 1
purchased) on next page. shaft.
89
592410-02
8 Dismantling of the coupling assembly.
a Remove the snap rings.
b Drive out the coupling hub.
Wooden support
Support
c Turn the coupling the other way round and

drive out the ball bearings using the
mounting tool.
NOTE
Always discard used bearings.

G 0 86 55 6 1
90
592410-02
6.4 Actions Before

Assembly
6.4.1 Cleaning i o
Clean the separator parts according to the
diagram below. Afterwards, protect all cleaned
carbon steel parts against corrosion by oiling.
Part Procedure Cleaning agents
Frame and The external cleaning of the frame and motor should be Water and de-greasing agent.
motor restricted to brushing, sponging or wiping while the motor is
running or still is hot.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
Never wash down a separator with a direct
water stream.
Never play a water jet on the motor. Totally
enclosed motors can be damaged by direct
hosing to the same extent as open motors,
resulting in short-circuit and internal corrosion.
Clean the inside of the frame with a clean cloth and remove
visible particles.
91
592410-02
Part Procedure Cleaning agents
Bowl Cleaning of bowl discs A chemical cleaning agent must

Inlet/ outlet Handle the bowl discs carefully in order to avoid damage to dissolve the deposits quickly without
the surfaces during cleaning attacking the material of the separator
parts.
1 Remove the bowl discs from the distributor and place them
individually in the cleaning agent. Fuel oil sludge mainly consists of
complex organic substances such as
2 Allow the discs to remain in the cleaning agent until the asphaltenes. The most important
deposits have been dissolved. This will normally take property of a cleaning liquid for the
between two and four hours. removal of fuel oil sludge is the ability to
3 Lastly, clean the discs with a soft brush. dissolve these asphaltenes.
ON
Cleaning of holder for operating slide, operating water CAUTI
ring and operating slide with nozzle. !
Use 10% acetic acid solution to dissolve lime deposits. The
acid should be heated to 80 °C. Cut hazard
Clean the nozzle on the operating slide using a soft iron wire Sharp edges on the separator
discs may cause cuts.
or a similar object.
Driving device Use a sponge or a soft brush and clean the oil mist White spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene
generator, bearing holder and oil pump thoroughly. or diesel oil.
Centrifugal Use a sponge or a soft brush. White spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene

clutch or diesel oil.
Belt pulley Use a steel brush. Solvent
92
592410-02
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion i

o
ING
WARN
Inspect the separator parts for corrosion. !
Evidence of corrosion attacks should be looked
for and rectified each time the separator is Disintegration hazards
dismantled. Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if
you suspect that the depth of the corrosion
damage exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and
bowl hood (0,5 for other parts) or if cracks have
been found. Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and given
clearance for operation by Alfa Laval.
Material Type of corrosive Appearance Measure

environment
Non-stainless steel Water or dampness Rust If damage exceeds 0,5 mm, contact
and cast iron parts Alfa Laval.
Stainless steel Chlorides or acidic Acidic solutions cause general Polish dark-coloured spots and
solutions corrosion. other corrosion marks with a fine
Chloride corrosion begins as small grain emery cloth. This may prevent
dark spots that can be difficult to further damage.
detect, and goes on to local damage If damage exceeds 0,5 mm (0,2 mm
such as pitting, grooves or cracks. for bowl body and bowl hood)
contact Alfa Laval.
Other metal parts “Aggressive” Possible corrosion damage can be If damage exceeds 0,5 mm, contact
environment in the form of pits and/or cracks. Alfa Laval.
ING
WARN
!
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate
cracks beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and
are totally unacceptable.
Replace any part where corrosion can be
suspected of affecting its strength or function.
93 592410-02
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks i o

Check the separator parts for cracks. It is
particularly important to inspect for cracks in
rotating parts, and especially the pillars
between the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
ING
WARN
!
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability
of components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
Cracks can occur from cyclic material stresses

and corrosion. Keeping the separator and its
parts clean and free from deposits will help to
prevent corrosion attacks.
ING
WARN
!
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if
you suspect that the depth of the damage
exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and bowl hood
(0,5 for other parts).
Do not continue to use the separator until it
has been inspected and given clearance for
operation by Alfa Laval.
94
592410-02
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion i o

Erosion may occur when particles
suspended in the process liquid slide along
or strike against a surface.
Erosion is characterised by:

Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion are:
1 Burnished traces in the
material.
2 Dents and pits having a
granular and shiny surface.
The sealing edge of the

discharge slide.
Paring disc
Lock ring
Bowl body and holder.
Pillars between the

sludge ports in the
Holder and operating slide.
bowl wall
The sealing edge of the discharge

slide for the seal ring in the bowl
hood
The underside of the distributor in the vicinity of the
G09 11 8 H1
distribution holes and wings
1 Inspect the bowl and inlet/outlet parts for

erosion damages.
NOTE
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if

you suspect that the depth of the damage
exceeds 0,2 mm for bowl body and bowl hood
(0,5 for other parts). Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and
cleared for operation by Alfa Laval.
95
592410-02
2 Replace parts if erosion is suspected.
ING
WARN
!
Erosion damage weakens parts by reducing
the thickness of the material.
Pay special attention to the pillars between
the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Replace parts if erosion is suspected of
affecting strength or function.
96
592410-02
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet

The frame feet have to be changed
occasionally due to rubber deterioration
from age.
When replacing the frame feet, the separator

must be lifted. Follow ‘‘6.8.1 Lifting the
separator” on page 150.
NOTE
Discard the old frame feet, screws and washers.
a Loosen the bolts and prepare to remove

the separator frame
b Lift the separator. See ‘‘Lifting the separator” on

page 150
c Remove the existing frame feet.
160 Nm
Torque acc. to
table on page
52
d Fit the new feet, screws and washers.

G 08 74 4 61
e Place the separator in its original position and fas-

ten the mounting bolts. Tightening torque: 160 Nm.
97
592410-02
6.4.6 Lubrication of bowl parts
a Apply a thin layer of Molykote 1000, or equivalent

lubrication, on all the following contact surfaces. Apply slide
lacquer on the operating slide and the bowl body, guide pin
and bowl hood.
= Molykote 1000
= slide lacquer + Molykote 1000
Bowl hood
(apply slide lacquer)
Bowl body
(also apply slide lacquer on
guide pin)
Discharge slide
Operating slide
(apply slide lacquer)
Screw
Holder
G09 11 7 D1
Operating water ring Nut
98
592410-02
6.4.7 How to lubricate bowl parts

with slide lacquer
1
1
NOTE
This instruction is also valid

for the operating slide and the
holder.
a Carefully clean the contact surfaces (1) on bowl body

and bowl hood.
b Apply slide lacquer with a sponge.
c Rub the slide lacquer on the surfaces to a thin, evenly

distributed layer using the sponge.
d Finish the treatment by lubricating the contact surfaces

with Alfa Laval lubricating paste or Molykote 1000
paste. Use a well cleaned brush and rub it into the
surface, do not leave any excessive paste.
G 0 8 74 86 1
99
592410-02
6.4.8 Check for galling on operating

slide and bowl body
1
1
If any friction marks are found on the guide surfaces (1)

of operating slide and bowl body, proceed as follows:
a Clean the surface thoroughly with a degreasing

agent, i.e. white spirit.
This is important!
NOTE
b Using an emery cloth (e.g. No. 320) to smooth the
To avoid the risk of galling,
metal edges. the guiding surface of the
operating slide should be
primed with a slide laquer at
c Finish by polishing the damaged spots with polishing
every inspection service.
paper (e.g No. 600).
d Apply slide lacquer with a sponge.
e Rub the slide lacquer on the surfaces to a thin, evenly

distributed layer using the sponge.
f Finish the treatment by lubricating the guiding surfaces

with Alfa Laval lubricating paste or Molykote 1000
paste. Use a well cleaned brush. Rub it into the
surface, do not leave any excessive paste. G 0 8 74 85 1
100
592410-02
6.5 Assembly
6.5.1 Centrifugal clutch
1 Assembly of the coupling.
a Slip the belt pulley over the coupling hub and place them on a firm and level
foundation.
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration Hazard
If the belt pulley must be renewed, check that the new pulley has
the correct diameter. An incorrect pulley will cause the
separator bowl to run at either an excessive or insufficient
speed. NOTE
d=283 mm 50 Hz
d=235 mm 60 Hz Remove rust from the
belt pulley using a steel
brush.
b Apply a thin film of oil onto the

external and internal surfaces of the
ball bearings o .
Mounting tool
c Press the ball bearings down one at a time into the coupling
hub, preferably using a hydraulic press. Place the spacing
ring between them.
NOTE
Never re-fit used ball bearings.

The ball bearings must not be heated as they
are packed with grease and sealed with plastic
membranes.
d Fit the snap rings.

G 0 86 56 41
101
592410-02
2 Fitting the coupling to the motor.
a Clean the motor shaft and apply a

thin oil film.
NOTE
Make sure that the

b Apply lubricating paste to the tool
key is in place on the
threads (keep lubricated).
motor shaft.
c Remove the brass plug.
d Fasten the sleeve of the tool to the

motor shaft with the same screw that
normally holds the centrifugal clutch
to the motor.
NOTE e Use a spanner to turn the nut on the

tool. This will press the centrifugal
See mounting with optional clutch on to the shaft. Remove the
hydraulic puller tool (if tool.
purchased) on next page.
f Install and tighten the

washer, spring washer and
screw.
Attach a socket with extension rod and handle to the screw.

Place a piece of wood according to the illustration. Push
the handle to start the rotor moving, when the handle hits
the piece of wood, the weight and movement of the rotor
tightens the screw.
Repeat until screw is fastened.
G08 65 4 H1
Piece of wood
102
592410-02
Assembly of friction blocks
3 Fitting the friction blocks.
Guide pin
a Fit the friction blocks onto the

guide pins
NOTE
NOTE
Be sure that the pins on the
back of the blocks project into
the grooves in the clutch hub.
b Place the cover in position and secure it with

the snap ring.
Snap ring
Cover
G 0 86 54 51
103
592410-02
4 Fitting the motor.
a Fit a lifting sling to the motor.

Use a shackle from the
separator lifting tool.
Weight of motor with
coupling: approx. 120 kg.
ING
WARN
b Lower the motor (while !
supported) on to the
separator frame.
It will set on the ledge.
Crush hazard
If not supported, the motor
with coupling may drop
when lifted.
c Fit the screws.

Do not tighten until the
belt has been mounted.
G 0 86 46 A 1
d Connect the electrical cables.
NOTE
If carrying out change of friction blocks only,

continue with steps 5 to 7.
If carrying out a complete machine assembly,
continue with the driving device instructions
on page 107.
104
592410-02
5 Fitting the flat belt.
NOTE
Clean the inside of the frame before

fitting the flat belt, and make sure that
there is no oil on the belt.
a Lift up the belt to the middle (centre) of the

spindle pulley.
NOTE
For correct
position, centre
the belt on the
spindle pulley
Clearance camber.
b Fit the flat belt to the motor belt pulley.
c Tighten the two upper screws.
d Tighten all motor attachment screws.
NOTE
Do not turn the spindle until

the motor is tightened properly
to the frame.
G0 85 8 8D1
105
592410-02
6 Fitting the fan.
a Fit the fan and tighten
G 08 58 8K 1
the screws.
7 Fitting the clutch cover.
b Tighten the screws.
a Fit the clutch cover.

G 0 8 58 14 1
106
592410-02
6.5.2 Driving device
1 Assembling the bottom bearing holder (where necessary)
NOTE
Clean the pipe and strainer before

fitting.
a Fit the pipe, O-rings and

strainer.
NOTE
Make sure to fit the

pipe the right way up!
b Secure the pipe with

the screw secured with
Loctite 222
G 10 15 70 3 2
107
592410-02
1 Fitting the bottom bearing holder.
a To secure the bottom

bearing holder into the
frame, apply Loctite
222 on the surfaces
directly above the
upper O-ring.
b Thread the bottom bearing
holder into the frame and fit
the tool into the bottom
bearing housing.
Socket
Tool
Bottom bearing holder
c Tighten the holder to a torque of 200 Nm.

G 10 1 57 04 1
108
592410-02
2 Fitting the labyrinth ring.
Frame
a Lubricate and fit the
labyrinth ring o .
G 0 86 63 7 1
109
592410-02
3 Fitting the ball bearing and top bearing seat o to the spindle.
a Heat the top bearing seat in oil to b Fit the ball bearing.
maximum 125 °C.
ING
WARN NOTE
!
Always fit a new bearing.
Burn hazard Pre-lubricate before fitting.
Use protective
gloves when
handling any
heated parts.
c Fit the snap ring.
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying snap ring

Use the correct pliers for assembly of snap ring to
avoid accidental release.
d Heat the top bearing seat Puller

together with the bearing in oil to
maximum 125 °C.
Sleeve
e Wipe off the spindle

and fit the top bearing
seat to the spindle
using the sleeve and
puller.
NOTE
Make sure to fit the bearing

seat correctly or it might get
stuck!
G 0 9 84 83 1
110
592410-02
4 Fitting the top bearing housing.
a Fit the axial springs o to the top

bearing housing.
Axial springs
b Carefully lower the bowl spindle.
Make sure that the springs enter the
recesses on the top bearing seat.
c Lubricate the threads with oil before

assembly.
d Fit the composite springs o and

plugs to the top bearing housing.
Do not tighten the plugs.
Make sure that the springs enter the
recesses in the top bearing seat.
The plugs should be tightened when
the spindle assembly is mounted into
the frame.
G 0 86 66 2 1
~2 mm
111
592410-02
5 Fitting the spindle pulley.
a Turn the spindle assembly

upside down.
b Wipe off the spindle pulley c Fit the spindle pulley

seat on the spindle and nave firmly on the bowl
bore in the spindle pulley with spindle.
a dry cloth.
NOTE
At least 1mm free space between

support and spindle assembly to
protect the bearing.
Mount the cap nut to protect the

threads and support the spindle.
G 0 86 67 31
6 Fitting the self-aligning roller bearing o .
a Lower the bearing

. onto the spindle
and press down
NOTE onto the spindle
pulley using the
Always fit a new bearing.
Pre-lubricate before fitting. special drift tool.
G 08 6 68 71
112
592410-02
7 Fitting the oil pump.
NOTE b Lubricate all threads with a few

drops of oil before assembly.
Clean the oil pump and nozzles
before assembly.
c Fit the oil pump (260+ 5 Nm) using

a Apply loctite 222 and screw the two spanners.
nozzles into the pump so that they lie
level with the pump edge using an allen
key.
G 10 18 11 1
113
592410-02
8 Fitting the fan
a Turn the spindle assembly up-side down.
NOTE
Ensure that the spindle is seated against

the inner ring of the ball bearing.
b Apply a thin layer of oil and fit the

O-rings o into the fan.
NOTE
Make sure that the bearing

is pre lubricated before
fitting the fan.
c Place a spanner (or similar) on the

spindle pulley key-grip, as holder-up
and fit the fan. Tighten firmly, by hand,
with the pin spanner.
Key-grip
G 0 92 40 A 1
9 Fitting the air deflector.
a Turn the spindle assembly up-side

down and fit the air deflector.
G 08 59 26 2
114
592410-02
10 Lowering the spindle assembly into the frame.

a Turn the assembly and remove the cap nut from the spindle.
Fit the lifting tool to the spindle assembly and lift it.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Do not rotate the spindle assembly during lifting. The spindle
assembly may otherwise come loose from the lifting tool.
NOTE
Check that the hole at the bottom of the pump and the nozzles are
clean before lowering the assembly down.
b Position the flat belt o so

that the spindle assembly can
Check bottom hole and
the nozzles. pass through when lowering.
See note below.
c Carefully lower the spindle assembly and position

the bolt holes over the threaded frame holes.
Make sure that the bottom bearing, enters the
bottom bearing holder correctly. Do not use force.
ING
WARN
!
Space
Cut hazard
Do not put fingers between the frame and air
deflector while lowering the assembly.
d Fit and tighten the screws.
NOTE
Check the direction arrows on the belt and the

machine plate for correct position.
Make sure that the belt does not get smudged

with oil or grease during handling.
G 08 67 9 A1
e Tighten the plugs firmly.
115
592410-02
11 Fitting the flat belt.
a Lift up the belt to the middle (centre) of the

spindle pulley.
NOTE
For correct
position, centre
the belt on the
spindle pulley
Clearance camber.
b Fit the flat belt to the motor belt pulley.
c Tighten the two upper screws.
d Tighten all motor attachment screws.
NOTE
Do not turn the spindle until

the motor is tightened properly
to the frame. G 0 85 8 8B 1
116
592410-02
12 Fitting the fan.
a Fit the fan and tighten
G 0 85 88 K 1
the screws.
13 Fitting the neck bearing cover and deflector ring.

a Apply a thin layer of oil and fit the
O-rings and the seal rings o
Deflector ring
b Fit the neck bearing cover.
NOTE
Neck bearing cover
The guide pin on the cover should enter one of
the two holes in the bearing housing.
c Push the deflector ring

down until it stops. G 0 86 80 9 1
117
592410-02
14 Fitting the operating water cover.
O-ring
a Lubricate with oil and fit the seal

ring and O-ring o into the
operating water cover.
Renew the O-ring o

b Fit the operating water cover. Fit washers
and tighten the screws.
NOTE
The water pipe in the frame

should enter the hole in the
cover.
G 08 68 14 1
15 Measuring the radial wobble of the bowl spindle.
a Fit a dial indicator in a support

and fasten it in position as
illustrated. Use the flat belt to
turn the spindle. NOTE
Permissible radial wobble: max.

0,04 mm. If the spindle wobble
exceeds this value, contact an
Alfa Laval representative.
Max. 0,04 mm
G 0 85 87 1 1
118
592410-02
16 Fitting the clutch cover.
b Tighten the screws.
G 08 58 1 41
a Fit the clutch cover.
17 Fill oil in the oil sump.
NOTE

a Remove the oil pin, plug and washer. standstill when oil is filled.
b Fit new washer i and refit the drain

plug.
G 0 86 87 G 1
c Fill with new oil until oil flows out from
the filler hole.
For correct oil volume see ‘‘Technical
Data” on page 161.
NOTE
For grade and quality of oil see

‘‘6.7.6 Lubricating oils” on page
148
d Fit new O-ring i onto the oil pin.
e Refit the plug with new washer i
f Fit the oil pin.
119
592410-02
6.5.3 Bowl
1 Check for impact marks and corrosion in bowl

body nave and on spindle taper i o .
a Remove any impact marks using

ON a scraper and/or a whetstone.
CAUTI
!
Impact marks may cause the separator
to vibrate while running.
b Rust can be removed by using a

fine-grain emery cloth (e.g. No. 320).
c Finish with polishing paper (e.g. No. 600).
d Lubricate to prevent further corrosion.
G 08 74 6 11
2 Fitting new valve plugs on the operating slide i i .
a Remove the valve plugs using b Carefully tap in new valve plugs, using a
a drift. clean, soft-faced hammer.
Drift NOTE
Make sure that the plugs are fitted as

shown in the illustration.
G 0 8 74 84 1
120
592410-02
3 Fitting the operating slide.
a Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to the

rectangular rings and O-ring. Fit one rectangular ring b Fit the operating slide.
onto the operating slide. Fit the other rectangular ring
and O-ring onto the bowl body. i o .
NOTE
The guide pin in the bowl

body should enter the hole in
the operating slide (this hole
is marked with a drill mark).
Nozzle secured with Loctite 222
Alignment hole
Operating slide
Bowl body
Guide pin
G 0 86 12 41
4 Fitting the operating slide holder.
a Fit the holder over the b Apply a thin layer of molykote
operating slide. NOTE grease and fit and tighten new
screws and washers i o to
Make sure that the flat
a torque of 30 Nm + 2 Nm.
surfaces of the pair-
glued washers face
outwards!
NOTE
It is very important not to refit used screws

and washers. Always fit new ones included
in the Inspection kit!
G 08 6 13 42
121
592410-02
5 Fitting the operating water ring.
NOTE
a Fit the ring and screws i o .
It is very important not to refit used screws.
Always fit new ones included in the
Inspection kit!
b Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to the

O-ring. Fit the O-ring. i o
c Fit the operating water ring.
NOTE
The drilled assembly mark on the water ring

should face the corresponding mark on the
bowl body.
d Grease, fit and tighten the screws to a torque of
G 08 61 44 1
30 Nm + 2 Nm.
122
592410-02
6 Lifting the bowl body onto the spindle taper.
a Put a drop of oil on the spindle taper.
b Wipe off the spindle taper and

nave bore with a dry cloth.
c Turn the bowl body over.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Support the bowl body when turning to
prevent it from rolling.
d Fit the lifting

tool and lift the
bowl body.
e Carefully lower the bowl body

onto the spindle taper.
f Remove the lifting tool.

G 0 8 61 73 1
123
592410-02
7 Fitting and tightening the cap nut.
a To prevent the bowl body from rotating

when fitting the cap nut; Fit one of the
clamps (see page 62) to the bowl body b Apply a thin layer of
and one of the screws for the frame molykote grease to the cap
hood in the frame. Fasten a sling nut. Fit and tighten the cap
between the clamp and the screw nut to a torque of 50 Nm.
around the bowl body.
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
Sling Screw
Clamp
G 0 86 18 7 1
Cap nut
124
592410-02
8 Fitting the discharge slide.

rectangular ring and fit the rectangular
ring i o .
O-ring
b Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to

the O-ring and fit the O-ring i o .
ING
WARN
!
c Fit the lifting tool and
lower the discharge
slide into the bowl. Crush hazard
The ring on the lifting tool must be
pushed home against the discharge
slide, otherwise it may come loose
from the tool.
d Remove the lifting tool.
e Fit the nut.
f Fit the spanner for nut and

tighten the nut with a torque
wrench to a torque of min.
100 Nm.
G 08 61 9 71
g Remove the spanner for nut.
125
592410-02
9 Fitting the distributor and distributor support.
a Fit the O-ring to the distributor i .
NOTE
All parts have drill marks to b Fit the O-ring to the distributor support
be mounted in line with i .
each other.
c Fit the distributor support and tighten

with the screw.
G 08 62 6 R1
d Fit the distributor.
126
592410-02
10 Assembly of the disc stack.

a Start with the smaller discs and fit the discs one by one onto the distributor. The distributor
has a guide rib for the correct positioning of the bowl discs. Always end with the disc
without caulks.
NOTE
Always fit the smaller discs first, followed by the larger discs, and last the disc
without caulks.
ING
WARN
!
The number of discs may have

to be increased to adjust the
disc stack pressure. Always
check before operating the
separator. See ‘‘Checking the
disc stack pressure” on page
133.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the bowl
discs may cause cuts.
Recess on bowl disc
Guide rib on distributor

G 0 86 20 72
127
592410-02
11 Fitting the disc stack assembly to the bowl body.
a Fit the lifting tool into the

distributor.
b Lower the disc stack into the bowl.
Guide pin on bowl

body
NOTE
The guide pin on the bowl body should

face the drill mark on the distributor.
The guide ribs inside the distributor

support then enter the recesses on the
bowl body nave.
Guide rib on
distributor
Guide ribs inside the distributor

support.
Recesses on the bowl body nave.

G 0 8 62 1C 1
128
592410-02
12 Fitting the inlet and outlet pipe.

a Apply a thin layer of
silicone grease to the
O-rings and fit the
O-rings i o to
the pipe.
b Carefully lower the

inlet and outlet pipe
assembly into the top
of the distributor.
G 0 86 2 2J 1
129
592410-02
13 Fitting the level ring, top disc, and gravity disc.
a Apply a thin layer of silicone

grease the the O-ring and fit
the O-ring onto the level ring. b Fit the O-rings i o and
Carefully press the level ring gravity disc to the top disc.
into place.
Gravity disc
Drill mark
Top disc
c Lower the top disc.

Make sure that the drill mark
corresponds to the guide lug
inside the bowl body.
Level ring
Guide lug
G 0 86 23 C1
130
592410-02
14 Fitting the bowl hood.

O-ring and fit the O-ring i o
b Fit the seal ring i o Press

the ring down evenly until bulges
appear.
c Carefully tap down the bulges crosswise with a soft

rubber mallet, until the ring is completely fitted.
d Fit the compressing tool and attach

lifting eyes. Lower the bowl hood so that
its recess fits into the guide pin in the
bowl body.
Recess on bowl hood
Guide pin on bowl body

G 08 62 49 1
e Remove the compressing tool.
131
592410-02
15 Fitting the lock ring.
a Place the lock ring on the bowl hood

with its guide pin close to the
corresponding hole in the bowl
body.
NOTE
Make sure that the groove

in the bowl body which
retains the lock ring is
clean.
b Fit the complete compressing

tool and compress the disc stack
by alternately turning the screws
NOTE
a maximum of 40 Nm at a time
until the lock ring fits into the
bowl body. The lock ring is Check that the lock ring is
correctly fitted when the lock ring correctly positioned all way
ends are facing each other. around!
For correct disc stack pressure

see page 133
c Release the
pressure on the
compressing
NOTE tool and
remove it.
Never remove
any material Lock ring
from the lock
ring. A
hazardous Bowl hood
situation could
result.
Bowl body
8 62 57 1
Before compressing Lock ring in position
132
592410-02
16 Checking the disc stack pressure i i
a Remove bowl hood, top disc and inlet and outlet pipe.
b Add one disc to the disc stack.
c Refit the disc without caulks, the top disc

and bowl hood.
d Fit the lock ring and fully compress
the disc stack with the compressing
tool.
NOTE
Do not use more power than 50

Nm/screw at a time, alternately.
NOTE
Always refit the disc

without caulks on top
of the disc stack!
e If the lock ring enters the groove,

repeat a-d until the lock ring does
not enter the groove.
g Assemble the bowl with

inlet and outlet pipe.
f Dismantle the bowl and remove
one disc to get the correct disc
stack pressure.
G 0 87 49 71
133
592410-02
6.5.4 Frame hood
1 Fitting the frame hood i o .
NOTE
Make sure that the frame

a Apply a thin layer of silicone grease to
hood is mounted in its
the O-ring and fit the O-ring onto the
correct position
frame hood i o
according to the piping
b Lower the frame hood. arrangement.
c Fit and tighten the

screws and washers.
G 0 86 3 7J 1
NOTE
Make sure that the support ring (normally not removed

and mounted on the frame hood) is fitted with its lug into
corresponding groove on the pipe.
134
592410-02
2 Control measurement of paring disc height position o .
a Remove the guide screw A.
b Measure the distance D.

Should be
22,1 + 0,5 mm. Assemble
the correct number of
height adjusting rings (B).
c Refit the guide screw A.
NOTE
Do not mount support ring

upside down!
Support ring A. Guide screw B. Height adjusting rings
G 09 11 5 P 1
135
592410-02
3 Fitting the connecting housing.
a Fit the O-ring i to the connecting

housing and fit the housing over the inlet/
outlet pipe.
NOTE
Make sure that the cylindrical

pin, on top of the frame hood,
enters the guide hole of the
connecting housing.
b) Lubricate the inlet pipe thread
c Fit the nut.
c Fit the O-ring i ,

snap ring and the
inlet bend.
d Fit the safety device.
NOTE
Fit connections.
G 0 8 63 5B 1
136
592410-02
6.5.5 Unbalance sensor (optional)
1 Fitting the unbalance sensor holder.
a Remove the cover.
b Remove plug, if any.
Sensor holder.
Sensor arm Frame
Screw M8 c Fit the O-ring on the holder.

Fit the screw into the holder and
M10 mount the holder into the
separator frame.
Sensor
holder
O-ring NOTE
If removing the sensor holder;

use a M10 screw as a puller.
NOTE
See next page for fitting and

correct adjustment of the sensor.
G 0 8 73 48 1
137
592410-02
2 Adjusting the unbalance sensor
a Fit the sensor into the holder. Do not forget the nut.
b Adjust the sensor so that a value of 1,5 appears on the display.
Nut
Sensor
Nut.
+ = brown or red
J = black or white G 24 V DC
A
0V = blue
c When correct distance is achieved tighten the nut Adjustment value for the sensor is; 12 mA ± 1mA.
For more details see ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 162
against the holder. and ‘‘ 752 Unbalance sensor (option).” on page 171.
Fit the cover (see previous page).
G 0 87 3 4A 1
6.5.6 Speed sensor (optional)
1 Adjusting the speed sensor

a Adjust the speed sensor according to the illustration.
b Fit the sensor to the frame, see ‘‘4.4 Sensors (optional)” on

G 0 87 34 D1
page 33.
81 + 0,1 mm
138
592410-02
6.6 Actions After

Assembly
6.6.1 Control of machine plates and

safety labels o
1 Check that the following signs are attached.
Space for additional label for numbering of

separator and function
Space for label indicating representative.

Machine plate
Lifting instructions
Safety label.
XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxx.
XX
XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx
xxx xxxxx.
! WA R N I N G
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx XX
xxx xxxxx. Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx.
XX XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx
xxx xxxxxxxx. xx xxxxxxxx xxx xxx.
XX XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxx
xx xxxxxxxx. xx xxxxxxx xx xxxx.
XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx xxxxxx xxxx. Xxxxxx xx xxxx xx xxxxxxx.
XXXXXXXX XXXX XXX XXX X XXX XX
XX
Xxxxxx xx xxxx xxx x.
XX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XX X XX X XXXXX XX X
XX
xxxx xx xxx xxxxxxxx xxx xx. XXXXXXXXXXXX X XXXXX XXX X XXXX XXX XXX X
xxxx xx.
XXX XXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXX XX XXXXXX XXX
XXXXX XXX XXXX
XXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXX X XXXXX
Xxxxxx xx x Xxxxxx xx xxxxxx x xxxx
XX X XXX XX XXX
XXXXXXX/XX,X XX
Oil type plate

50Hz
S01 69 0 11
Indicating direction of rotation of

horizontal driving device.
60Hz
139
592410-02
2 Check legibility. The following texts should be read on the labels.
Separator
Manufacturing serial No. / Year
Product No.
Inlet and outlet device
Bowl
Machine bottom part
Bowl speed synchronous
Direction of rotation (bowl)

Speed motor shaft
El. current frequency
Recommended motor power
Max. density of feed
Max. density of sediment
Max. density of operating liquid
Process temperature min./max.
WARNING
! WA R N I N G
Read the instruction manuals before installation, operation and maintenance.
Consider inspection intervals.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX XXX
XXXXXXX XXXXX XX
XXXXX XXXXXXX
XXX XXX X XXX XX XXXX
XXXX XX X X XXXXX XXX
X XXX XXXX XXX XX XX X
XX X XXXXX XX X XXXX
XXX XXX X XXXXXX
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead to fatal injury.
XXXXXXXXX. X XXX X XXX. XXX XXX XXX X XXXXX
XXX X XXXX .
XXXXX XXX XXXX XXX
XXXXX XXXX X XXXX XXX XXXXX X XXXXX XX X
XX. XXX XX XXX XXX XX X.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl filled with liquid
XXXXXXX/XX,X XX
during rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse if bowl is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any dismantling work is started.
Read instruction manual before lifting.
140
592410-02
6.7 Oil Change

standstill when oil is filled or the oil level is
checked.
6.7.1 Lubricating oil

Do not mix different oil brands.
Always use clean vessels when handling lubricating oil.
Great attention must be paid not to contaminate the lubricating oil. Of
particular importance is to avoid mixing of different types of oil. Even a
few drops of motor oil mixed into a synthetic oil may result in severe
foaming.
Any presence of black deposits in a mineral type oil is an indication that
the oil base has deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil additives
have precipitated. Always investigate why black deposits occur.
If changing from one oil brand to another it is recommended to do this
in connection with an overhaul of the separator. Clean the gear housing
and the spindle parts thoroughly and remove all deposits before filling
with new oil.
NOTE
Always clean and dry parts (also tools) before lubricants are applied.
ON
CAUTI
!
Check the oil level before start and top up if necessary.

Oil volume = see “Technical Data”.
It is of utmost importance to use the lubricants recommended in our
documentation.
This does not exclude, however, the use of other brands, provided they
have equivalently high quality properties as the brands recommended.
The use of oil brands and other lubricants other than recommended, is
done at the full responsibility of the user or oil supplier.
Applying, handling and storing of lubricants

Always be sure to follow lubricants manufacturer's instructions.
141
592410-02
6.7.2 Check oil level

1 Remove the oil pin and make sure that the oil
level is above the lower end of the pin.
6.7.3 Oil change procedure

1 Remove the oil pin, plug and washer.
2 Place a vessel under the drain plug.
3 Remove the drain plug.
ON Oil fill
CAUTI
!
Plug and washer
Burn hazard
The lubricating oil and various machine
surfaces can be sufficiently hot to cause burns.
Oil drain plug

4 Collect the oil in a vessel.
5 Fit and tighten the drain plug. Max. Min.
6 Fill with new oil until oil flows out of oil filler
hole.
G 0 8 68 7K 1
NOTE
See ‘‘6.7.6 Lubricating oils” on page 148. NOTE
For Inspection service procedures; See

“Fill oil in the oil sump.” on page 119.
7 Fit the washer and the oil filling plug. Tighten
the plug.
8 Fit the oil pin.
142
592410-02
6.7.4 Lubrication chart

Alfa Laval ref. 567329-02, rev. 1
Bowl (3), Rubber seal rings (4)
Electric motor (6)

Bowl spindle taper (2)
Buffers (3)
Plug thread (7)
Bowl spindle and bearings (1)

Friction clutch bearings (5)
G 0 8 75 44 1
Lubricating points Type of lubricant Interval
1 The oil bath. Bowl spindle bearings See ‘‘6.7.1 Lubricating oil” on page Oil change:
are lubricated by oil mist from the oil 141 Volume: ‘‘8.2 Technical Data” on 1. Continous operation: 4000 hours
bath. page 156 2. Seasonal operation:
Ambient temperature: 0 to +55°C before every operating period
3. Short periods operation:
12 months even if total numbers of
operating hours is less than stated
above
2 Bowl spindle taper. Lubricating oil, only a few drops for At assembling
rust protection.
3 Bowl: Sliding contact surfaces, thread Pastes specified in ‘‘6.7.5 Lubricants” At assembling.
of lock nut and cap nut. on page 145
4 Rubber seal rings. Grease as specified in ‘‘6.7.5 At assembling
Lubricants” on page 145
5 Friction clutch bearings. The bearings are pre-lubricated with No need for extra lubrication.
grease.
6 Electric motor. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
7 Plug thread Lubricating oil. At assembly.
(neck bearing assembly)
143
592410-02
NOTE ON
CAUTI
!
Check and pre-lubricate new spindle bearings and
bearings that have been out of service for six
months or longer. Check the oil level before start.
If the ambient temperature is below 25 °C at start-up, Top up when necessary.
the spindle bearings that have been out of service Do not overfill.
for a shorter period than six months must also be Do not check oil level when separator
pre-lubricated. is running.
If not otherwise specified, follow the suppliers
instructions about applying, handling and storing of
lubricants.
144
592410-02
6.7.5 Lubricants
Alfa Laval ref. 553217-01 rev. 11
NOTE
The data in below tables is based on supplier

information in regards to lubrication properties.
Trade names and designations might vary from
country to country, contact your local supplier for
more information.
Brands with Alfa Laval article numbers are

approved and recommended for use.
Pastes:
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No
Dow Corning Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-02 (1000 g)
Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-03 (100 g)
Molykote G-rapid plus (Paste) 537086-04 (50 g)
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 705
Gleitmo 805K
Klüber Wolfracoat C (Paste)
Rocol Dry Moly Paste

MT-LM
Bonded coatings:
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 900 (Varnish or spray)
Dow Corning Molykote D321R (Spray) 535586-01(375 g)
145
592410-02
Silicone grease for rubber rings:
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic comment Alfa Laval No.
Dow Corning (Molykote) 111 Conform to the FDA 539474-02 (100 g)

(Compound) regulations (21 CFR
178.3570) for occasional 539474-03 (25 g)
food contact. Certified:
National Water Council UK
and WRC, UK. Certified:
food industry as per
Chemical Testing Laboratory
Dr. Böhm, Munich.
Molykote G-5032 NSF Registered H1 (June 3 569415-01 (50 g)

2005)
Bremer & Chemplex 750 DVGW approved according

Leguil, to the German KTW-
Fuchs Lubritech recommendations for
drinking water.
Geralyn SG MD 2 NSF Registered H1 (30

March 2007)
Klüber Unisilkon L 250 L Complies with German

Environmental Agency on
hygiene requirements for tap
water. Certified by DVGW-
KTW, WRC, AS4020, ACS.
Paraliq GTE 703 NSF Registered H1 (25 Feb

2004)
Complies with LMBG and
the European standard EN
1672, part 2.
Bel-Ray No-Tox Silicone NSF Registered H1 (19

Valve Seal June 2002)
MMCC ALCO 220 NSF Registered H1 (25

March 2002)
Rocol Foodlube Hi- NSF Registered H1 (18

Temp April 2001)
146
592410-02
Greases for ball and roller bearings:
NOTE
Always follow the specific recommendation for

lubrication as advised by the manufacturer.
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic comment
BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2
Castrol APS 2 Spheerol EPL 2
Chevron Chevron Dura-Lith Grease EP2 Texaco

Multifak AFB 2
Dow Corning Molykote G-0101 Molykote Multilub
ExxonMobil Beacon EP2
Unirex N2
Mobilith SHC 460
Mobilux EP2
Fuchs Lubritech Lagermeister EP2
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Rembrandt EP2
Shell Alvania EP 2
Albida EP2
SKF LGEP 2
LGMT 2
LGFB 2 NSF Registered H1

(14 Sept 2005)
Total Multis EP2
BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2
147
592410-02
6.7.6 Lubricating oils

Alfa Laval ref. 567330-01, rev. 4
Paraffinic mineral lubricating oil,

category (ISO-L-) HM 68.
Viscosity grade (ISO-3448/3104) VG 68.
The oil shall follow the requirements in one of
the standards below.
Standard Designation
DIN 51524 part 2 or 3* (German standard) DIN 51524-HLP or HVLP* 68
ISO 11158 (International standard) ISO-L-HM or HV* 68
Viscosity index (ISO 2909) VI>95
The following is the list of recommended oil

brands. Trade names and designations might
vary from country to country. Other oil brands
may be used as long as they follow the above
standards and have equivalently high quality
as the brands recommended. For use of other
brands please contact the oil company for there
advises of correct choice of oil.
Manufacturer Designation
Alfa Laval 567334-01 1 litre
567334-02 4 litres
BP Bartran 68
Bartran HV 68*
Energol SHF-HV 68 *
Castrol Hyspin AWS 68
Hyspin AWH(-M) 68*
Chevron Hydraulic oil AW 68
Rando HD 68 (H2)
Rando HDZ 68 (H2)*
Rykon Premium 68 (H2)*
ExxonMobil Nuto H 68
Univis N 68*
Mobil DTE 26 (ISO VG 68)
Mobil DTE 10 Excel 68*
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Haydn 68
Handel 68 *
Shell Tellus Oil 68
Tellus Oil S 68
Tellus Oil T 68*
Statoil HydraWay HMA 68
Hydra Way HVXA 68*
Total Azolla AF 68
Azolla ZS 68
Equivis ZS 68 *
Elf Lubmarine Visga 68*
148
592410-02
* These oils should be used at cold start, i.e. when the ambient temperature is
below 20 oC.
All oils can be used at ambient temperatures above 20 oC.
The list of recommended oil brands is not complete. Other oil brands may
be used as long as the follow the above standards and have equivalent
high quality as the brands recommended. The use of oil brands and other
lubricants other than recommended, is done at the full responsibility of
the user or oil supplier.
149
592410-02
6.8 Lifting instructions
6.8.1 Lifting the separator
Weight to lift 320 kg
Sling length: Min. 750 mm
Fasten all four bolts. Tightening

torque 35 - 45 Nm
1 Remove the inlet and outlet device, the G 08 6 84 51
frame hood and the bowl according to the

instructions in ‘‘6.3 Dismantling” on page 56.
NOTE
Never lift or transport the separator with the

bowl still inside.
2 Disconnect all connections.

3 Fit the lifting tool (not included in set of tools).
All four bolts on the lifting tool must be
fastened to the frame.
4 Use two lifting slings to lift the separator.

Total length of each loop: minimum 1,5
metres.
150
592410-02
5 Unscrew the foundation bolts.

6 When lifting and moving the separator, follow
normal safety precautions for lifting large
heavy objects.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazards
A falling separator can cause accidents
resulting in serious injury and damage.
Never lift the separator by any other method
other than described in this manual.
NOTE
When lifting parts without weight

specifications, always use lifting straps with
the capacity of at least 500 kg.
6.8.2 Lifting the bowl
When lifting and moving an assembled

bowl, always follow these instructions.
Weight to lift 50 kg
1 Fit the lifting tool with lifting eyes to the bowl
assembly.
2 Check that the lock ring is mounted correctly
before lifting the complete bowl.
3 Lift the bowl using a sling with the proper
rating.
Tightening torque 35 - 45 Nm
NOTE
Never try to lift the bowl while it is still in the

frame. The bowl body is fastened to the frame
Lock ring
with the cap nut.
Make sure that

lock ring is fitted.
G 0 86 84 7 1
151
592410-02
152
592410-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 7 FAULT FINDING
7 Fault Finding
These fault finding instructions are for the
separator only.
If a fault occurs, study the System

Documentation fault finding section (if
applicable).
7.1 Mechanical Functions
7.1.1 Separator vibration
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration hazards NOTE

If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator
and keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown. Some vibration is normal during the starting
The cause of the vibration must be identified and stopping sequences when the separator
and corrected before the separator is restarted. passes through its critical speed.
Cause Corrective action

Bowl out of balance due to: Dismantle the separator and check the assembly
- poor cleaning and cleaning.
- incorrect assembly
- incorrect disc stack compression
- bowl assembled with parts from other separators
Uneven sludge deposits in the sludge space. Dismantle and clean the separator bowl.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure, and if necessary,
adjust the height.
Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle.
Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.
The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet.
Spindle top bearing spring broken. Renew all springs.
592410-02 153
7.1.2 Smell
Normal occurrence during start while the friction None.
blocks are slipping. If smell continues when separator is at full speed,
stop the separator and replace friction blocks.
Oil level in oil sump too low. Check oil level and add oil if necessary.
7.1.3 Noise
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure and adjust the height.
7.1.4 Speed too low

Friction blocks are oily or worn. Clean or renew friction blocks.
Bowl is not closed or leaking. Dismantle the bowl and check.
Motor failure. Repair the motor.
Bearing(s) damaged. Renew all bearings.
Incorrect transmission parts (60 Hz belt pulley for
50 Hz power supply).
ING
WARN
!
Stop and change the belt

transmission to suit the power
supply frequency.
154
592410-02
7 FAULT FINDING SEPARATOR MANUAL
7.1.5 Speed too high

ING
WARN
!

supply frequency.
7.1.6 Starting power too high

ING
WARN
!

supply frequency.
Wrong direction of rotation. Change electrical phase connections to the motor.
7.1.7 Starting power too low

ING
WARN
!

supply frequency.
Friction blocks are oily or worn. Clean or renew friction blocks.

155
592410-02
7.1.8 Starting time too long

Friction blocks are oily or worn. Renew or clean friction blocks.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop, check and adjust the height.
156
592410-02
7 FAULT FINDING SEPARATOR MANUAL
7.2 Separating Functions
7.2.1 Bowl opens accidentally

during operation
Strainer in the operating water supply is clogged. Clean the strainer.
No water in the operating water system. Check the operating water system and make sure
the valve(s) are open.
Hoses between the supply valves and separator are Fit hoses correctly.
incorrectly fitted.
Nozzle in operating slide clogged. Clean the nozzle.
Rectangular ring in discharge slide is defective. Renew the rectangular ring.
Valve plugs are defective. Renew all plugs.
Supply valve for opening water is leaking. Rectify the leak.
Operating water ring leaking Renew operating water ring
7.2.2 Bowl fails to open for sludge

discharge

Strainer in the operating water supply is clogged. Clean the strainer.
Water flow too low. Check the water flow
Hoses between the supply valves and separator are Fit hoses correctly.
incorrectly fitted.
Nozzle in operating slide missing. Fit the nozzle.
Rectangular ring in the operating slide or bowl body Renew the rectangular ring.
is defective.
7.2.3 Unsatisfactory separation

result
Incorrect separation temperature. Adjust separation temperature.
Throughput too high. Adjust throughput.
Disc stack is clogged. Clean disc stack.
Sludge space in bowl is filled. Clean and reduce the time between sludge
discharges.
Bowl speed too low. Examine the motor and power transmission including
the belt transmission (clutch).
Bowl rotates in wrong direction Check the electrical connections to the motor.
Gravity disc hole to small Use a gravity disc with larger hole
157
592410-02
7.2.4 Bowl fails to close

Nozzle in operating slide clogged. Clean nozzle.
Hoses reversed. Adjust.
Rectangular ring in discharge slide is defective Renew rectangular ring.
Valve plugs in operating slide missing or defective. Renew valve plugs.
No water. Turn on water supply.
Operating water ring leaking Renew operating water ring
158
592410-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
8 Technical Reference
8.1 Product description
Alfa Laval ref. 592328, rev. 0
NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an

integrated system including a monitoring
system.
If the technical data in the system description
does not agree with the technical data in this
instruction manual, the data in the system
description is the valid one.
Product number. 881202-08-01

Separator type. P 636
Application. Cleaning of fuel and lube oil.
Technical design:
Intended for marine and land installations.
Purifier/Clarifier execution
Total discharge.
No brake
Centrilock® lock ring
Complies with the essential health and safety
requirements of:
2006/42/EC Machinery directive
2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive
EC 1935/2004 Materials Traceability
To meet these requirements the following

standards have been used:
EN 12547 Centrifuges-Common safety requirements. (including several

other EN- standards )
592410-02 159
Operational limits:
Feed temperature: 0°C to +100°C.

Ambient temperature: +5°C to +55°C.
Discharge intervals: 2 minutes to 4 hours.
Maximum allowed density of operating liquid: 1000 kg/m3
Viscosity max. 600 cSt at 50°C.
Max. light phase density, mineral oil/fresh water separation: 991 kg/m3 at 15°C.
Max. allowed speed: 10700 r/minute.
Not to be used for liquids with flashpoint below 60°C.
Risk for corrosion and erosion has to be investigated in each case by the application centre.
Remote restart allowed under certain conditions, see Interface description.
160
592410-02
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE SEPARATOR MANUAL
8.2 Technical Data

NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an integrated system which includes

a monitoring system.
When the separator is part of a system, the technical data for the system may
differ from the technical data in this instruction manual. If this is the case, the
system data is valid.
Subject Value Unit

General technical data:
Motor power: 50 Hz / 60 Hz 7,5 / 8,6 kW
Gear ratio 292 / 82 50Hz
Gear ratio 243 / 82 60Hz
Alarm levels for vibration monitor,
connection 752, 1st/2nd 0,2 / 0,3 mm
Bowl max. inner diameter 237 mm
Discharge interval, min./max. 2 / 240 minutes
Max. density of operating liquid 1000 kg/m³
Max. density of feed/sediment 1100 / 2752 kg/m³
Min./Max. ratio of density: 0,794 / 0,977
Feed temperature, min./max. 0 / 100 °C
Max. running time without flow,
- empty bowl 60 minutes
- filled bowl 60 minutes
Bowl body material AL 111 2377-02
Other metallic materials other than
stainless steel in bowl: Yes
Operating data:
Bowl speed, synchronous 10683/10668 r/min 50Hz/60Hz
Motor speed synchronous 3000 / 3600 r/min 50Hz/60Hz
Max. allowed speed: 10700 r/min
Power consumption at start-up, max. 10 kW
Power consumption idling/max.
capacity: 2,7 / 6,6 kW
Starting time, min./max. 1,0 / 2,5 minutes
Stopping time, min./max. 15 / 30 minutes
Sound power/Uncertainty 9,2 Bel(A)
Sound pressure/Uncertainty 78 dB(A)
Max. vibration level 9 mm/s (r.m.s)
Volume and capacity data:
Bowl liquid volume 2,5 litres
Fixed discharge volume 2,5 litres
Lubricating oil volume: 2,2 litres
Sludge volume, efficient/total 0,32 / 0,89 litres
Weight information:
Motor weight 42 kg
Bowl weight 49 kg
Separator (without motor) 330 kg
161
592410-02
8.3 Connection List

No. Description Requirements/limits
206 Inlet for conditioning and displacement liquid

• Flow set value 13,5 - 16,5 litres/minute
• Quality requirements See ‘‘Demand Specification Water” on page 175
222 Outlet for solid phase

• Discharge volume See ‘‘Technical Data” on page 161.
• Interface The outlet from the sludge cover must always be
arranged to prevent the cover from being filled up
with sludge.
(221) Outlet for heavy phase
(377) Outlet for operating liquid
(463) Drain of frame top part, upper
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid See ‘‘Operating water interface” on page 185.
• Discharge water flow, set value 9,9 - 12,1 litres/minute
• Make-up water flow, set value 2,52 - 3,08 litres/minute
• Quality requirements See ‘‘Demand Specification Water” on page 175.
• Temperature < 80 oC
462 Drain of frame top part, lower Should be possible to drain liquids by gravity.
701 Motor for separator

Allowed frequency variation: ± 5%
(momentarily during 5 seconds) ± 10%
740 Speed sensor for bowl spindle See page 164.
• Type Inductive promixly switch
• Supply voltage, nominal 8V
• With sensor activated (near metal) Less or equal to 1,2 mA.
• With sensor not activated (far from metal) More or equal to 2,1 mA.
• Number of pulses per revolution 1
752 Position transducer for bearing holder (unbalance sensor) See page 164.
• Type Inductive analogue sensor
• Supply voltage 15 to 30 V DC
• Operation range (mild steel) 3,5 mm +0,25mm
• Output current analogue 4 to 20 mA
• Load resistance, RL Max. 1 kΩ
162
592410-02
760 Cover interlocking switch See page 164

• Type Mechanical limit switch
• Switch rating, resistive load max. 3 A (at 48 V DC)
1 A (at 220 V AC)
163
592410-02
8.4 Interface Description

8.4.1 Scope
This document gives information,
requirements, and recommendations about
operational procedures and signal
processing for safe and reliable operation of
the separator. It is intended to be used for
designing auxiliary equipment and control
systems for the separator.
8.4.2 References
This Interface Description is one
complementary document to the separator.
Other such documents that contain necessary
information and are referred to here are:
• Interconnection diagram
• Connection List
• Technical Data
• Operating water interface
Standards referred to are:

• EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency
stop equipment, functional aspects -
Principles of design
• EN 1037 Safety of machinery - Prevention of
unexpected start-up
• EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety
related parts of control systems - Part 1
General principles for design.
164
592410-02
8.4.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this document, the following
definitions apply:
• Synchronous speed: The speed the machine
will attain when it is driven by a three phase
squirrel-cage induction motor and there is no
slip in the motor and the drive system.
• Full speed: The synchronous speed minus
normal slip.
8.4.4 Goal
To eliminate situations that can cause harm,
i.e. injury, damage to health or property and
unsatisfactory process result are e.g.:
Situation Effect
Unbalance caused by uneven sediment Too high stress on bowl and bearing
accumulation in the bowl. system which might cause harm.
Too high bowl speed. Too high stress on bowl which might
cause harm.
Access to moving parts. Can cause injury to person who

accidentally touches these parts.
Insufficient cleaning of separator. Unsatisfactory product quality.
Bowl leakage. Product losses.
Information and instructions given in this

document aim at preventing these situations.
Control and supervision can be more or less
comprehensive depending on the type of control
equipment used. When a simple control unit is
used it would be impossible or too expensive to
include many of the functions specified here
while these functions could be included at
nearly no extra cost when a more advanced
control unit is used. For these reasons functions
that are indispensable or needed for safety
reasons to protect the machine and/or
personnel are denoted with shall while other
functions are denoted with should.
165
592410-02
8.4.5 Description of separator

modes
For control purposes the operation of the
separator should be divided into different
modes.
The normally used modes are described below
but other modes might exist.
It is assumed that:
• The separator is correctly assembled.
• All connections are made according to
Connection List, Interconnection Diagram
and Interface Description.
• The separator control system is activated.
If above conditions are not fulfilled the
separator will be in SERVICE mode.
Stand still means:

• The power to the separator motor is off
• The bowl is not rotating.
Starting means:
• The power to the separator motor is on.
• The bowl is rotating and accelerating
Running means:
• The power to the separator motor is on.
• The bowl is rotating at full speed.
• RUNNING is a collective denomination for a
number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
– STAND BY: Separator is in a waiting mode
and not producing.
– PRODUCTION: Separator is fed with
product and producing.
166
592410-02
Stopping means:
• The power to the separator motor is off.
• The bowl is rotating and decelerating.
• STOPPING is a collective denomination for a
number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
– NORMAL STOP: A manually or
automatically initiated stop.
– SAFETY STOP: An automatically initiated
stop at too high vibrations.
– EMERGENCY STOP: A manually initiated
stop at emergency situations. This stop
will be in effect until it is manually reset.
8.4.6 Remote start

This machine may be started from a remote
location under the following conditions;
• First start after any kind of service or manual
cleaning must be supervised locally in order
to ensure that no mistakes have been made
during assembly.
• The unbalance sensor is mandatory for
remote start.
• The speed sensor is mandatory for remote
start.
• The installation must include equipment to
prevent unintentional start-up from remote
location when the machine is disassembled.
• The installation must include equipment to
prevent unintentional start of process flow
from remote location when the machine is
not properly connected to the piping.
167
592410-02
8.4.7 Handling of connection interfaces
Electrical connections
701 Separator motor.
The separator is equipped with a 3-phase DOL - (direct
on line) started motor. The separator can also be started
by a Y/D starter, but then the time in Y-position must be
maximised to 5 seconds.
There shall be an emergency stop circuit designed
according to EN 418 and a power isolation device
according to EN 1037.
There shall be a start button close to the separator that
shall be used for first start after assembly of the
separator.
There should be a counter to count number of running
hours.
There should be a current transformer to give an
analogue signal to the control unit about the motor
current.
740 Speed sensor (Option)

A proximity sensor of inductive type according to
Namur standard is giving a number of pulses per
revolution of the bowl (see Connection List).
Signal processing in STARTING:
• The separator should be stopped automatically
according to NORMAL STOP procedure and an alarm
should be given when the accumulated time for
acceleration is longer than the maximum time
specified in Technical Data. An abnormal start time
indicates some malfunction of the separator
equipment and should be investigated.
168
592410-02
• When the "Maximum allowed speed" is

exceeded an alarm shall be given initiating a
NORMAL STOP.
• The speed monitoring system shall be
checked continuously (e.g by checking that
pulses are coming). In case of failure
indication the separator shall be stopped
automatically by NORMAL STOP with a timer
controlled stop sequence and an alarm for
speed monitoring system failure shall be
given.
• The acceleration should be supervised to
ensure that a certain speed (e.g 250r/min.)
has been reached within a certain time (e.g
30 seconds).
Signal processing in RUNNING:

• When the "Maximum allowed speed" is
exceeded an alarm shall be given initiating a
NORMAL STOP.
• If the speed falls more than 10% below the
synchronous speed for a period longer than
1 minute or 15% during more than 5 seconds
a low speed alarm should be given. Low
speed indicates some malfunction of the
separator equipment and shall be
investigated.
• The speed monitoring system shall be
checked continuously (e.g. by checking that
pulses are coming). In case of a failure
indication an alarm for speed monitoring
system failure shall be given. If there is a risk
of too high speed the separator shall be
stopped by NORMAL STOP.
• The speed drop during discharge compared
to the measured speed immediately before,
should be between 3-8% which will indicate
a proper discharge.
Signal processing in STOPPING:
169
592410-02
• STAND STILL shall be indicated when no pulses are

detected within 30 seconds.
• Stopping the separator when alarm for speed
monitoring system failure is active, shall cause a timer
controlled stop. (See “Stop time” in Technical Data.)
170
592410-02
752 Unbalance sensor (option).

For indication of any abnormal unbalance and to be
able to perform appropriate countermeasures, the
separator has been equipped with an inductive
analogue sensor monitoring the radial position of the
top-bearing seat on the separator frame. The signal
from the sensor shall be monitored and two alarm
levels according to the vibration alarm levels in
"Technical Data" should be set. The vibration level
shall be high for 3 seconds to generate an alarm. The
first level is only used to generate an alarm while the
second level shall stop the machine.
The vibration monitor shall include self check
function to be performed at least at initiation of
STARTING.
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the
separator shall be stopped the quickest way possible
and it shall not been restarted until the reasons for
the unbalance have been found and measures to
remove them have been taken.
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the
separator shall be stopped automatically by SAFETY
STOP.
If the self check system triggers, an alarm shall be
given and an automatic stop by NORMAL STOP
shall be initiated.
Signal processing in RUNNING:
• If vibrations exceed the first alarm level an alarm
should be given. Vibrations of this magnitude will
reduce the expected life time of the bearings and
should therefore be eliminated.
• If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the
separator shall be stopped automatically by
SAFETY STOP.
• If the self check system triggers, an alarm shall be
given.
171
592410-02
Signal processing in STOPPING:

• If the self check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given.
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:
• If vibrations exceed the second level the
system shall turn over automatically to
SAFETY STOP.
172
592410-02
760 Cover interlocking switch (option)

The separator is equipped with an interlocking
switch to detect if the cover is mounted.
Signal processing in STAND STILL:

• The circuit is closed when the cover of the
separator is mounted.
• The interlocking switch should be connected
in such a way that starting of the motor is
prevented when the separator cover is not
mounted.
Signal processing in STARTING, RUNNING:

• If the circuit is broken the separator should
be stopped automatically by NORMAL
STOP. This is to minimise the risk of having
access to moving parts.
Fluid connections
Complementary information is given in the
document Connection List.
201 Inlet
Processing in STAND STILL:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:
• Should be closed. Bowl will be open and
empty or closed and filled depending on if
start is done from STAND STILL or
STOPPING.
Processing in RUNNING:
• Could be closed or open (see Operating
Water Interface).
206 Inlet for liquid seal and displacement
liquid
• See "Operating Water Interface
220, 221 and 222 Outlets

Processing in STAND STILL:
173
592410-02
• Could be closed or open.
Processing in other modes:

• Shall be open.
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid

Processing in all modes:
• It is recommendable to supervise the supply
pressure to the operating water valve block
(optional). If pressure is too low, start should
be interlocked and if it happens in
PRODUCTION turn over to STAND BY
should take place.
• Below 85% of synchronous bowl speed no
water supply may be made.
• When coming from PRODUCTION a
discharge shall be initiated to remove
sediments from bowl to avoid problems due
to solidification, see Connection List.
Signal processing in PRODUCTION:
• Automatic discharges shall be initiated by
timer (see Operating Water Interface).
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:
• Discharges should not be made.
Signal processing in SAFETY STOP and
EMERGENCY STOP:
• Discharges should not be made.
174
592410-02
8.5 Demand Specification

Water
Poor quality of the operating water may with time cause erosion,
corrosion and/or operating problems. The water shall be treated
to meet certain demands.
1 Turbidity-free water, solids content <0,001% by volume.

Max. particle size 50 µm.
Deposits shall not be allowed to form in certain areas in the system.
2 Total hardness less than 180 mg CaCO3 per litre, which corresponds
to 10 °dH or 12,5 °E. Hard water may with time form deposits in the
operating mechanism. The precipitation rate is accelerated with
increased operating temperature and low discharge frequency.
These effects become more severe the harder the water is.
3 Chloride content max. 100 ppm NaCl (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/l).
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on surfaces in contact with the
operating water.Corrosion is a process that is accelerated by
increased separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion
concentration.
4 6,5 < pH < 9
Bicarbonate content (HCO3) min. 70mg HCO3 per litre, which
corresponds to 3,2 °dKH.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for

consequences arising from unsatisfactorily
purified operating water supplied by the
customer.
175
592410-02
8.6 Drawings
8.6.1 Basic size drawing

A B
X0 23 81 6 A
Connection house, with connections 201, 220 and 206, turnable in 60° steps all around.
All connections to be installed non-loaded and flexible
All dimensions are nominal. Reservation for individual deviations due to tolerances.
Data for connection, see ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 162.
A Maximum horizontal displacement at the inlet and outlet

connections during operation ± 5 mm.
B Maximum horizontal displacement at the sludge
connection during operation ± 2 mm.
C Tightening torque 160 Nm
176
592410-02
8.6.2 Foundation drawing

E
F
I
J
G L
M
H
A N
C
X0 23 8 17 A
B
A Centre of separator bowl.

B Holes for foundation bolts (8x).
C Centre of motor.
D Min. lifting capacity required during service: 300 kg.
E Max. height of largest component incl. lifting tool.
F Service side.
G Foundation bolts.
H Installation according to stated foundation force.
I Recommended free floor space for unloading when
doing service.
J No fixed installation within this area.
K Centre of gravity (complete machine).
L Vertical force not exceeding 10 kN/foot.
M Horizontal force not exceeding 10 kN/foot.
N Total static load max. 4 kN
177
592410-02
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram

Interlocking switch (frame top part)
Unbalance sensor (position trans.

for bearing holder).
Speed sensor (bowl speed).
Junction box
Wiring without
junction box
Wiring of connector “X”: Wire colour codes:
RD=A BK=Black
BU=B BN=Brown
GN=C BU=Blue
YW=D RD=Red
WT=E GN=Green
BK=F PU=Purple
BN=G YW=Yellow
PU=H WT=White
G 0 86 75 61
Demand specification wire

Approval: UL 1007/1569
CSA TR-64 Items showed in this document are not included in all
Area acc. to AWG 18 separators. See product specification.
178
592410-02
8.6.4 Performance data in- and

outlet device
Inlet pressure as a function of throughput and

viscosity.
140
120
100
80
10 cSt
15 cSt
[kPa]
60
36 cSt
48 cSt
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G 0 8 69 66 9
-20
[m3 /h]
179
592410-02
Maximum light phase counter pressure as a

function of throughput and viscosity
600
500
400
10 cSt
[kPa]
15 cSt
300
36 cSt
48 cSt
200
100
G 0 86 9 67 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
[m /h]
180
592410-02
8.6.5 Power consumption

Power consumption as a function of throughput

and counter pressure. Viscosity 10 cSt
Min
150 kPa
[kW]
4
300 kPa
Max
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G 08 69 67 1
[m 3 /h]
181
592410-02

Min
150 kPa
[kW]
4
300 kPa
Max
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G 08 69 6 72
[m 3 /h]
182
592410-02

Min
150 kPa
[kW]
4
300 kPa
Max
0
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5
G 08 69 6 73
[m 3/h]
183
592410-02

Min
150 kPa
[kW]
4
300 kPa
Max
0
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5
G 08 69 6 74
3
[m /h]
184 592410-02
8.6.6 Operating water interface

Proposed operation of operating water

interface.
Connections 372 and 376 from the water block
converge to form connection 375 to the
separator.
Closing the bowl and supplying liquid seal:
1 Close the operating slide valves by supplying discharge water (connection 372) for 5 seconds.
2 Pause for 15 seconds.
3 Close the bowl by supplying make-up water (connection 376) for 15 seconds.
4 Apply liquid seal by opening connection 206 for 9 seconds.
5 Open the feed (connection 201).
Start-up sequence illustrated graphically:
376
372
206
201
G 08 69 7B 1
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Performing a discharge:
1 Close the feed (connection 201).

2 Perform a displacement (of the interface) by opening connection 206 for 10 seconds.
3 Initiate a discharge by supplying discharge water (connection 372) for 3 seconds.
4 Pause for 15 seconds.
5 Close the bowl by supplying make up water (connection 376) for 15 seconds.
6 Apply liquid seal by opening connection 206 for 9 seconds.
7 Open the feed (connection 201).
Discharge sequence illustrated graphically:
376
372
206
201
G 08 69 7 C1
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
185
592410-02
During the separating process the make-up

water supply volume is maintained by opening
connection 376 for 1 second every 5 minutes.
186
592410-02
8.6.7 Electric motor

Note! Cable glands delivered

attached to the motor.
Casted lifting lugs on
both sides.
Knockout openings
for M25 + M20 cable
glands on both sides. 4 holes M10x18
External earthing bolt
acc. to variant code 067
j6
Note: The motor

bearings are
permanently
lubricated
Note: Drain holes with closable

plugs to be positioned at lowest
G 0 9 38 29 1
point for IM2111 mounting Metal fan cover acc.
position. to variant code 053
Manufacturer ABB Motors
Manuf. drawing Cat. GB 08-2001
Standards IEC 34-series, 72, 79 and 85
Size 132 SB
Type M3AA 132 SB
Weight 42 kg
Poles 2
Insulation class F
Bearings D-end 6208-2Z/C3

N-end 6206-2Z/C3
Method of cooling IC 411 (IEC 34-6)
Spec. Totally enclosed three-phase

motor for marine service
Motor with feet and small flange.
187
592410-02
Type of mounting Degree of

protection
IEC 34-7 IEC 34-5
IM 2111 IP 55
Note!
High output design (Genelec +1)
Cast iron bearing shield at N-end
NOTE
For complete information about motor variants,

please contact your Alfa Laval representative.
188
592410-02
SEPARATOR MANUAL 9 INSTALLATION
9 Installation
9.1 Introduction
These installation specifications are valid for
the P 636 separator.
The installation instructions are specifications,

which are compulsory requirements.
Any specific requirements from classification
societies or other local authorities must be
followed.
NOTE
If the specifications are not followed, Alfa Laval

cannot be held responsible for any
malfunctions related to the installation.
592410-02 189
9.2 Upon Arrival At The

Storage Area
Ensure that the separator delivered is
suitable for the application.
9.2.1 Transport
a When lifting the separator, make sure that tools and lifting
devices are fastened securely. See chapter ‘‘6.8.1 Lifting
the separator” on page 150.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazards
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.
b When lifting the bowl see ‘‘6.8.2 Lifting the bowl” on page
151.
c During transport of the separator, the

inlet and outlet device, frame hood and
bowl must always be removed.
G 0 87 35 61
190
592410-02
9 INSTALLATION SEPARATOR MANUAL
9.2.2 Protection and storage of

goods
a The separator must be stored indoors at 5 -

55 °C, if not delivered in a water-resistant
box, designated for outdoor storage.
The following protection products are b If there is a risk for water condensation, the
recommended: equipment must stand well ventilated and at
1 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 112 or equivalent) with long a temperature above dew point.
lasting effective treatment for external surfaces.
The oil should prevent corrosion attacks and
leaves a waxy surface.
2 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) is a thin
lubricant for inside protection. It gives a
lubricating transparent oil film.
3 Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-rust c If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the
oil after the storage period. equipment must be inspected every 6
4 Moisture remover to be packed together with months and, if necessary, the protection be
the separator equipment. renewed.
G 08 73 65 1
191
592410-02
9.3 Planning of
Installation
9.3.1 Important measurements
G 08 7 37 41
Important measurements are:
- minimum lifting height for lifting bowl parts
- shortest distance between driving motor and wall
- space for control and operation
- free passage for dismantling and assembly
- space for maintenance work
- space on floor for machine parts during maintenance
work
For more detailed information, see ‘‘8.6.1 Basic size

drawing” on page 176 and ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation drawing” on
page 177.
192
592410-02
9.3.2 Maintenance service
A work bench should be installed in the separator room.
Hot water, compressed air and diesel oil should be available

near the work bench to make maintenance work easier.
An overhead hoist with capacity of 300 kg is required for

transport of bowl parts to the working bench. Lifting point should
be above the centre of the separator.
NOTE
When two or more separators are installed, the

lifting height should be increased to enable
bowl parts from one separator to be lifted and
moved over an adjoining separator.
See ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation drawing” on page 177
G 0 87 38 81
193
592410-02
9.3.3 Connections to surrounding

equipment
Local safety regulations

If the local safety regulations prescribe that the
installation has to be inspected and approved by
responsible authorities before the plant is put
into service, consult with such authorities before
installing the equipment and have the projected
G 0 8 73 91 1
plant design approved by them.
Service media
Ensure that all service media (electric power,
operating and safety liquids etc.) required for the
separator have the correct quality and capacity.
G 0 8 74 02 1
Sludge discharge tank
If the sediment from the separator is discharged
into a tank, this tank must be sufficiently
ventilated. The connection between the
separator and the tank must be of the size and
configuration specified.
If the solids are discharged from the separator
bowl casing into a closed system, ensure that
this system cannot be overfilled or closed in such
a way that the solids cannot leave the bowl
casing. This could cause a hazardous situation.
G 0 87 4 31 1
194
592410-02
9.4 Storage
If the separator is out of operation for more
than 1 month:
1 Lift out the bowl.
2 Protect the spindle taper from corrosion by
lubricating it with oil.
3 Keep the separator and bowl well stored, dry
and protected from mechanical damage.
For details see ‘‘9.2.2 Protection and storage of
goods” on page 191
9.5 Before start-up

Before start-up, wipe off the oil from the
spindle taper.
If the separator has been out of operation for:
1 month or longer
• Pre-lubricate the spindle neck bearing.
6 months or longer
• Perform an Inspection service i i and make
sure to pre-lubricate the spindle bearings.
• Change the oil before starting.
G 08 68 7 L1
18 months or longer
• Perform an Overhaul service o and make
sure to pre-lubricate the spindle bearings.
• Change the oil before starting.
195
592410-02
196
592410-02
Component
Description
Solenoid Valve Block,

Water
X019041A
Product No. 1765927-03
Printed Apr 2005

Book No. 1818120-02 V2
Marine & Diesel Equipment

Alfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be
gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Marine & Diesel Equipment
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2005.
Study instruction manuals and observe the
warnings before installation, operation,
service and maintenance.
Not following the instructions can result in

serious accidents with fatal injuries.
P000272A
In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions have
been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for situations
arising from unintended usage of the machine and its tools.
A summary of the safety information is found in the Safety chapter
under divider 1.
Contents
1 Function Description 1
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
1.3 Working Principle 2
2 Fault Finding 3
3 Maintenance 5
3.1 Periodic Maintenance 5
3.2 Disassembly and Cleaning 6
4 Technical Data 7
4.1 Specification 7
4.2 Dimensions 8
5 Spare Parts 9
1818120-02
1818120-02
1 Function Description
1.1 Application
The solenoid valve block supplies water for
different functions in a separation system. The
water supply is opened and closed by the
control unit.
1.2 Design
The valve block consists of three solenoid
valves assembled together in a block with
hose connections for each valve outlet.
The valves (3) have a common water supply

channel which is connected to a high pressure
water supply (A) via a strainer (6). A vacuum
breaker (2) protects the supply line from under
pressure.
X019021A
The outlet flow of each of the valves is
controlled by a constant flow valve(4) 1. Coil
2. Vacuum breaker and drain
mounted in the valve outlet. A non-return 3. Solenoid valve
valve is attached to the constant flow valve, 4. Constant flow valve
SV 10. 5. Identification label
6. Strainer
7. Manual valve operation lever
8. AC solenoid indicator
A Water inlet, high pressure
1818120-02 1
1 Function Description Solenoid Valve Block, Water
There is an indicator (8) for each valve which

rotates when the solenoid is energized, i.e. the
valve is open.
All valves can be opened and closed manually

by pushing and turning the lever (7).
P000521A
Left position: Automatic operation
Right position: Manually opened valve
1.3 Working Principle

When a solenoid is energized, it pulls the
valve diaphragm up and lets water out through
the valve outlet. The indicator (8) rotates. The
flow of the outgoing water is determined by
the constant flow valve (4) and is kept
constant even at large variations in water
supply pressure.
When the control unit switches off the voltage

to the solenoid, the diaphragm goes down and
closes the valve outlet. The AC indicator (8)
stops rotating.
The vacuum breaker (2) lets air in if the

pressure in the supply line is lower than
outside. This is to prevent water being sucked
in from the valve outlet and polluting the
supply water line.
2 1818120-02
2 Fault Finding
Fault Probable cause Remedy

Insufficient water Valves in supply line closed or partly Check the supply line and open the valves.
flow closed.
Clogged strainer. Remove and clean the strainer.
Excessive water Damaged (or missing) constant flow valve. Replace constant flow valve.
flow
Leakage Broken diaphragm or sticking parts. Disassemble and clean. Replace worn parts
Dirt affecting the solenoid parts. from spare parts kit and re-assemble.
Noise Unsatisfactory movement of solenoid core Disassemble, clean and re-assemble.

due to dirt.
Valve does not Sticking of solenoid core due to dirt. Disassemble, clean and re-assemble.
open
Open circuit due to loose connections or Examine the electrical system and correct the
blown fuses fault.
Low voltage (less than 85% of name plate Examine the power supply to the solenoid
rating). valve and correct the fault.
Coil burned-out (too high voltage). Replace the coil. Examine the power supply
and correct the fault.
1818120-02 3
2 Fault Finding Solenoid Valve Block, Water
4 1818120-02
3 Maintenance
3.1 Periodic Maintenance

• Clean the strainer regularly for trouble-
free operation.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
If the strainer is clogged, water is not

supplied to the separator bowl for
conditioning of the sludge. This can
lead to breakdown and fatal injury.
• Disassemble and clean the solenoid valve

at regular service intervals or when
required, see below.
• Measure the water flows occasionally to

check if the constant flow valves are worn.
(Manually open the valve for e.g. one
minute and measure the amount of water
flowing out. See the spare parts list for
flow values.)
1818120-02 5
3 Maintenance Solenoid Valve Block, Water
3.2 Disassembly and

Cleaning
NOTE
Switch off electrical power and

depressurize the valve block before
disassembly.
• Make sure the lever for manual operation

is in the left position. Otherwise the
diaphragm spring could be damaged.
P000521A
• Take care not to drop and lose the core
spring when removing the core/diaphragm
subassembly.
• Place the core spring with its wide end

first into the core when assembling the
solenoid. The closed end should protrude
from top of the core.
• Make sure the O- rings are properly placed

in their grooves before assembly.
6 1818120-02
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Media Fresh water, max. 10°dH
Media temperature Max. 85°C
Water pressure 200 – 600 kPa (2 – 6 bar)
Ambient temperature Max. 55 °C
Cable connection Pg11 (for cable Ø 9 – Ø 11)
Material
Body/bonnet Brass
Electrical data
Supply voltage 48 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 6 – 9 Watts
Enclosure IP 65
Mounting style Upright
Weight 2.8 kg
Ref. 1765927 Rev.4
1818120-02 7
4 Technical Data Solenoid Valve Block, Water
4.2 Dimensions
X019011A
Ref. 1765927 Rev.4
8 1818120-02
5 Spare Parts
X019001A
Ref. 1765993 Rev. 1
Item Qty Article No. Description Remarks

1765993-80 Spare parts repair Kit including
1 3 Retaining clip
2 1 Spring, Core
3 1 Core assembly
4 3 Washer, spring
5 3 O-ring, S.B.S.A
6 1 Piston assembly
7 1 Disc, drain valve
8 1 Non-return valve, complete
9 4 O-ring
10 1 O-ring
1765993-81 Spare parts Coil kit, including:
11 1 Coil, 24V, 50/60 Hz
12 1 Washer, Adhesive tape
13 1 Indicator
1765993-82 Spare parts Coil kit, including:
11 1 Coil, 48V, 50/60 Hz
12 1 Washer, Adhesive tape
13 1 Indicator
1818120-02 9
5 Spare Parts Solenoid Valve Block, Water
10 1818120-02
TECHNICAL SERVICE MANUAL SECTION TSM 340.1
EXTERNAL GEAR PUMPS PAGE 1 OF 11
SERIES SG-10, -14 ISSUE B
CONTENTS: MODEL NUMBER CHART:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
UNMOUNTED PUMP UNITS
Model Number System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 LIP SEAL MECH. SEAL
Special Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SG-1009-G0O SG-41009-G0O
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SG-1009-G0V SG-41009-G0V
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SG-1009-G1O SG-41009-G1O
Lip Seal Pumps - Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SG-1009-G1V SG-41009-G1V
Lip Seal Pumps - Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Mechanical Seal Pumps - Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . 7 SG-1013-G0O SG-41013-G0O
Mechanical Seal Pumps - Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SG-1013-G0V SG-41013-G0V
SG-1013-G1O SG-41013-G1O
Installation of Carbon Graphite Bushings . . . . . . . . . 8
SG-1013-G1V SG-41013-G1V Units are designated by
Pressure Relief Valve Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
the unmounted pump
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SG-1026-G0O SG-41026-G0O model numbers followed
Do’s and Don’ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SG-1026-G0V SG-41026-G0V by a letter(s) indicating
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 SG-1026-G1O SG-41026-G1O drive style.
SG-1026-G1V SG-41026-G1V
M = Motor, Face Mounted
SG-1420-G0O SG-41420-G0O D = Direct Drive
SG-1420-G0V SG-41420-G0V R = Viking Speed Reducer
SG-1420-G1O SG-41420-G1O P = Commercial Speed
SG-1420-G1V SG-41420-G1V Reducer
SG-1434-G0O SG-41434-G0O
SG-1434-G0V SG-41434-G0V
SG-1434-G1O SG-41434-G1O
SG-1434-G1V SG-41434-G1V
SG-1456-G0O SG-41456-G0O
SG-1456-G0V SG-41456-G0V
SG-1456-G1O SG-41456-G1O
INTRODUCTION: SG-1456-G1V SG-41456-G1V
The illustrations used in this manual are for identification
purposes only and cannot be used for ordering parts. Obtain
a parts list from the factory or a Viking representative. Always This manual deals only with Series SG-10 and SG-14
give the complete name of the part, part number and material External Gear Pumps. Refer to Figures 1 through 4 for
with the model number and serial number of the pump when general configuration and nomenclature used in this manual.
ordering repair parts. The unmounted pump or pump unit Pump specifications and recommendations are listed in
model number and serial number are on the nameplate. Catalog Section 341.
SG - 41013 - G 0 V U
Spur Gear Principle Pump Size Design Series Bracket:
M = Metric (ISO) Bracket
Shaft Seal: for IEC Motor Mount
Shaft Rotation:
Blank = Lipseal (-10,-14)
(Viewed from shaft end)
4 = Mechanical Seal U = SAE Bracket
0 = Clockwise
for NEMA Motor Mount
1 = Counter-Clockwise
(-10,-14)
Relief Valve:
O = Without Valve
V = With Valve
(Single Pumps only)
VIKING PUMP, INC. • A Unit of IDEX Corporation • Cedar Falls, IA 50613 USA
SAFETY INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
IMPROPER INSTALLATION, OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE OF PUMP MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH AND/OR RESULT IN DAMAGE TO PUMP AND/OR OTHER EQUIPMENT. VIKING’S WARRANTY
DOES NOT COVER FAILURE DUE TO IMPROPER INSTALLATION, OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE.
THIS INFORMATION MUST BE FULLY READ BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION, OPERATION OR

MAINTENANCE OF PUMP AND MUST BE KEPT WITH PUMP. PUMP MUST BE INSTALLED, OPERATED
AND MAINTAINED ONLY BY SUITABLY TRAINED AND QUALIFIED PERSONS.
THE FOLLOWING SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED AND ADHERED TO AT ALL TIMES.
Warning - In addition to possible serious

Symbol Danger - Failure to follow the indicated injury or death, failure to follow the
WARNING
Legend : ! instruction may result in serious injury
or death.
indicated instruction may cause damage
to pump and/or other equipment.
BEFORE opening any liquid chamber (pumping INSTALL pressure gauges/sensors next to the
WARNING
! chamber, reservoir, relief valve adjusting cap fitting,
etc.) be sure that :
pump suction and discharge connections to monitor
pressures.
● Any pressure in the chamber has been completely
vented through the suction or discharge lines or USE extreme caution when lifting the pump. Suitable
other appropriate openings or connections.
● The pump drive system means (motor, turbine,
! lifting devices should be used when appropriate. If
the pump is mounted on a base plate, the base plate
engine, etc.) has been “locked out” or otherwise WARNING must be used for all lifting purposes. If slings are used
been made non-operational so that it cannot be for lifting, they must be safely and securely attached.
started while work is being done on the pump. For weight of the pump alone (which does not include
the drive and/or base plate) refer to the Viking Pump
● You know what material the pump has been
product catalog.
handling, have obtained a material safety data
sheet (MSDS) for the material, and understand
and follow all precautions appropriate for the safe DO NOT attempt to dismantle a pressure relief valve
handling of the material. that has not had the spring pressure relieved or is
mounted on a pump that is operating.
BEFORE operating the pump, be sure all drive guards !
! are in place. AVOID contact with hot areas of the pump and/or
drive. Certain operating conditions, temperature
control devices (jackets, heat-tracing, etc.), improper
DO NOT operate pump if the suction or discharge
! piping is not connected. ! installation, improper operation, and improper
maintenance can all cause high temperatures on the
pump and/or drive.
DO NOT place fingers into the pumping chamber or
! its connection ports or into any part of the drive train
if there is any possibility of the pump shafts being
THE PUMP must be provided with pressure protection.
This may be provided through a relief valve mounted
rotated.
directly on the pump, an in-line pressure relief valve,
DO NOT exceed the pumps rated pressure, speed, and

! a torque limiting device, or a rupture disk. If pump
rotation may be reversed during operation, pressure
! temperature, or change the system/duty parameters
from those the pump was originally supplied, without
WARNING protection must be provided on both sides of pump.
Relief valve adjusting screw caps must always point
WARNING confirming its suitability for the new service. towards suction side of the pump. If pump rotation is
reversed, position of the relief valve must be changed.
Pressure relief valves cannot be used to control pump
BEFORE operating the pump, be sure that:
flow or regulate discharge pressure. For additional
! ● It is clean and free from debris information, refer to Viking Pump’s Technical Service
● all valves in the suction and discharge pipelines Manual TSM 000 and Engineering Service Bulletin
WARNING
are fully opened. ESB-31.
● All piping connected to the pump is fully supported
and correctly aligned with the pump. THE PUMP must be installed in a matter that allows
● Pump rotation is correct for the desired direction safe access for routine maintenance and for inspection
of flow. during operation to check for leakage and monitor
! pump operation.
WARNING
SECTION TSM 340.1 ISSUE B PAGE 2 OF 11

SPECIAL INFORMATION: For additional information on pressure relief valves, refer to
Technical Service Manual TSM000 and Engineering Service
Bulletin ESB-31.
DANGER ! MOUNTING:
1. Surfaces pump mounts against must be clean and flat.
Before opening any Viking pump liquid cham- 2. For NEMA Mount, use SAE Grade 5 or better capscrews
ber (pumping chamber, reservoir, relief valve to mount pump.
adjusting cap fitting etc.) Be sure:
For IEC Mount, use Class 8.8 or better capscrews to
mount pump.
1. That any pressure in the chamber has been
completely vented through the suction or 3. Standard SG Series pumps are designed to be used
with jaw type couplings that do not induce axial thrust on
discharge lines or other appropriate openings
the pump shaft. If an improper type of coupling is used,
or connections. internal damage may result.
2. That the driving means (motor, turbine, 4. Do not strike or press the pump drive coupling to install.
Internal pump damage will result. If the coupling does not
engine, etc.) has been “locked out” or made
slide onto the shaft, inspect the coupling, shaft and key for
non- operational so that it cannot be started nicks or burrs and remove.
while work is being done on pump.
5. If the pump is to be belt or gear driven, the overhung load
option must be specified.
3. That you know what liquid the pump has been
handling and the precautions necessary to 6. Once the pump has been mounted and the coupling
safely handle the liquid. Obtain a material installed, it is recommended to put lube oil into the suction
port and turn the pump by hand to make sure it turns freely.
safety data sheet (MSDS) for the liquid to be
sure these precautions are understood. ALIGNMENT:
Check alignment after mounting.
Failure to follow above listed precautionary 1. If unit has flexible coupling, remove any coupling guards or
measures may result in serious injury or death. covers and check alignment of coupling halves. A straight
edge (piece of key stock will work) across coupling must
rest evenly on both rims at top, bottom and sides. See
INSTALLATION: Figure 1.
GENERAL:
The following items must be considered prior to pump DANGER!
installation:
Before starting the pump, be sure all drive
1. Location - locate the pump as close as possible to equipment guards are in place.
supply of liquid being pumped. If possible locate pump
below liquid supply. Viking pumps are self-priming; but, Failure to properly mount guards may result in
the better the suction conditions the better the pump will serious injury or death.
perform.
2. Accessibility - pump must be accessible for inspection,
maintenance and repair. 2. Make final check on alignment after piping is hooked up.
3. Suction/Discharge - SG Series pumps are designed for

clockwise rotation as standard (viewed from end of shaft).
USE STRAIGHT EDGE. THESE
ROTATION: Viking external gear pumps can be offered in SURFACES MUST BE PARALLEL.
a clockwise (-G0) or counter clockwise (-G1) rotation. The
intended rotation and inlet / outlet port positions are noted on
the pump nameplate. Do not run the pump in reverse, or the
seal will be exposed to full discharge pressure.
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES:
1. Viking pumps are positive placement pumps and must be
provided with some sort of pressure protection. This may
be a relief valve mounted directly on the pump, an inline
pressure relief valve, a torque limiting device or a rupture CHECK WIDTH BETWEEN THESE SURFACES WITH INSIDE
disk. CALIPERS OR FEELER GAUGE TO BE CERTAIN THE FACES
ARE EQUAL DISTANCE APART AND PARALLEL.
2. Relief valve adjusting screw cap must always point
towards suction side of pump. FIGURE 1
3. Pressure relief valves cannot be used to control pump
flow or regulate discharge pressure.

PIPING/HOSE: START UP:
The cause of many pumping problems can be traced to Before pushing “start” button, check the following:
suction piping. It should always be as large in diameter and
1. Vacuum and pressure gauges (liquid filled) are mounted
as short in length as possible.
on or near the pump. Gauges are the quickest and most
Before starting layout and installation of your piping system, accurate way of finding out what is happening in the
consider the following points: pump.
1. Never use piping smaller than pump port connections. 2. Pump is correctly aligned.
Piping larger in diameter than the port connection is
3. There is no pipe strain on the pump casing.
sometimes required to reduce suction losses.
4. Rotate the pump shaft by hand to be sure it turns freely.
2. Be sure the inside of pipe is clean before installing.
5. Motor has been jogged and is running in the correct
3. When approaching an obstacle to the suction line, go
direction. Refer to “Installation, General” on page 3.
around instead of over it. Going over an obstacle can
create an air pocket. Where practical, slope the piping so 6. Pressure relief valve is installed properly.
no air or liquid pockets will be formed. Air pockets in the 7. Suction piping is connected and tight, and valves are
suction line make it hard for the pump to prime. open.
4. A strainer on the suction side of the pump should always 8. Make sure the discharge piping is properly connected and
be considered in any pumping system. The strainer will sealed, valves are open, and there is a place for the liquid
keep foreign matter from entering the pump. The strainer to go.
mesh or perforation size should be large enough so that it
does not cause excessive pressure drop, but fine enough 9. Make sure all guards are in place.
to protect the pump. Use of a strainer is particularly 10. The above checklist is a general guideline to be used prior
important at start up to help clean the system of weld to starting the pump. Since Viking Pump cannot foresee
beads, pipe scale and other foreign objects. every application for our product and possible system
5. A pressure relief valve is required in the discharge line. design, the final responsibility is with the user. The pump
See “Installation, General” page 3. must be utilized within the catalog specifications and the
pump system must be designed to provide safe working
6. The pump must not be used to support the piping. conditions.
Hangers, supports, stands, etc. must carry the weight of
the pipes. The “start” button may now be pushed.
7. When fastening piping to the pump do not impose any The pump should begin to deliver liquid within 15 seconds! If
strain on the pump casing. not, push the stop button. Do not run the pump without liquid
flow longer than 30 seconds or the pump may be ruined.
“Springing” or “drawing” the piping up to the pump will
cause distortion, possible misalignment and probable Review Startup steps 1 through 10. Consider what the suction
rapid wear of the pump. Do not use the pump to correct and discharge gauges may indicate. If everything appears in
errors in piping layout or assembly. order, re-prime pump. Refer to “Mounting”, page 3.
8. All joints of piping system must be tight; liquid thread Push the “start” button. If nothing is flowing within 30 seconds,
sealant will help assure leak free threaded joints. Loose stop the pump. The pump is not a compressor, it will not build
joints result in liquid leaks or suction side leaks. Air leaks up much air pressure. It may be necessary to vent discharge
make the pump noisy and reduce flow. line until liquid begins to flow.
CAUTION: Be careful not to over tighten fittings as If pump still does not deliver, consider one or more of
this can cause cracked joints. Do not use PTFE tape. the following:
Reduced friction makes over tightening very easy and 1. The suction line has air leaks.
will result in cracked ports. Leaks in the suction line can
2. The end of the suction pipe is not submerged deeply
permit air to be drawn in, and will cause a noisy pump and
enough in the liquid.
reduction in capacity.
3. The suction lift is too great or the suction piping is too
9. Drive alignment must be checked after piping is hooked
small.
up.
4. Liquid is vaporizing in the suction line before it gets to the
10. Provide a pressure relief device in any part of a pump
pump.
and piping system that can be valved off and, thus,
completely isolated. A rise in temperature will cause a If after consideration of these points, the pump still does not
liquid to expand. If there is no provision for pressure relief deliver liquid, review all points given under START UP and
in the closed off section, there is a chance that the pump read through the TROUBLESHOOTING guide and try again.
or piping will rupture. If pump still will not deliver liquid, contact your Viking Pump
supplier.
DANGER!
Before starting the pump, be sure all drive MAINTENANCE:
equipment guards are in place. Series SG-10 and SG-14 pumps are designed for long,
Failure to properly mount guards may result trouble-free service life under a wide variety of application
conditions with a minimum of maintenance. The points listed
in serious injury or death.
below will help provide long service life.
CLEANING PUMP: Keep pump as clean as possible. This external gear pumps. These tools are in addition to standard
will facilitate inspection, adjustment and repair work. mechanics’ tools such as open-end wrenches, pliers,
screwdrivers, etc. Most of the items can be obtained from an
STORAGE: If pump is to be stored, or not used for six months
industrial supply house or automobile tool supplier.
or more, pump must be drained and a coat of light oil must be
applied to all internal pump parts. Viking suggests rotating 1. Soft headed hammer
pump shaft by hand one complete revolution every 30 days 2. Snap ring pliers
to circulate the oil. Tighten all pump assembly bolts before
putting pump in service after being stored. 3. Arbor press
SUGGESTED REPAIR TOOLS: The following tools must 4. Blind bearing puller set
be available to properly repair series SG-10 and SG-14
19
16
LIP SEAL PUMPS 15
14 13
17 12
11
3
20
2
8
4
ITEM NAME OF PART ITEM NAME OF PART ITEM NAME OF PART

2 Bracket 12 Drive Shaft 17 Alignment Pins (2 Required)
3 Bearings (4 Required) 13 Driven Shaft 19 Casing
4 Internal Snap Ring 14 Crescent Snap Rings (4 Required) 20 Capscrews (4 Required)
8 Lip Seal 15 Gear Pins (2 Required)
11 O-ring for Casing 16 Gears (2 Required)
FIGURE 2
EXPLODED VIEW – MODELS SG-10 AND SG-14 LIP SEAL PUMPS
DANGER !
Before opening any Viking pump liquid non- operational so that it cannot be started
chamber (pumping chamber, reservoir, relief while work is being done on pump.
valve adjusting cap fitting etc.) Be sure: 3. That you know what liquid the pump has been
1. That any pressure in chamber has been handling and the precautions necessary to
completely vented through suction or safely handle the liquid. Obtain a material
discharge lines or other appropriate safety data sheet (MSDS) for the liquid to be
openings or connections. sure these precautions are understood.
2. That the driving means (motor, turbine, Failure to follow above listed precautionary
engine, etc.) has been “locked out” or made measures may result in serious injury or death.
DISASSEMBLY: insure proper reassembly. Remove the capscrews (20) to

separate bracket from pump casing. It may be necessary
1. Remove pump from motor or other drive equipment. If to tap on the ears of the bracket (where capscrews are
the pump is mounted using the footed bracket (B-mount), located) with a soft headed hammer to separate the
remove the footed bracket so the pump is flat on the work bracket from the casing.
surface.
4. Inspect casing o-ring (11). Replace as needed.
2. Refer to Figure 2 for the names of parts.
5. Remove driven (13) and drive (12) shaft and gear
3. Mark bracket (2) and casing (19) before disassembly to assemblies from pump.

6. To remove the gears (16) from the shafts, remove both 3. Assemble the shaft / gear assemblies. Install one snap
snap rings (14) from both sides of the gear. The gears ring (14) onto the shaft. Place the gear pin into its groove
should then slide freely off the shaft. NOTE: There is a on the shaft. Slide the gear over the pin and lock into place
small pin (15) located under the gear which can fall out of using the second snap ring. NOTE: Proper snap ring
its groove when the gears are removed. orientation can be seen in Figure 2. The gear pin blocks
the flow path along the gear ID in one of the grooves.
7. Inspect the gears and shafts for wear. Replace as needed.
Make sure the snap rings do not block the other.
8. Remove the internal snap ring (4) and lip seal (8) from the
4. Coat shaft / gear assemblies with light oil. Place both
bracket.
shafts in the casing with the drive shaft (longer shaft) on
9. Inspect the bearings or bushings (3). If the bearings or the top (nameplate side).
bushings need to be replaced:
5. Lubricate the casing O-ring using a compatible lubricant
Remove the bearings from the bracket and casing using a and place it in the groove of the casing.
Blind Bearing Puller. To remove carbon graphite or silicon
6. Slide the pump bracket over the gear and shaft assemblies
carbide bushings, use a cold chisel or punch to break the
until flush with the casing.
bushing. Be careful not to damage the bore.
7. Place the capscrews into the bracket and tighten evenly.
ASSEMBLY:
MODELS RECOMMENDED CAPSCREW TORQUE
1. Be sure to clean the bracket and casing thoroughly. If the
bearings were removed, install new pump bearings into SG-10 / SG-410 80 ft. lbs. (110 Nm)
each bore using an arbor press. If carbon graphite, Refer SG-14 / SG-414 100 ft. lbs. (140 Nm)
to “Installation of Carbon Graphite Bushings” below.
MODELS BEARING PRESS DEPTH DANGER!

SG-10 / SG-410 0.060” - 0.080” (1.5 - 2 mm)
Before starting the pump, be sure all drive
SG-14 / SG-414 0.070” - 0.090” (1.8 - 2.3 mm)
equipment guards are in place.
2. Press the lip seal into the pump bracket using an arbor Failure to properly mount guards may result in
press and install snap ring. serious injury or death.
MECHANICAL SEAL PUMPS 19
16
15
14
13
12
11
17
3
20
2
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
ITEM NAME OF PART ITEM NAME OF PART ITEM NAME OF PART

2 Bracket 8 Lip Seal 14 Crescent Snap Rings (4 Required)
3 Bearings (4 Required) 9 Spacer 15 Gear Pins (2 Required)
4 Internal Snap Ring 10 External Snap Ring 16 Gears (2 Required)
5 Outboard Bearing 11 O-ring for Casing 17 Alignment Pins (2 Required)
6 Seal Holder 12 Drive Shaft 19 Casing
7 O-ring for Seal Holder 13 Driven Shaft 20 Capscrews (4 Required)
FIGURE 3
EXPLODED VIEW – MODELS SG-410 AND SG-414 MECHANICAL SEAL PUMPS

11. Inspect the bearings or bushings (3). If the bearings or
bushings need to be replaced:
DANGER !
Remove the bearings from the bracket and casing using a
Before opening any Viking pump liquid cham- Blind Bearing Puller. To remove carbon graphite or silicon
carbide bushings, use a cold chisel or punch to break the
ber (pumping chamber, reservoir, relief valve
bushing. Be careful not to damage the bore.
adjusting cap fitting etc.) Be sure:
1. That any pressure in the chamber has been ASSEMBLY:

completely vented through the suction or 1. Be sure to clean the bracket and casing thoroughly. If the
discharge lines or other appropriate openings bearings were removed, install new pump bearings into
or connections. each bore using an arbor press. If carbon graphite, Refer
to “Installation of Carbon Graphite Bushings” below.
2. That the driving means (motor, turbine,
engine, etc.) has been “locked out” or made MODELS BEARING PRESS DEPTH
non- operational so that it cannot be started SG-10 / SG-410 0.060” - 0.080” (1.5 - 2 mm)
while work is being done on pump. SG-14 / SG-414 0.070” - 0.090” (1.8 - 2.3 mm)
3. That you know what liquid the pump has been 2. Coat the drive shaft with light oil and place the drive gear
handling and the precautions necessary to into the bracket (into through hole) with the snap ring on
the drive side of the bracket.
safely handle the liquid. Obtain a material
safety data sheet (MSDS) for the liquid to be 3. Assemble the shaft / gear assemblies. Install one snap
sure these precautions are understood. ring (14) onto each shaft (the side closest to the bracket
for the drive shaft). Place the gear pin into its groove on
each shaft. Slide the gear for each shaft over the pin and
Failure to follow above listed precautionary
lock into place using the second snap ring. NOTE: Proper
measures may result in serious injury or death. snap ring orientation can be seen in Figure 2. The gear
pin blocks the flow path along the gear ID in one of the
gear grooves. Make sure the snap rings do not block the
DISASSEMBLY: other.
1. Remove pump from motor or other drive equipment. If 4. Coat the shaft / gear assemblies with light oil. Place the
the pump is mounted using the footed bracket (B-mount), driven shaft in the blind bracket hole.
remove the footed bracket so the pump is flat on the work 5. Lubricate the casing O-ring using a compatible lubricant
surface. and place it in the groove of the casing.
2. Refer to Figure 3 for the names of parts. 6. Slide the pump casing over the gear and shaft assemblies
3. Mark bracket (2) and casing (19) before disassembly to until flush with the bracket. Be sure the casing is oriented
insure proper reassembly. Remove the capscrews (20) to correctly.
separate bracket from pump casing. It may be necessary 7. Place the capscrews into the bracket and tighten evenly.
to tap on the ears of the bracket (where capscrews are
located) with a soft headed hammer to separate the MODELS RECOMMENDED CAPSCREW TORQUE
bracket from the casing.
SG-10 / SG-410 80 ft. lbs. (110 Nm)
4. Inspect casing o-ring (11). Replace as needed.
SG-14 / SG-414 100 ft. lbs. (140 Nm)
5. Remove driven shaft (13) and gear assembly from pump.
Leave drive shaft (12) and gear assembly in place. 8. At this point it may be easier to tip the pump onto the
casing (drive shaft pointing up). Slide the spacer (9) over
6. To remove the gears (16) from the shafts, remove both
the drive shaft until flush with the snap ring on the keyed
snap rings (14) from both sides of the gear. The gears
side of the shaft. The spacer sets the working length of
should then slide freely off the shaft.
the mechanical seal. Use the factory part if replacement
NOTE: There is a small pin (15) located under the gear is necessary.
which can fall out of its groove when the gears are
9. Place the new stationary seat of the mechanical seal in
removed.
the seal holder with the hard face oriented outwards. The
7. Inspect the gears and shafts for wear. Replace as face must be kept clean of any contaminants.
needed.
10. Check to be sure the drive shaft is free of any burrs,
8. Remove the internal snap ring (4) from the bracket. particularly in the keyway. Lightly lubricate the ID of the
9. Using a soft headed hammer tap the drive shaft, on the elastomeric bellows on the rotating part of the mechanical
gear-side, through the bracket. seal and the area on the shaft where it will be located.
Once the bellows has been lubricated the pump must be
10. Remove the bearing (5), seal holder (6) and mechanical assembled in approximately 5 minutes. Carefully slide the
seal (8) from the shaft. Replace the bearing mechanical rotating part of the seal onto the shaft until it contacts the
seal and o-ring (7). The spacer (9) sets the working length spacer. The flat carbon face must be facing the keyway
of the mechanical seal. Use the factory part if replacement and be kept clean of any contaminants.
is necessary.
11. Slide the seal holder (seal seat facing rotating face) over
the shaft and into the bracket until it contacts the rotating DANGER !
face. Be careful that the o-ring does not get damaged
during installation.
Before opening any Viking pump liquid
chamber (pumping chamber, reservoir, relief
12. Slide the outboard bearing over the shaft until it contacts valve adjusting cap fitting etc.) Be sure:
the seal holder.
1. That any pressure in chamber has been
13. Force will need to be exerted on the bearing to overcome
the seal spring force in order to install the internal snap completely vented through suction or
ring. Install the internal snap ring. discharge lines or other appropriate
openings or connections.
2. That the driving means (motor, turbine,
DANGER! engine, etc.) has been “locked out” or made
Before starting the pump, be sure all drive non- operational so that it cannot be started
equipment guards are in place. while work is being done on pump.
Failure to properly mount guards may result in 3. That you know what liquid the pump has been
serious injury or death. handling and the precautions necessary to
safely handle the liquid. Obtain a material
safety data sheet (MSDS) for the liquid to be
INSTALLATION OF CARBON sure these precautions are understood.
GRAPHITE BUSHINGS: Failure to follow above listed precautionary
measures may result in serious injury or death.
When installing carbon graphite bushings, extreme care must
be taken to prevent breaking. Carbon graphite is a brittle
material and is easily cracked. If cracked, the bushing will
quickly disintegrate. Using a lubricant and adding a chamfer PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
on the bushing and the mating part will help in installation.
The additional precautions listed below must be followed for
INSTRUCTIONS:
proper installation.
1. A press must be used for installation.
2. Be certain bushing is started straight.
3. Do not stop pressing operation until bushing is in proper
position. Starting and stopping will result in a cracked
bushing.
4. Check bushing for cracks after installation.
Carbon graphite bushings with extra interference fits are
frequently furnished for high temperature operation. These
bushings must be installed by a shrink fit.
1. Heat bracket for idler to 750ºF.
2. Install cool bushing with a press.
3. If facilities are not available to reach 750ºF. temperature, VALVE - LIST OF PARTS
it is possible to install with 450ºF. temperature; however 1. Valve Cap 6. Valve Body
the lower the temperature the greater the possibility of 2. Adjusting Screw 7. Valve Spring
cracking the bushing.
3. Lock Nut 8. Poppet
Consult factory with specific questions on high temperature 4. Spring Guide 9. Cap Gasket
applications.
5. Bonnet
FIGURE 4

DANGER !
Before opening any Viking pump liquid non- operational so that it cannot be started
chamber (pumping chamber, reservoir, relief while work is being done on pump.
valve adjusting cap fitting etc.) Be sure: 3. That you know what liquid the pump has been
1. That any pressure in chamber has been handling and the precautions necessary to
completely vented through suction or safely handle the liquid. Obtain a material
discharge lines or other appropriate safety data sheet (MSDS) for the liquid to be
openings or connections. sure these precautions are understood.
2. That the driving means (motor, turbine, Failure to follow above listed precautionary
engine, etc.) has been “locked out” or made measures may result in serious injury or death.
DISASSEMBLY – RELIEF VALVE: VACUUM GAUGE - SUCTION PORT:

Mark the valve and head before disassembly to ensure High vacuum reading would indicate:
proper reassembly. 1. The suction line is blocked, valve closed, a strainer is
1. Remove the valve cap. plugged or a pinched suction line.
2. Measure and record the length of extension of the 2. The suction line is too small.
adjusting screw. Refer to “A” on Figure 4. 3. The liquid is too viscous to flow through the piping.
3. Loosen the locknut and back out the adjusting screw until 4. The lift required is too high.
spring pressure is released.
Low reading would indicate:
4. Remove the bonnet, spring guide, spring and poppet from
the valve body. Clean and inspect all parts for wear or 1. There may be an air leak in the suction line.
damage and replace as necessary. 2. The end of the pipe is not in the liquid.
3. The pump is worn.
ASSEMBLY – RELIEF VALVE:
4. The pump is dry and should be primed.
Reverse the procedures outlined under DISASSEMBLY –
RELIEF VALVE. If the valve is removed for repairs, be sure Fluttery, jumping or erratic reading would indicate:
to replace in the original position. The relief valve adjusting 1. The liquid is vaporizing.
screw cap must always point towards the suction side of
2. Liquid is coming in to the pump in slugs, possibly an air
the pump. If the pump rotation is reversed, remove the relief
leak or insufficient liquid above the end of the suction
valve and turn end for end.
pipe.
PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT: 3. Vibration from cavitation, misalignment, or damaged parts.
If a new spring is installed or if pressure setting of pressure PRESSURE GAUGE - DISCHARGE PORT:
relief valve is to be changed from that which the factory has High reading would indicate:
set, the following instructions must be carefully followed.
1. High viscosity and small diameter and/or lengthy
1. Carefully remove valve cap which covers adjusting screw. discharge line.
Loosen locknut which locks adjusting screw so pressure 2. A downstream strainer or filter is plugged.
setting will not change during operation of pump.
3. The pressure relief valve is set too high.
2. Install a pressure gauge in discharge line for actual
4. Valve in the discharge line partially closed.
adjusting operation.
5. Line partially plugged from build up on inside of pump,
3. Turn adjusting screw in to increase pressure and out to
solidified product or foreign object.
decrease pressure.
6. Liquid in the pipe not up to temperature.
4. With discharge line closed at point beyond pressure
gauge, gauge will show maximum pressure valve will Low reading would indicate:
allow while pump is in operation. 1. Pressure relief valve set too low.
2. Pressure relief valve poppet not seating properly.
TROUBLESHOOTING:
3. Pump assembly bolts not torqued to specifications.
A Viking pump that is properly installed and maintained will
give long satisfactory performance. 4. The bypass around pump partially open.
If trouble does develop, one of the first steps toward finding 5. Pump is damaged or worn.
the difficulty is to install a vacuum gauge in the suction line 6. The pump has too much internal clearance.
and a pressure gauge in the discharge line. Readings on
these gauges often give a clue on where to start looking for
trouble.

Fluttery, jumping or erratic reading would indicate: Pump takes too much power (stalls motor):
1. Cavitation. 1. Liquid is more viscous than the is unit sized to handle.
2. Liquid is coming to the pump in slugs. 2. The system pressure relief valve set too high.
3. Air leak in the suction line. 3. The pump is misaligned.
4. Vibrating from misalignment or mechanical problems.
MISCELLANEOUS:
DO’S AND DON’TS:
Do’s and Don’ts for installation, operation and maintenance
Pump does not pump: of Viking pumps to assure safe, long, trouble free operation.
1. The pump has lost its prime from air leak or low level in Installation:
tank.
1. DO install the pump as close to supply tank as possible.
2. The suction lift is too high.
2. DO leave working space around the pumping unit.
3. Rotating in the wrong direction.
3. DO use large, short and straight suction port.
4. The motor does not come up to speed.
4. DO install a strainer in the suction line.
5. The strainer is clogged.
5. DO a double check of alignment after unit is mounted
6. The bypass valve is open, pressure relief valve set too and piping is hooked up.
low or pressure relief valve poppet stuck open.
6. DO provide pressure relief valve for discharge side of
7. The pump is worn out. pump.
8. Any changes in liquid, system or operation that would 7. DO check for proper rotation.
help explain the trouble, e.g. new liquid, additional lines
or process changes. 8. DO use piping, hose and fittings rated for maximum
system pressure.
Pump starts, then loses its prime:
Operation:
1. The supply tank is empty.
1. DON’T run the pump at speeds faster than 1800 RPM.
2. The liquid is vaporizing in the suction line.
2. DON’T allow the pump to develop pressure higher than
3. There is an air leak or air pockets in the suction line. those shown in catalog at that size.
4. The pump is worn out. 3. DON’T operate pumps at temperatures above or below
Pump is noisy: limits shown in catalog for model.
1. The pump is cavitating (liquid vaporizing in suction line) 4. DON’T operate unit without all guards in place.
or being starved (heavy liquid cannot get to pump fast 5. DON’T operate pump without pressure relief valve in
enough). Increase the suction pipe size and/or reduce discharge piping; be sure valve is mounted and set
the length, or decrease the pump speed. If the pump is correctly.
above the liquid, raise the liquid level closer to the center
line of the inlet port. If the liquid is above the pump, 6. DON’T stick fingers in ports of pump!!! Fingers may be
increase the head of the liquid. pinched between gears.
2. Check alignment. 7. DON’T work on the pump unless driver has been “locked
out” so it cannot be started while work is being done on
3. Anchor the base or piping to eliminate vibration. the pump.
Pump not delivering up to capacity: Maintenance:
1. The pump is starving or cavitating – see Pump is noisy, 1. DO record pump model number and serial number and
item 1. file for further use.
2. The strainer partially clogged. 2. DO have spare parts, pump or stand by units available,
3. Air leak somewhere in the suction line. particularly if pump is essential part of key operation
process.
4. Running too slow. Is the motor the correct speed and
wired up correctly? 3. DO obtain, read and keep all maintenance instructions
furnished with this pump.
5. Pressure relief valve is set too low, stuck open or has
damaged poppet seat.
6. The bypass line around the pump partially opened.
IMPORTANT:
In ordering parts for pressure relief valve, always give
7. The pump is worn out. model number and serial number of pump as it appears on
nameplate and name of part wanted. When ordering springs,
be sure to give pressure setting desired.

TECHNICAL SERVICE MANUAL SECTION TSM 340.1
EXTERNAL GEAR PUMPS PAGE 11 OF 11
SERIES SG-10, -14 ISSUE B
WARRANTY
Viking warrants all products manufactured by it to
be free from defects in workmanship or material for a
period of one (1) year from date of startup, provided
that in no event shall this warranty extend more than
eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment from
Viking. If, during said warranty period, any products
sold by Viking prove to be defective in workmanship
or material under normal use and service, and if such
products are returned to Viking’s factory at Cedar
Falls, Iowa, transportation charges prepaid, and if
the products are found by Viking to be defective in
workmanship or material, they will be replaced or
repaired free of charge, FOB. Cedar Falls, Iowa.
Viking assumes no liability for consequential
damages of any kind and the purchaser by acceptance
of delivery assumes all liability for the consequences of
the use or misuse of Viking products by the purchaser,
his employees or others. Viking will assume no field
expense for service or parts unless authorized by it in
advance.
Equipment and accessories purchased by Viking
from outside sources which are incorporated into any
Viking product are warranted only to the extent of and
by the original manufacturer’s warranty or guarantee,
if any.
THIS IS VIKING’S SOLE WARRANTY AND IS IN
LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, WHICH ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED,
INCLUDING IN PARTICULAR ALL WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. No officer or employee of
IDEX Corporation or Viking Pump, Inc. is authorized to
alter this warranty.
VIKING PUMP, INC. • A Unit of IDEX Corporation • Cedar Falls, IA 50613 USA
© 2/2010 Viking Pump Inc.
All rights reserved
SECTION 9
Spare Parts Catalog
A) Recommended Spare Parts List
B) Centrifuge
C) Centrifuge Ancillary Equipment
D) Sludge Removal Kit
3 x P 636 Commissioning spares
Item Description P/N Qty. Ea Total

1 Commissioning Kit 576452‐10 3 9
2 PA 636 Inspection Kit 563859‐02 3 9
3 Filter Cartage, 5 micron ‐ CUNO 99157950 1 1
3 x P 636 Two (2) year operation spares

1 PA 636 Inspection Kit 563859‐02 6 18
2 PA 636 Overhaul Kit (60Hz) 563869‐08 1 3
3 Friction block (60Hz) 564075‐80 3 9
4 Valve block, repair Kit 1765993‐80 1 3
5 Valve block, Coil repair Kit 1765993‐81 1 3
6 Connection Hose, Oil 1762012 80 2 6
7 Rectangular ring 546229 59 4 12
8 Connection Hose, Water 1765936 02 1 3
9 Flexible connection, Water 1765937 01 1 3
10 Lubrication oil (4 lit) 567334‐02 2 6
11 Pressure transmitter (‐1/+5 BAR) 574840 01 1 3
12 Washer (PT) 53551716 02 2 6
13 Filter Cartage, 5 micron ‐ CUNO 99157950 8 8
14 Pump ‐ seal 2‐478‐239‐999‐00 1 3
15 Pump ‐ seal washer 2‐487‐298‐375‐00 1 3
16 Pump ‐ seal ret. Ring 2‐556‐053‐375‐00 1 3
17 Pump ‐ o‐ring 2‐512‐050‐867‐00 1 3
Critical Insurance spares (optional)
1 A/B Analog Input Card 1769‐IF8 1 1
2 A/B Analog Output Card 1769‐OF8C 1 1
3 A/B Power Input Card, Compact Logix 1768‐PB3 1 1
.
Spare parts catalogue, Reservdelskatalog, Ersatzteilkatalog, Catalogue de piéces de rechange, Varaosaluettelo,

Catalogue de piezas de recambio, Каталог запасных частеи, Catalogo parti di ricambio, Reservedelskatalog,
Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes, Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων, Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
P 636
Specification No. 881202-08-01/0

Book No. 592740 02 Rev. 4
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2011-11-15

Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 6
1.2 Translation list 9
2 Machine bottom part 12

2.1 Driving device vertical 14
3 Separator bowl 16
4 Inlet and outlet device 20
5 Belt driving device 22

5.1 Centrifugal clutch 24
6 Set of plates 26
7 Speed sensor kit 28
8 Monitoring kit 30
9 Cover interlocking kit 32
10 Junction box kit 34
11 Set of tools 36
11.1Hydraulic tool kit 38
12 Inspection kit 44
13 Overhaul kit 46
14 Support kit 48
3
15 Lifting tool 50
16 Tool box 52
17 Cross reference list 54
4
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
Check the machine unit number on the name-plate before using this catalogue
Kontrollera maskinenhetens nummer på maskinskylten innan du använder katalogen
Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer
La plaque de la machine, un guide pour trouver le numéro de piéce de rechange correct
La placa-marca de la máquina - guía del número correcto del repuesto
Фирменная табличка машины — указатель правилного номера запасной части
La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi
La placa do fabricante da máquina - um guia do número correto das partes sobressalentes
Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon
Η πινακίδα της μηχανής είναι ο οδηγός του σωστού ανταλλακτικού
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer
Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer
5
P 636
1.1 General information
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of a separator equipped with non-original spare parts.
We guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.
Följ ditt kvalitetstänkande genom att endast använda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihåg att Alfa Laval inte tar något ansvar för fel på en
separator, som innehåller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar
kvaliteten och driftsäkerheten endast hos våra egna produkter.
Aus Rücksicht auf Ihr Bestreben um beste Qualität sollten Sie

nur Alfa Laval Originalersatzteile benutzen.
Vergessen Sie nicht, Alfa Laval kann keine Verantwortung für
das Versagen eines Separators übernehmen, der nicht mit
Originalersatzteilen versehen ist. Wir garantieren Qualität und
Zuverlässigkeit unserer Produkte.
Préservez la qualité de vos équipments en n‘employant que des

pièces de rechange Alfa Laval.
N’oubliez pas q’Alfa Laval décline toute responsabilité en cas
de panne d’un séparateur non équipé de pièces de rechange
d’origine. Nous garantissons la qualité et la fiabilité de nos
produits.
Mantenga su compromiso con la calidad, al usar siempre piezas

de repuesto Alfa Laval auténticas.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta responsabilidad por el
fallo de una separadora equipada con piezas de repuesto no
originales. Garantizamos la calidad y fiabilidad de nuestros
productos.
6
1.1 General information 1 Read this first
Гарантируйте надежность качества всегда используя

подлинные запасные части фирмы Alfa Laval.
Запомните, что Alfa Laval не несет ответственности за
повреждение сепаратора, оснащенного неподлинными
запчастами. Мы гарантируем качестьо и надежность наших
изделий.
Salvaguardate la vostra garanzia di qualità facendo sempre uso

di parti di ricambio Alfa Laval autentiche.
Tenete presente che la Alfa Laval non può accettare
responsabilità per avaria ad un separatore attrezzato con parti
di ricambio non originali. Noi garantiamo la qualità l’affidabilità
dei nostri prodotti.
Proteja o seu cometimento a qualidade usando sempre peças

sobressalentes genuinas Alfa Laval.
Não esqueça que Alfa Laval não aceita responsabilidade por
falha de uma separadora equipada com peças sobressalentes
não genuinas. Nós garantimos a qualidade e a confiança dos
nossos produtos.
Varmistakaa vastuunne laadusta käyttämällä aina alkuperäisiä

Alfa Laval varaosia.
Muistakaa, Alfa Laval ei voi hyväksyä vastuuta ei-alkuperäsillä
varaosilla varustetun separaattorin vaurioista. Me takaamme
tuotteidemme laadun ja käyttövarmuuden.
Εξασφαλίοτε υψηλή ποιότητα χρησιμοποιώντας μόνο γνήσια

ανταλλακτικά της Alfa Laval.
Έχετε υπόψην ότι η Alfa Laval δεν αναλαμβάνει καμμιά ευθύνη
για βλάβες βουτυρομηχανής, οτην οποία έχουν εφαρμοστεί μή
γνήσια ανταλλακτικά. Εγγυόμαστε ποιότητα και καλή λειτουργία
μόνο για τα δικά μας προϊόντα.
7
P 636
Streef naar een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik

uitsluitend originele Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen. Streef naar
een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik uitsluitend originele
Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen.
Vergeet niet dat Alfa Laval niet verantwoordelijk is voor een
defecte separator die niet-originele onderdelen bevat. Wij
garanderen de kwaliteit en betrouwbaarheid van onze eigen
produkten.
Hold Dem til den kvalitet, De har valgt at satse på, ved altid at
anvende ægte Alfa Laval reservedele.
Husk, at Alfa Laval ikke kan påtage sig noget ansvar for fejl
på en separator, som indeholder uoriginale dele. Vi kan kun
garantere kvalitet og driftsikkerhed på vore egne produkter.
8
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first
1.2 Translation list
Översättningslista
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
Part no. Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numéro de pièce Pieza No.
Qty Antal Anzahl Quantité Cantidad
Description Benämning Bezeichnung Dénomination Descripción
Notes Anmärkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de máquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numéro de produit Número de producto
Machine unit description Maskinblocksbenämning Bezeichnung des Dénomination de partie Descripción de sección de
Maschinenblocks de machine la máquina
Machine unit no. Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nº No. de sección de
máquina
Subassembly description Undergruppsbenämning Bezeichung der Dénomination de Descripción de

Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembly no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. Nº de sous-ensemble Número de subconjunto
See page Se sidan Siehe Seite Vòir page Véase la página
Fig. ref. Figurhänvisning Bildhinweise Réf. de fig. Referencia de figura
Product name Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Exchange necessitates Utbyte nödvändiggör Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

rebalancing of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der nécessite le rééquilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trommel du bol
See separate spare parts Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste séparée des Véase la lista de piezas
list Ersatzteilliste pièces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livré comme piéce de No se entrega como pieza
part reservdel geliefert rechange de recambio
9
P 636
Словарь перевда
Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradução
Käännösluttelo
Part no. Деталь № Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Qty Кол—во Quantita Quantidade Lukumäärä
Description Наименование Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
Notes Примечания Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type Машина тнпа Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. Артикул № Nr.prodotto No. do produto Tuotteen no
Machine unit description Наименование блока Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade da Koneenosan nimitys
машины macchina maquina
Machine unit no. Блок машины № Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no
maquina
Subassembly description Наименование группы Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhmän nimitys
Subassembly no. Группа № Nr. sottogruppo Número de subconjunto Alaryhmän no
See page См. страницу Vedi pagina Véase la página Ks sivu
Fig. ref. Ссылка на зскиз Rif. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviite
Product name Наименование артикула Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
Exchange necessitates Замена требует La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requiere el Vaihdettaessa kuula
rebalancing of bowl балансировки барабана la equilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapainoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare parts См. отдельный перечень Vedi lista separata delle Véase la lista de piezas Katso erillistä
list запасных частей parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
Not delivered as spare Не поставлена вместе с Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
part запасными частями ricambio de recambio
10
ΓΛΩΣΣΑΡΙ
Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste
Part no. Λριθμός ανταλλακτικού Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer
Qty Σύνολο Hoeveelheid Antal
Description Περιγραφή Beschrijving Betegnelse
Notes Παρατηρήσεις Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger
Machine type Τύπος μηχανήματος Machinetype Maskintype
Product no. Αριθμός προϊόντος Produktnr. Produktnr.
Machine unit description Περιγραφή συγκροτήματος Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse

μηχανής
Machine unit no. Αριθμός συγκροτήματος Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.

μηχανής
Subassembly description Περιγραφή υποσυγκροτήματος Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse
Subassembly no. Αριθμός υποσυγκροτήματος Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.
See page Βλέπε σελίδα Zie blz. Se side
Fig. ref. Παραπομπή σε εικόνα Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning
Product name Ονομασία προϊόντος Produktnaam Produktnavn
Exchange necessitates Ανταλλαγή απαιτεί Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever

rebalancing of bowl επαναρρύθμιση ισορροπίας herbalanceren van de kogel afbalcering af kuglen
του τύμπανου
See separate spare parts list Βλέπε ειδική λίστα Vervangning vereist van de Se spaat reservedelsliste
ανταλλακτικών kogel
Not delivered as spare part ∆εν παραδίδεται ως Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som reservedel
ανταλλακτικό reserveonderdeel
11
P 636
2 Machine bottom part

Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
572704-
Ref Part No Description -03 Notes
Quantity
1 562993 81 Frame bottom part 1
2 560131 02 Frame support 4
3 70490 Washer 4
4 2210462 32 Screw 4
5 552766 07 Washer 2
6 526350 04 Plug 1
7 565378 01 Plug 1
8 223404 05 O-ring 1
9 571743 80 Oil pin 1
10 590137 01 Bottom bearing holder 1
11 2234121 38 O-ring 1
12 562091 01 Strainer 1
13 589704 01 Pipe 1
14 221706 03 Screw 1
15 2234121 40 O-ring 1
16 562094 01 Labyrinth ring holder 1
17 562095 02 Labyrinth ring 1
18 223412 23 O-ring 1
19 221716 23 Screw 2
20 592493 80 Driving device vertical 1 See page 14
21 221721 24 Screw 3
22 571405 80 Neck bearing cover 1
22A 221711 18 Screw 1
23 223412 46 O-ring 1
24 566788 21 Seal ring 1
25 592072 01 Deflector ring 1
26 223406 28 O-ring 2
27 560202 01 Pipe 1
28 223404 20 O-ring 1
29 539418 02 Elbow 1
30 526352 06 Bushing 1
31 564493 02 Operating water cover 1
32 566788 05 Seal ring 1
33 223412 46 O-ring 1
34 41456 Washer 3
35 221040 46 Screw 3
36 221040 08 Screw 2
42 74067 O-ring 1
43 221716 23 Screw 1
44 578019 80 Front casing 1
44A 578017 02 Holder 1
44B 578019 01 Front casing 1
44C 221716 22 Screw 4
44D 221721 37 Screw 4
45 221126 04 Screw 1
47 223101 94 Washer 1
12
2 Machine bottom part
32 35
36 34
31
33
28
26
27
29 25
30 22
24 22A
23
21
20
19
16
18 A
17
13
15
14 10
5
7
11 9
12
8
41 5
6
42
43
4
3 45
47 44C
46
44D
44
1
44A
2
2120T
44B
13
P 636
2.1 Driving device vertical

592493-
Quantity
1 560134 01 Bowl spindle 1
2 548747 08 Ball bearing 1
3 584048 80 Top bearing seat 1
4 223642 36 Snap ring 1
5 580051 02 Top bearing housing 1
6 562109 03 Helical spring 3
7 562110 02 Composite spring 4
8 560406 01 Plug 4
10 548744 03 Self-align roller bearing 1
11 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 2
13 590138 01 Oil mist generator 1
14 571453 02 Fan 1
15 580049 01 Air deflector 1
16 221716 22 Screw 3
17 223406 30 O-ring 1
14
2.1 Driving device vertical 2 Machine bottom part
15
14
4
2
3
6
7
8
5
17
16
10
13
11
2275E
15
P 636
3 Separator bowl
592326-
Quantity
1 560634 80 Bowl body 1
1A 560637 01 Guide lug 1
1B 64416 Cylindrical pin 1
2 560638 01 Rectangular ring 1
3 560639 01 Operating slide 1
4 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 1
6 564478 01 Valve plug 3
7 565217 01 Holder 1
8 223403 61 O-ring 1
9 576173 01 Hexagon head screw 6
10 576279 01 Lock washer 6
11 223406 39 O-ring 1
12 579323 02 Operating water ring 1
13 566788 15 Seal ring 1
14 576173 01 Hexagon head screw 6
15 260104 05 O-ring 1
16 574226 01 Discharge slide 1
18 560649 01 Nut 1
19 578184 01 Cap nut 1
20 578220 80 Distributor 1
21 576884 02 Distributor support 1 Brass
21 576884 04 Distributor support 1 Alternative, Stainless steel
22 223406 23 O-ring 1
23 221716 16 Screw 4
24 223406 22 O-ring 1
25 591821 80 Bowl disc comlpete 8
26 590643 80 Bowl disc complete 73
27 590643 80 Bowl disc complete 2
28 563089 01 Bowl disc 1
29 576987 02 Level ring 1
29 576987 04 Level ring 1
31 223406 23 O-ring 1
32 576798 81 Top disc 1
33 223406 37 O-ring 1
34 223406 10 O-ring 1
35 576938 25 Gravity disc Ø 77,9 mm 1
36 576938 81 Set of gravity discs 1
36A 576938 27 Gravity disc Ø 89 mm 1
36B 576938 26 Gravity disc Ø 83 mm 1
36C 576938 24 Gravity disc Ø 73,6 mm 1
36D 576938 23 Gravity disc Ø 69,9 mm 1
36E 576938 22 Gravity disc Ø 66,8 mm 1
36F 576938 21 Gravity disc Ø 64,2 mm 1
36G 576938 20 Gravity disc Ø 62 mm 1
36H 576938 19 Gravity disc Ø 60,2 mm 1
36I 576938 18 Gravity disc Ø 58,7 mm 1
36J 576938 17 Gravity disc Ø 57,4 mm 1
36K 576938 16 Gravity disc Ø 56,1 mm 1
36L 576938 15 Gravity disc Ø 54,7 mm 1
36M 576938 14 Gravity disc Ø 53,2 mm 1
37 576938 01 Gravity disc Ø 40 mm 1 Clarifier disc
38 576932 01 Bowl hood 1
39 564403 01 Seal ring 1
40 260247 02 O-ring 1
16
3 Separator bowl
41 19
41A 18
38 16
39 17
40
35 15
36A-M 1A
34 37
33
32
1
28 1B
2
27
26 11
6
3
25
29
31 4
5
24
8
20 7
10
22
21 12
9
14
23 13
2119H
17
P 636

592326-
Quantity
41 560661 80 Lock ring 1
18
3 Separator bowl
41 19
41A 18
38 16
39 17
40
35 15
36A-M 1A
34 37
33
32
1
28 1B
2
27
26 11
6
3
25
29
31 4
5
24
8
20 7
10
22
21 12
9
14
23 13
2119H
19
P 636
4 Inlet and outlet device

576874-
Quantity
1 577024 81 Inlet and outlet pipe 1
2 223406 26 O-ring 1
3 588221 80 Frame hood 1
4 561957 01 Height adjusting ring 4
5 576933 01 Support ring 1
6 221716 09 Screw 4
7 521127 11 O-ring 1
8 41456 Washer 6
9 221040 05 Screw 6
10 223406 25 O-ring 1
11 223406 25 O-ring 1
12 576866 02 Connecting housing 1
13 223406 32 O-ring 1
14 552766 09 Washer 1
15 1763780 07 Nipple 1
16 1761834 09 Cu washer 1
17 1766162 01 Non return valve 1
18 567501 02 Nut 1
19 574625 02 Inlet bend 1
20 223406 16 O-ring 1
21 223642 22 Snap ring 1
22 588222 01 Safety device 1
23 221046 22 Screw 1
20
4 Inlet and outlet device
19
20
21
18
23
22
16 17
12 14
15
13 6
5
4
9
8
11
10
2
1
2121B
21
P 636
5 Belt driving device

561118-
Ref Part No Description -01 -02 Notes
Quantity
50 Hz ↓
60 Hz ↓
1 577705 80 Clutch cover 1 1
2 561114 01 Cover support 1 1
3 564095 80 Centrifugal clutch 1 See page 24
3 564095 81 Centrifugal clutch 1 See page 24
4 221045 60 Screw 1 1
5 223107 35 Spring washer 1 1
6 547837 01 Washer 1 1
7 221040 42 Screw 3 3
8 41456 Washer 3 3
9 221721 37 Screw 4 4
10 41456 Washer 8 8
11 221040 58 Screw 4 4
12 35120 Nut 4 4
13 563464 01 Flat belt 1
13 563467 01 Flat belt 1
22
5 Belt driving device
12
11
10
7
8
2
9
13
6
5
4
1
1524D
23
P 636
5.1 Centrifugal clutch

564095-
Quantity
50 Hz ↓
60 Hz ↓
1 560426 04 Motor belt pulley 1
2 548051 49 Ball bearing 2 2
3 547833 01 Spacing ring 1 1
4 66251 Snap ring 1 1
5 564089 80 Coupling hub 1
5 564100 80 Coupling hub 1
6 223641 18 Snap ring 1 1
8 564075 80 Friction block 5 3
9 549325 01 Cover 1 1
10 223641 20 Snap ring 1 1
24
5.1 Centrifugal clutch 5 Belt driving device
1523D
25
P 636
6 Set of plates
549572-
Quantity
3 1270019 Set of safety labels 1
4 577802 01 Name sign 1 For GL approval, see order
4 591263 01 Name sign 1 DNV approval, see order
5 66169 Drive screw 4
6 553171 01 Label 50 Hz 1
6 553272 01 Label 60 Hz 1
7 555529 01 Plate with arrow 1
8 1270001 Lifting instruction 1
9 554214 02 Cable tie 1
26
6 Set of plates
1 2 3,3A-S
4 5 6
50 Hz
60 Hz
7 8 9
1. 2.
GB FR
Read instruction manual before lifting. Lire le manuel dínstructions avant de lever le
séparateur.
DE
SE
Vor dem Heben immer erst Anleitungen im Hand-
buch lesen! Läs instruktionsboken före lyft.
IT NL
Prima di sollevare il separatore, leggere il ma- Vordat het produkt wordt opgetild, eerst de in-
nuale dístruzione. structihandleiding lezen.
ES PT
Leia o manual de instruções antes de uma

Lea el manual de instrucciones antes de levantar operaçõo de elevaçõo.
la separadora.
RU JP
a Ä qe hlpqoriuh lm.
Oeoednmdyekmk nomvhq
FI GR
Lue käyttöohjeet ennen nostamista. Diabaste to egceiridio me tiz odhgiez protou
Bgalete th suskeuh apo to kibwtio.
DK
Læsinstruktionsmanualen, inden separatoren

løftes op.
Art. No. 1270001 Rev. 2
2036D
27
P 636
7 Speed sensor kit
"Junction box kit" recommended

566718-
Quantity
1 562902 80 Sensor with support 1
3 552870 41 Tube gland, angle 90 degris 1
5 556416 11 Protective tube 1
8 221716 23 Screw 1
28
7 Speed sensor kit
1
8
2196C
29
P 636
8 Monitoring kit
Unbalance sensor

566727-
Quantity
1 570142 01 Inductive analogue sensor 1
4 552870 21 Tube gland, straight 1
30
8 Monitoring kit
2
1
6 4
1769B
31
P 636
9 Cover interlocking kit
"Junction box kit" required

570819-
Quantity
2 566054 01 Limit switch 1
32
9 Cover interlocking kit
1769C
33
P 636
10 Junction box kit
No more than one

566692-
Quantity
1 566692 01 Box 1
2 566682 01 Terminal row 1
3 221115 19 Screw 6
4 566687 80 Connector 1
7 552851 31 Stopping plug 2
9 17812 Screw 2
34
10 Junction box kit
5 9
1
3
2019B
35
P 636
11 Set of tools
561614-
Quantity
Without hydraulic tool for coupling ↓
With hydraulic tool for coupling ↓
1 561593 80 Puller 1 1 Spindle pulley/ Neck bearing
1A 561829 01 Screw 1 1
3 561369 02 Spanner for nut 1 1 Nut/ Discharge slide
4 575055 81 Compressing tool 1 1 Disc stack
4A 575055 80 Compressing tool 1 1
4B 575083 02 Clamp 3 3
4C 575098 01 Screw 3 3
4D 221045 52 Screw 3 3
4E 561551 02 Screw 3 3
5 561584 80 Puller 1 1 Bowl body
6 572730 80 Pin spanner 1 1 Fan
6A 260121 56 Cylindrical pin 2 2
7 561607 80 Puller 1 1 Discharge slide
7A 561610 01 Support ring 1 1
7B 221040 43 Screw 1 1
8 260154 01 Lifting eye bolt 2 2
9 221706 05 Screw 6 6 Lock ring/ Bowl body
10 548457 80 Tool for belt pulley 1
10 574986 04 Hydraulic tool kit 1 See page 38
11 567008 80 Lifting tool 1 1 Distributor/ Bowl spindle
12 561439 01 Drift 1 1 Bottom bearing
13 589776 01 Key 1 1 Bottom bearing housing
14 563084 80 Puller 2 2 Neck bearing cover
14A 221040 05 Screw 1 1
14B 221035 46 Screw 1 1
15 548043 01 Mounting tool 1 1 Coupling bearing
17 548050 04 Spanner 1 1 Nut/ Inlet and outlet pipe
18 66414 Hexagon socket head key 1 1 Lock ring/ Bowl body
19 566441 01 Sleeve 1 1 Neck bearing
20 566614 01 Chisel 1 1 Seal ring
21 577972 01 Pin 1 1 Distributor
22 585810 01 Crowfoot wrench head 1 1 Oil mist generator
99 588067 Exploded view 1
36
11 Set of tools
A D
C A
E
B
A
A
A B
22
1742R
37
P 636
11.1 Hydraulic tool kit

574986-
Quantity
1 574618 80 Hydraulic components 1 See page 40
2 574626 82 Hydraulic tool 1 See page 42
38
11.1 Hydraulic tool kit 11 Set of tools
2
1
2047D
39
P 636
11.1.1 Hydraulic components

574618-
Quantity
1 574618 01 Pump with hose 1
2 574618 02 Hydraulic cylinder 1
40
2 2050A
41
P 636
11.1.2 Hydraulic tool

574626-
Quantity
1 571628 01 Stud bolt 1
2 574627 03 Sleeve 1
3 571627 01 Holder 1
4 221803 35 Nut 1
5 574954 01 Sleeve 1
6 571620 01 Plate 1
7 571622 01 Screw 3
7A 260001 45 Screw 1
42
2047A
43
P 636
12 Inspection kit
563859-
Quantity
1 560638 01 Rectangular ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating slide
2 560638 01 Rectangular ring 1 Operating slide/ Holder
3 564478 01 Valve plug 3 Operating slide/ Bowl body
4 223406 39 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating water ring
5 260104 05 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Discharge slide
6 565295 01 Rectangular ring 1 Discharge slide/ Bowl body
8 564403 01 Seal ring 1 Bowl hood/ Discharge slide
9 260247 02 O-ring 1 Bowl hood/ Bowl body
14 521127 11 O-ring 1 Frame hood/ Frame bottom part
15 552766 07 Washer 2 Frame bottom part/ Plug
16 537086 06 Lubricating paste G-n Plu 1
17 539474 03 Silicone grease 1
18 223404 05 O-ring 1 Oil pin/ Plug
19 221706 05 Screw 6 Lock ring
20 66414 Hexagon socket head key 1 Lock ring
22 566788 15 Seal ring 1 Operating water cover
23 223403 61 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Holder
28 576279 01 Lock washer 6 Holder/ Bowl body
29 576173 01 Hexagon head screw 6 Holder/ Bowl body
30 576173 01 Hexagon head screw 6 Operating water ring/ Bowl body
31 223406 23 O-ring 1 Distributor support/ Distributor
32 223406 22 O-ring 1 Distributor/ Disc stack
33 223406 23 O-ring 1 Level ring/ Distributor
34 223406 37 O-ring 1 Top disc/ Bowl hood
35 223406 10 O-ring 1 Top disc/ Gravity disc
36 223406 26 O-ring 1 Inlet and outlet pipe/ Support ring
37 223406 25 O-ring 2 Inlet and outlet pipe/ Connecting housing
38 223406 32 O-ring 1 Connecting housing/ Support ring
39 223406 16 O-ring 1 Inlet bend/ Inlet and outlet pipe
40 535586 80 Anti-friction coating 1
98 575939 Separator checkpoints 1
44
12 Inspection kit
1742M
45
P 636
13 Overhaul kit
563869-
Quantity
1 563859 02 Inspection kit 1 1 See page 44
2 2234121 38 O-ring 1 1 Strainer/ Bottom bearing housing
3 2234121 40 O-ring 1 1 Bottom bearing housing
4 562095 02 Labyrinth ring 1 1 Labyrinth ring holder/ Spindle pulley
5 223412 23 O-ring 1 1 Labyrinth ring holder/ Frame bottom part
6 223412 46 O-ring 1 1 Neck bearing cover/ Frame bottom part
7 566788 21 Seal ring 1 1 Neck bearing cover/ Fan
8 223406 28 O-ring 2 2 Deflector ring/ Bowl spindle
9 223404 20 O-ring 1 1 Pipe/ Operating water cover
10 223412 46 O-ring 1 1 Operating water cover
11 566788 05 Seal ring 1 1 Bowl spindle/ Operating water cover
12 544465 10 Locking liquid 1 1 Bottom bearing holder
14 74067 O-ring 1 1 Plug/ Frame bottom part
15 548747 08 Ball bearing 1 1 Bowl spindle/ Top bearing seat
16 223642 36 Snap ring 1 1 Top bearing seat/ Ball bearing
17 562109 03 Helical spring 3 3 Top bearing seat/ Top bearing housing
18 562110 02 Composite spring 4 4 Top bearing seat/ Plug
19 548744 03 Self-align roller bearing 1 1 Bowl spindle/ Bottom bottom housing
21 223406 30 O-ring 1 1 Bowl spindle/ Fan
22 545869 03 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 1 1 Operating slide
25 548051 49 Ball bearing 2 2 Coupling hub/ Motor belt pulley
26 66251 Snap ring 1 1 Motor belt pulley/ Ball bearing
27 223641 18 Snap ring 1 1 Coupling hub/ Ball bearing
28 564075 80 Friction block 5 3 Coupling hub/ Motor belt pulley
29 223641 20 Snap ring 1 1 Coupling hub/ Cover
30 223107 35 Spring washer 1 1 Motor shaft/ Screw
31 563464 01 Flat belt 1 Motor belt pulley/ Spindle puley
31 563467 01 Flat belt 1 Motor belt pulley/ Spindle puley
99 592606 Exploded view 1 1
46
11
9 10 21
8 16
1
7
6
27
26
25
25
15
5
4
17
18
3
2
28
22 29
31
14 19
13
30
Overhaul kit
47
1959Q
P 636
14 Support kit
563877-
Quantity
1 526350 04 Plug 1 Frame bottom part
2 221716 23 Screw 2 Labyrinth ring holder
3 221721 24 Screw 3 Top bearing housing/ Frame bottom
4 221711 18 Screw 1 Neck bearing cover
5 592072 01 Deflector ring 1 Bowl spindle
6 41456 Washer 3 Screw/ Operating water cover
7 221040 46 Screw 3 Operating water cover
10 221716 23 Screw 1 Frame bottom part/ Plug
13 221040 41 Screw 3 Top bearing housing/ Air defle.
15 560661 80 Lock ring 1 Bowl body/ Bowl hood
16 561298 01 Cap nut 1 Bowl spindle/ Bowl body
21 561957 01 Height adjusting ring 4 Frame hood/ Support ring
23 221716 09 Screw 4 Height adjusting ring/ Support ring
25 223642 22 Snap ring 1 Inlet bend/ Nut
27 41456 Washer 6 Frame hood/ Frame bottom part
28 221040 05 Screw 6 Frame hood/ Frame bottom part
29 547833 01 Spacing ring 1 Ball bearing/ Ball bearing
30 41456 Washer 8 Motor/ Frame bottom part
31 221040 58 Screw 4 Motor/ Frame bottom part
32 35120 Nut 4 Motor/ Frame bottom part
33 565378 01 Plug 1 Frame bottom part
34 571743 80 Oil pin 1 Frame bottom part/ Plug
36 561369 02 Spanner for nut 1 Nut/ Discharge slide
37 2210463 22 Screw 1 Safety device/ Connecting housing
48
7 6 2
25
15
5
37
4 13 36
23
16
21
30
28
27
A 30
3
32 31
10 29
33
34
14
1
Support kit
49
1970R
P 636
15 Lifting tool
Separator

563453-
Quantity
2 563454 01 Lug 4
3 221035 53 Screw 4
5 27345 Nut 4
6 260236 03 Shackle 2
50
15 Lifting tool
1686E
51
P 636
16 Tool box
558533-
Quantity
7 558533 10 Padlock 1
52
16 Tool box
1448A
53
17 Cross reference list
+ Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
1270001 26 8 223403 61 16 8 260104 05 16 15

1270019 26 3 223404 05 44 18 260121 56 36 6A
1761834 09 20 16 223404 05 12 8 260154 01 36 8
1763780 07 20 15 223404 20 46 9 260236 03 50 6
1766162 01 20 17 223404 20 12 28 260247 02 16 40
17812 34 9 223406 10 44 35 260247 02 44 9
221035 46 36 14B 223406 10 16 34 27345 50 5
221035 53 50 3 223406 16 20 20 35120 22 12
221040 05 20 9 223406 16 44 39 35120 48 32
221040 05 36 14A 223406 22 44 32 41456 20 8
221040 05 48 28 223406 22 16 24 41456 22 8
221040 08 12 36 223406 23 44 31 41456 22 10
221040 41 48 13 223406 23 44 33 41456 48 6
221040 42 22 7 223406 23 16 22 41456 48 27
221040 43 36 7B 223406 23 16 31 41456 48 30
221040 46 48 7 223406 25 20 10 41456 12 34
221040 46 12 35 223406 25 20 11 521127 11 20 7
221040 58 22 11 223406 25 44 37 521127 11 44 14
221040 58 48 31 223406 26 20 2 526350 04 48 1
221045 52 36 4D 223406 26 44 36 526350 04 12 6
221045 60 22 4 223406 28 12 26 526352 06 12 30
221046 22 20 23 223406 28 46 8 535586 80 44 40
2210462 32 12 4 223406 30 46 21 537086 06 44 16
2210463 22 48 37 223406 30 14 17 539418 02 12 29
221115 19 34 3 223406 32 20 13 539474 03 44 17
221126 04 12 45 223406 32 44 38 544465 10 46 12
221706 03 12 14 223406 37 44 34 545869 03 46 22
221706 05 36 9 223406 37 16 33 545869 03 14 11
221706 05 44 19 223406 39 44 4 545869 03 16 4
221711 18 12 22A 223406 39 16 11 547833 01 24 3
221711 18 48 4 223412 23 12 18 547833 01 48 29
221716 09 20 6 223412 23 46 5 547837 01 22 6
221716 09 48 23 223412 46 12 23 548043 01 36 15
221716 16 16 23 223412 46 46 6 548050 04 36 17
221716 22 12 44C 223412 46 46 10 548051 49 24 2
221716 22 14 16 223412 46 12 33 548051 49 46 25
221716 23 28 8 2234121 38 12 11 548457 80 36 10
221716 23 12 19 2234121 38 46 2 548744 03 46 19
221716 23 48 2 2234121 40 12 15 548744 03 14 10
221716 23 48 10 2234121 40 46 3 548747 08 46 15
221716 23 12 43 223641 18 24 6 548747 08 14 2
221721 24 12 21 223641 18 46 27 549325 01 24 9
221721 24 48 3 223641 20 24 10 552766 07 44 15
221721 37 22 9 223641 20 46 29 552766 07 12 5
221721 37 12 44D 223642 22 20 21 552766 09 20 14
221803 35 42 4 223642 22 48 25 552851 31 34 7
223101 94 12 47 223642 36 46 16 552870 21 30 4
223107 35 22 5 223642 36 14 4 552870 21 32 1
223107 35 46 30 260001 45 42 7A 552870 21 34 5
223403 61 44 23 260104 05 44 5 552870 41 28 3
54
P 636
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
553171 01 26 6 563464 01 46 31 574627 03 42 2

553272 01 26 6 563467 01 22 13 574954 01 42 5
554214 02 26 9 563467 01 46 31 574986 04 36 10
555529 01 26 7 563859 02 46 1 575055 80 36 4A
556416 11 28 5 564075 80 24 8 575055 81 36 4
556416 17 30 6 564075 80 46 28 575083 02 36 4B
556416 24 32 3 564089 80 24 5 575098 01 36 4C
558533 10 52 7 564095 80 22 3 575939 44 98
560131 02 12 2 564095 81 22 3 576173 01 44 29
560134 01 14 1 564100 80 24 5 576173 01 44 30
560202 01 12 27 564403 01 16 39 576173 01 16 9
560406 01 14 8 564403 01 44 8 576173 01 16 14
560426 04 24 1 564478 01 44 3 576279 01 44 28
560634 80 16 1 564478 01 16 6 576279 01 16 10
560637 01 16 1A 564493 02 12 31 576798 81 16 32
560638 01 44 1 565217 01 16 7 576866 02 20 12
560638 01 44 2 565295 01 44 6 576884 02 16 21
560638 01 16 2 565295 01 16 17 576884 04 16 21
560638 01 16 5 565378 01 48 33 576932 01 16 38
560639 01 16 3 565378 01 12 7 576933 01 20 5
560649 01 16 18 566054 01 32 2 576938 01 16 37
560661 80 17 41 566441 01 36 19 576938 14 16 36M
560661 80 48 15 566614 01 36 20 576938 15 16 36L
561114 01 22 2 566682 01 34 2 576938 16 16 36K
561298 01 48 16 566687 80 34 4 576938 17 16 36J
561369 02 36 3 566692 01 34 1 576938 18 16 36I
561369 02 48 36 566788 05 46 11 576938 19 16 36H
561439 01 36 12 566788 05 12 32 576938 20 16 36G
561551 02 36 4E 566788 15 44 22 576938 21 16 36F
561584 80 36 5 566788 15 16 13 576938 22 16 36E
561593 80 36 1 566788 21 12 24 576938 23 16 36D
561607 80 36 7 566788 21 46 7 576938 24 16 36C
561610 01 36 7A 567008 80 36 11 576938 25 16 35
561829 01 36 1A 567501 02 20 18 576938 26 16 36B
561957 01 20 4 570142 01 30 1 576938 27 16 36A
561957 01 48 21 571405 80 12 22 576938 81 16 36
562091 01 12 12 571453 02 14 14 576987 02 16 29
562094 01 12 16 571620 01 42 6 576987 04 16 29
562095 02 12 17 571622 01 42 7 577024 81 20 1
562095 02 46 4 571627 01 42 3 577705 80 22 1
562109 03 46 17 571628 01 42 1 577802 01 26 4
562109 03 14 6 571743 80 48 34 577972 01 36 21
562110 02 46 18 571743 80 12 9 578017 02 12 44A
562110 02 14 7 572730 80 36 6 578019 01 12 44B
562902 80 28 1 574226 01 16 16 578019 80 12 44
562993 81 12 1 574618 01 40 1 578119 44 99
563084 80 36 14 574618 02 40 2 578184 01 16 19
563089 01 16 28 574618 80 38 1 578220 80 16 20
563454 01 50 2 574625 02 20 19 579323 02 16 12
563464 01 22 13 574626 82 38 2 580049 01 14 15
55
Part No. Page Ref.
580051 02 14 5
584048 80 14 3
585810 01 36 22
588067 36 99
588069 36 99
588221 80 20 3
588222 01 20 22
589704 01 12 13
589776 01 36 13
590137 01 12 10
590138 01 14 13
590643 80 16 26
590643 80 16 27
591263 01 26 4
591821 80 16 25
592072 01 12 25
592072 01 48 5
592493 80 12 20
592606 46 99
592608 48 99
64416 16 1B
66169 26 5
66251 24 4
66251 46 26
66414 36 18
66414 44 20
70490 12 3
74067 46 14
74067 12 42
56
.P 636 Flex module
Spare Parts Catalogue
Specification No. 588888-80/27 Config No. 103126

Book No. 9000723 02 Rev. 1 Product No. 588888 81
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes
Ersatzteilkatalog Varaosaluettelo
Catalogue de piéces de Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων
rechange
Catalogue de piezas de Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
recambio
Каталог запасных Reservedelskatalog
частеи
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

Contents
1 Read this first 5
2 Sludge outlet assembly 12

2.1 Sludge outlet 14
3 Oil block assembly 16

3.1 Flexible hose kit 18
3.2 Valve block, oil 20
3.3 Throttle washer assembly 24
3.4 Pressure transmitter assembly 26
4 Inlet and outlet pipes 28
5 Valve block water 30
6 Air distributor kit 32

6.1 Air pressure regulator 34
7 Control cabinet block 36

7.1 Cabinet 38
8 Water block spare parts 50
3
4
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
5
P 636 Flex module




produits.

productos.
6

изделий.


nossos produtos.


7
P 636 Flex module

produkten.
8
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
máquina


Trommel du bol
9
P 636 Flex module
Lista traduzioni
Käännösluttelo
maquina
tamburo uudelleen
10
ΓΛΩΣΣΑΡΙ
Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste

μηχανής

μηχανής

Not delivered as spare part ∆εν παραδίδεται ως Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som reservedel
11
P 636 Flex module
2 Sludge outlet assembly
*=On request only, contact your local Alfa Laval representative

582797-
Ref Part No Description -80* Notes
Quantity
1 582592 80 Sludge outlet 1 S200 - S300
See page 14
2 561339 01 Gasket 1
12
2 Sludge outlet assembly
S 811-S 886
S 921-S 987
PA 625- PA636
2265C
13
P 636 Flex module
2.1 Sludge outlet

582592-
Quantity
3 1762017 06 Hose 1
4 1766096 01 Plug 1
14
2.1 Sludge outlet 2 Sludge outlet assembly
2200P
15
P 636 Flex module
3 Oil block assembly

582657-
Quantity
1 589707 80 Flexible hose kit 1 See page 18
2 582472 80* Valve block, oil 1 See page 20
3 582476 80* Throttle washer assembly 1
29 582752 80* Pressure transmitter assembly 2 See page 26
16
3 Oil block assembly
28 27
Alt. P625, P626
P605, P615
P635, P636
28 26 27
4 5 4
2201Y
17
P 636 Flex module
3.1 Flexible hose kit

589707-
Quantity
1 1762012 80 Connecting hose 2
4 567996 02 Gasket 2
18
3.1 Flexible hose kit 3 Oil block assembly
2222F
19
P 636 Flex module
3.2 Valve block, oil

582472-
Quantity
2 582567 80 Regulating valve, DIN 1 See page 22
3 1762751 18 Flange 1
5 1765908 01 Gasket 6 DN25
6 1766102 01 Non-return valve 2 DN32
7 1764733 81 Pneumatic 3-way valve 1
21 569312 02 Hexagon plug 1
22 1763491 03 Nipple 1
23 574409 83 3-way solenoid valve 1
24 1762751 18 Flange 1 DN25
20
3.2 Valve block, oil 3 Oil block assembly
24
21
2
23
17
22
16
2219C
21
P 636 Flex module
3.2.1 Regulating valve, DIN

582567-
Quantity
2 582585 01 Manual insert DN25 1
4 1765130 01 Gasket 1
7 582554 01 Valve seat 1
8 586248 03 Gasket 1
22
3.2 Valve block, oil 3 Oil block assembly
2219J
23
P 636 Flex module
3.4 Pressure transmitter assembly

582752-
Quantity
1 574840 01 Pressure transmitter 1 P 605-P 636
3 53551716 02 Washer 1
4 585377 01 Hexagon bushing 1/4-3/8 1 Needle Valve
26
3.4 Pressure transmitter assembly 3 Oil block assembly
4
2221F
27
P 636 Flex module
4 Inlet and outlet pipes

583388-
Quantity
3 1764439 80 Temperature sensor 1
6 582752 80* Pressure transmitter assembly 1 See page 26
28
4 Inlet and outlet pipes
2270F
29
P 636 Flex module
5 Valve block water

582530-
Quantity
1 582496 80 Valve block water 1
2 1766037 09 Flow valve 15.0 l/min 1
3 1766037 02 Flow valve, 11.0 l/min 1
4 1766037 03 Flow valve, 2.8 l/min 1
6 1767071 80 Non return valve kit 1
8 1765936 02 Flexible connection water 1
9 1765937 01 Flexible connection 1
10 53550746 01 Flexible hose 1
11 221030 43 Screw 4
12 223101 47 Washer 4
13 1765930 01 Ball valve 1
Z 1765993 87 Water block spare parts See page 50
30
5 Valve block water
8 6
1 2 3 4
10
13
11
12
7
9
2215B
31
P 636 Flex module
6 Air distributor kit

582806-
Quantity
1 1765931 01 Ball valve 1
2 539483 82 Air pressure regulator 1 See page 34
4 1763491 03 Nipple 1
5 53551400 02 Flexible connection 1
7 582450 01 Air distributor 1
16 580759 06 Push-In Fittings 2
32
6 Air distributor kit
2221W
33
P 636 Flex module
6.1 Air pressure regulator

539483-
Quantity
1 539483 03 Air pressure regulator 1 Tecnova code A2480009
2 539483 06 Pressure gauge 1 Tecnova code -012
4 539483 09 Lock nut 2 Tecnova code 1417-0002-4
34
6.1 Air pressure regulator 6 Air distributor kit
2297Y
35
P 636 Flex module
8 Water block spare parts

1765993-
Quantity
1 1765993 01 Retaining clip 1
2 1765993 02 Spring 1
3 1765993 03 Core 1
4 1765993 04 Spring washer 1
5 1765993 05 O-ring 1
6 1765993 06 Piston 1
7 1765993 07 Disc 1
8 1765993 08 Non-return valve 1
9 1765993 09 O-ring 1
10 1765993 10 O-ring 1
11 1765993 11 Coil, 24 V 1
14 1765993 13 Drain valve 1
15 1765993 16 Strainer 1
50
8 Water block spare parts
2109L
51
+ Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
1762012 80 18 1 574409 83 20 23
1762017 06 14 3 574840 01 26 1 581042 80* 38 1
1762751 18 20 3 580759 06 32 16 581045 80 38 15

1762751 18 20 24 580936 01 40 10 581046 80 38 16
1763491 03 20 22 580986 01 42 1 581049 80 38 2
1763491 03 32 4 580986 03 42 150 581960 01 40 1
1764439 80 28 3 580986 04 42 5 582450 01 32 7
1764733 81 20 7 580986 05 42 6 582472 80* 16 2
580986 06 42 7
1765130 01 22 4 582476 80* 16 3
1765908 01 20 5 580986 07 42 8
582496 80 30 1
1765930 01 30 13 580986 08 42 9
582554 01 22 7
1765931 01 32 1 580986 09 42 10
582567 80 20 2
1765936 02 30 8 580986 14 42 3
582585 01 22 2
1765937 01 30 9 580986 16 42 140
582592 80 12 1
1765993 01 50 1 580986 17 42 11
580986 18 42 160 582752 80* 16 29
1765993 02 50 2
1765993 03 50 3 580986 26 42 4 582752 80* 28 6
1765993 04 50 4 580987 02 48 1 585377 01 26 4

1765993 05 50 5 580987 04 48 2 586248 03 22 8
580987 25 48 3 589707 80 16 1
1765993 06 50 6
1765993 07 50 7 580989 01 40 12
1765993 08 50 8 580991 03 38 13D
1765993 09 50 9 580991 04 38 13B
1765993 10 50 10 580991 05 38 13C
1765993 11 50 11 580991 12 38 13A
1765993 13 50 14 580992 01 44 1
1765993 16 50 15 580992 02 44 2
1765993 87 30 Z 580992 03 44 3
1766037 02 30 3 580992 04 44 4
1766037 03 30 4 580992 05 44 5
1766037 09 30 2 580992 06 44 6
1766096 01 14 4 580992 07 44 7
1766102 01 20 6 580992 08 40 7
1767071 80 30 6 580992 09 40 8
221030 43 30 11 580992 26 40 4
223101 47 30 12 580992 27 40 5
53500452 01 40 20 580992 80 40 9
53550746 01 30 10 580993 01 38 19
53551400 02 32 5 580994 01 40 6
53551716 02 26 3 580998 81 38 5
539483 03 34 1 580999 80 40 2
539483 06 34 2 581002 80* 36 1
539483 09 34 4 581005 81 38 13
539483 82 32 2 581009 01 40 14
546229 16 16 5 581016 01 40 11
546229 35 16 28 581040 01 46 1
546229 59 18 5 581040 02 46 2
561339 01 12 2 581040 03 46 3
567996 02 18 4 581040 04 46 4
569312 02 20 21 581040 80 40 13
52
.Sludge removal kit
Spare Parts Catalogue
Specification No. 582713-80/10

Book No. 595190 02 Rev. 2
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes
Ersatzteilkatalog Varaosaluettelo
Catalogue de piéces de Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων
rechange
Catalogue de piezas de Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
recambio
Каталог запасных Reservedelskatalog
частеи
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

Contents
1 Read this first 5
2 Sludge removal kit 12

3.1 Sludge outlet S 821- S 836 16
3.2 Sludge outlet S 881, S 886 18

5 Slugde pump T70 spare parts 32
3
4
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
5
Sludge removal kit




produits.

productos.
6

изделий.


nossos produtos.


7
Sludge removal kit

produkten.
8
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
máquina


Trommel du bol
9
Sludge removal kit
Lista traduzioni
Käännösluttelo
maquina
tamburo uudelleen
10
ΓΛΩΣΣΑΡΙ
Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste

μηχανής

μηχανής

Not delivered as spare part Δεν παραδίδεται ως Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som reservedel
11
Sludge removal kit
2 Sludge removal kit

582522-
Quantity
2 1766699 01 Sludge pump T70 1 1
3 580753 01 Level switch 1 1
4 1767083 04 Rubber hose 1
4 1767084 04 Rubber hose 1
7 574351 04 Flexible hose L= 860 1 1
8 569763 02 Nipple G3/4-G3/4 2 2
9 1766002 01 Non-return valve 1 1
10 1765934 01 Flexible connection 2 2
11 1766893 01 Plug 1 1
13 1762017 12 Hose 1 1
15 569763 03 Nipple G1/2-G1/2 1 1
16 569763 08 Nipple G1-G3/4 1 1
17 572915 01 Solenoid valve 1 1
18 571395 01 Elbow coupling G1/4 1 1
19 1766081 02 Regulating valve 1 1
12
2 Sludge removal kit
2200H
13
Sludge removal kit
5 Slugde pump T70 spare parts

1766702-
Quantity
1 1766702 01 O-ring/ Packing kit 4
2 1766702 02 Diaphragm 2
3 1766702 03 O-ring 6
4 1766702 04 Air valve 1
5 1766702 05 Muffler 1
32
5 Slugde pump T70 spare parts
2123N
33
SECTION 10
Bill of Materials / Catalog - Local Device
Fuel Oil Treatment System
GE- St. Thomas
BOM No. P000047EQ_RB
Item Qty Per

P&ID Tag # Size Item Description Component Supplier Component Supplier Part #
No. Assembly
1 CG-1, 2, 3 Centrifuge P 636 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 881202-08-01
2 CGM-1, 2, 3 Centrifuge motor - IEC, 460 VD - 60 Hz - 8,6 kW - 3450 r/min - 13,9 A 3 ABB 3GAA131002
3 SV10, 15, 16 Solenoid valve Block - Water 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 582530-80
4 SV1 Solenoid valve - Feed 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 574409-83
5 SV6 Solenoid valve - Sludge pump 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 574409-81
6 V1 Pneumatic 3-way valve 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 1764733 81
7 PT1 Pressure Transmitter - Inlet 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 574840 01
8 PT4 Pressure Transmitter - Discharge 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 574840 01
9 PT3 Pressure Transmitter - Header 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 574840 01
10 SS Cover Interlocking kit 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 566054-01
11 YT Monitoring kit (Unbalanced sensor) 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 566727-02
12 ST Speed Sensor Kit 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 566718-02
13 LS Level switch, Sludge tank 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 1766704-01
14 SP-1, 2, 3 Sludge pump 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 1766699-01
15 TT-1 Temperature sensor 1 Alfa Laval Inc. 1764439-80
16 RV 4 Manual control valve 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 582567-80
17 CV-3 Check valve 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 1765098-01
18 PRV-3 Pressure regulator - Air 3 Alfa Laval Inc. 539483-82
19 P-1, 2, 3 Feed Pump - External gear pump type 3 Viking SG41420-GOVU-M
20 PM-1, 2, 3 Feed Pump motor with space heater. 3 Hp, 1150 RPM, 3 Baldor
3/60/230/460V 213TC frame TEFC motor, with 110V space heater.
21 N/A Motor Starter/Controls Panel 1 ABB E09587
22 N/A Air compressor, Single Stage, 5HP Recip Compressor with Start-up Kit 1 Ingersoll Rand SS5L5
(Supply loose)
23 N/A Air dryer, High Temperature Refrigerated (Supply loose) 1 Ingersoll Rand D42IT
24 FA-1 1/2" NPT Air filter, High Efficiency 1 Ingersoll Rand F35IH
25 PRV-1, 2 2" Flange Back Pressure Control Valve 2 OCV 108G003-0202282P
26 PS 1/2" FNPT Pressure Switch 1 Neo-Dyne / J Koch Associates 100P41C3BX
27 FS-1, 2, 3 3/4" MNPT Flow Switch, 24 VDC 3 Magnetrol / Miller Energy 910-A1A2-001
28 FI 2" NPT
2 GPM/LPM Direction R to L
Flow Indicator 0-120 GPM/LPM, L, 4-20mA output 1 UFM / Miller Energy MN-ASB120GLM-16CS-4 5CS 84-TT0WL
MN-ASB120GLM-16CS-4.5CS.84-TT0WL
29 FW-1 3/4" FNPT Water Filter, SS 1 CUNO 44152-01
30 N/A Filter element, 5 micron 1 CUNO G78B8
31 CV-1A, 1B, 1C 2" SW Check Valve - 2" SW, SS 3 Schubert & Salzer 4000/050V1220R
32 ICV 3/4" Injection check valve, Mister Mistr, SS 1/2 X 4 1 Agri-Inject 820-50-016128-0
33 DP DP Switch with Gauge 0-10 PSID 1 Mid West 120SG00OEH
34 3VM1 1/2" NPT 3-VALVE MANIFOLD, SS 1 HEX HM451U33314120
35 DS-1 3" Flange Duplex Strainer, CS - Basket elements: 304 sst w/ 1/32 "perf. 1 TITAN DS696C0300
36 NV-1, 2 1/4" Vent valve 2
37 CPI 1/2" MNPT Compound Pressure Indicator, Liquid-fill, - 30" HG-0-15 PISG, 4" Dial 1 Reotemp PR40S1A2D02G
38 PI 1/2" MNPT Pressure Indicator, Liquid-fill, 0-100 PSI/BAR - 4" Dial 4 Reotemp PR40S1A2D18G
39 TI Temperature Indicator 0-200 F/C - 5" Dial 1 Reotemp SS0251D43
40 N/A 3/4" Thermowell, SS, STEM LENGTH: 2-1/2", 3/4" EXT THREADS 1 Reotemp ST2304
41 N/A 1/2" Gauge needle valve, Multi-port with Bleed valve, Hexagon Plug 5 HEX HG481U313F412, HB241
42 BV-1 3" BW Ball Valve, SS - 3" BW (Full port) 1 J-Flow Control 3DM4533FTMTMBW
43 BV-1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2" SW Ball Valve, SS - 2", SW (Full port) 6 J-Flow Control 2DM4533FTMTMSW
2B, 2C
44 BV-3 1" NPT Ball Valve SS - 1", NPT (Full port) 1 J-Flow Control 1DM4533FTMTMS
45 BV-4, 5, 6 1/2" NPT Ball Valve, SS - 1/2", NPT (Full port) 3 J-Flow Control 1/2DM4533FTMTMS
46 RV-5A, 5B, 5C 1" SW Globe Valve, SS - 1" SW 3 OIC 8GL-6LSW-U-G
Last updated on 2/9/2013

Model 108-3 (Fueling Service)
The Model 108-3 has a wide range of applications: anywhere a system must be
protected from pressures that are too high (relief) or too low (sustaining) and
reverse flow must be prevented.
Typical examples include: PRV-1, 2
Pump systems Fuel distribution systems
SERIES FEATURES
Pressure Sustaining: Prevents inlet pressure from dropping below a
predetermined minimum
Automatic closure on pressure reversal
Model 108-3 Back Pressure / Check Valve

Operates over a wide flow range
Set pressure is adjustable with single screw
Quick opening and adjustable closing speed
Can be maintained without removal from the line
Model 108-3 Factory tested and can be pre-set to your requirements
OPERATION SCHEMATIC
The normally closed, spring-loaded pilot, sensing
upstream pressure, responds to changes in pressure
and causes the main valve to do the same. The net
result is a constant modulating action of the pilot and
main valve to hold the upstream pressure constant.
The pilot system is equipped with a closing speed
control that fines tunes the valve response to the
system variables.
If downstream pressure becomes greater than
upstream pressure, the valve will close to prevent
reverse flow.
COMPONENTS
RECOMMENDED
The Model 108-3 consists of the following
components, arranged as shown on the schematic
INSTALLATION
diagram:
1.) Model 65 Basic Valve
2.) Model 1330 Pressure Relief Pilot
3.) Model 126 Ejector Install the valve with adequate space above and around the valve to facilitate
4.) Model 141-3 Flow Control Valve servicing. Refer to the Dimension Table.
(closing speed control) Valve should be installed with the bonnet (cover) at the top, particularly 8"
5.) Model 141-1 Check Valve and larger valves, and any valve with a limit switch.
6.) Model 123 Inline Strainer Shut-off valves should be installed upstream and downstream of the control
7.) Model 155L Visual Indicator (optional)
valve. These are used to isolate the valve during start-up and maintenance.
SIZING MAX. PRESSURE

Pressure sustaining valves should be lim-
END CONNECTIONS DUCTILE IRON STEEL/STN STL ALUMINUM
ited to a maximum velocity of 25 ft/sec.
Definitive sizing information can be found Threaded 640 psi 640 psi 285 psi
in the OCV Catalog, Series 108 section Grooved 300 psi 300 psi 200 psi
and Engineering section Performance 150# Flanged 250 psi 285 psi 285 psi
Charts. Consult factory for assistance or 300# Flanged 640 psi 740 psi ---
visit our site, www.controlvalves.com, for
our fueling spec program, ValveMaster
Fuels.
SIZE 1 1/4", 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 24"
FLOW@25FT/SEC GPM 115-160 260 375 575 1000 2250 3900 6125 8750 10600 13750 31250
TOLL FREE 1.888.628.8258 phone: (918)627.1942 fax: (918)622.8916 7400 East 42nd Place, Tulsa, OK 74145
email: sales@controlvalves.com website: www.controlvalves.com
Global performance. Personal touch. REVISED 1/12/11

Model 108-3 (Fueling Service)
SIZES
GLOBE/ANGLE SPECIFICATIONS (Typical Fuel Application)
Screwed Ends: 1 1/4" - 3" The back pressure control valve shall function to prevent the upstream pressure from falling
Grooved Ends: 1 1/2" - 6" below a predetermined minimum while closing to prevent reverse flow.
Flanged Ends: 1 1/4" - 24" (globe);
1 1/4" - 16" (angle) DESIGN
TEMPERATURE RANGE The back pressure control valve shall be a single-seated, line pressure operated, diaphragm
(Valve Elastomers) actuated, pilot controlled globe valve. The valve shall seal by means of a corrosion-resistant
Buna-N -40° F - 180°F seat and a resilient, rectangular seat disc. These, and other parts, shall be replaceable with-
Viton 0° F - 400°F out removing the valve from the line. The stem of the main valve shall be guided top and
SPRING RANGES (inlet setting) bottom by integral bushings. Alignment of the body, bonnet and diaphragm assembly shall
5-30 psi, 20-80 psi, 65-180 psi, be by precision dowel pins. The diaphragm shall not be used as a seating surface, nor shall
the pistons be used as an operating means. The pilot system shall be furnished complete,
100-300 psi installed on the main valve and include a needle valve, inline strainer and solenoid valve.
MATERIALS The back pressure control valve shall be operationally and hydrostatically tested prior to
Consult factory for others. shipment.
Body/Bonnet: Ductile Iron (epoxy coated),
Carbon Steel (epoxy coated), Stainless Steel, MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
Aluminum The main valve body and bonnet shall be ductile iron per ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. All
Seat Ring: Stainless Steel, Bronze ferrous surfaces shall be coated with 4 mils of epoxy. The main valve seat ring shall be
Stem: Stainless Steel, Monel CF8M stainless steel. Elastomers (diaphragms, resilient seats and O-rings) shall be Buna-N.
Spring: Stainless Steel The control pilot, needle valve and control line tubing shall also be Stainless Steel.
Diaphragm: Buna-N, Viton,
(Nylon reinforced) OPERATING CONDITIONS
Seat Disc: Buna-N, Viton The back pressure control valve shall be suitable for controlling the inlet pressure at <X>
psi and flow rates ranging from <X to X> gpm.
Pilot: Stainless Steel, Bronze
Other pilot system components: Stainless ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
Steel, Bronze/Brass The back pressure control valve shall be a <size> Model 108-3, <globe pattern, angle
Tubing & Fittings: pattern>, with <150# flanged, 300# flanged, threaded, grooved> end connections, as
Stainless Steel, Copper/Brass manufactured by OCV Control Valves, Tulsa, Oklahoma, USA.
For maximum efficiency, the OCV control valve

should be mounted in a piping system so that the
valve bonnet (cover) is in the top position. Other
positions are acceptable but may not allow the
valve to function to its fullest and safest potential.
In particular, please consult the factory before
installing 8" and larger valves, or any valves with a
limit switch, in positions other than described.
Space should be taken into consideration when
mounting valves and their pilot systems.
A routine inspection & maintenance program Represented by:

should be established and conducted yearly by a
qualified technician. Consult our factory @
1-888-628-8258 for parts and service.
How to order your Model 108-3 valve

When ordering please provide:
Fluid to be controlled - Model Number - Size -
Globe or Angle - End Connection - Body Material -
Trim Material - Elastomer Material - Pressure
Setting or Spring Range - - Special Requirements /
Installation Requirements
TOLL FREE 1.888.628.8258 phone: (918)627.1942 fax: (918)622.8916 7400 East 42nd Place, Tulsa, Oklahoma 74145
email: sales@controlvalves.com website: www.controlvalves.com
REVISED 1/12/11 Global performance. Personal touch.

PS
Neo-Dyn®
by Aerospace Controls
®
Neo-Dyn Series 100P Pressure Switch / Internal Adjustment
®
Versatile Nega-Rate Belleville disc spring pressure switch for a wide range of applications. Series 100P (diaphragm
sensor) for pneumatic and low impulse hydraulics up to 3000 psig system pressure.
Operating Pressure Data
Adjustable Adjustable Set Point Range
Range Deadband Maximum Recommended Proof
Number Increasing Decreasing (approximate) System Pressure Pressure
1 5 to 75 2.3 to 72.3 2.7 600 1000

2 15 to 150 9 to 144 6 3000 5000
4 50 to 300 36 to 286 14 3000 5000
5 125 to 600 100 to 575 25 3000 5000
7 500 to 1500 440 to 1440 60 3000 5000
8 800 to 2800 675 to 2675 125 3000 5000
All values given in psig.
Standard Specifications Ordering Sequence — Select desired option for each category
Electrical OPTIONS
Wetted Material
Snap action electrical switch 1 Aluminum port, Teflon coated polyimide diaphragm and Buna-N O-Ring
recognized by Underwriters’ 4 316 stainless steel port, Teflon coated polyimide diaphragm and Buna-N O-Ring
Laboratories, Inc. and CSA 5 316 stainless steel port and diaphragm heliarc welded
International 7 Hastelloy C port and diaphragm, heliarc welded (Except Range 1)
9 Monel port and inconel diaphragm heliarc welded (Except Range 1)
Electrical Connection Adjustable Range
¹⁄₂ NPT female conduit connection 1 2.3 psig dec. to 75 psig inc. (0.2 bar dec. to 5.2 bar inc.)
with terminal block 2 9 psig dec. to 150 psig inc. (0.6 bar dec. to 10.3 bar inc.)
4 36 psig dec. to 300 psig inc. (2.5 bar dec. to 20.7 bar inc.)
Pressure Connection 5 100 psig dec. to 600 psig inc. (6.9 bar dec. to 41.4 bar inc.)
7 440 psig dec. to 1500 psig inc. (30.3 bar dec. to 103.4 bar inc.)
Wetted Material 1 8 675 psig dec. to 2800 psig inc. (46.5 bar dec. to 193.1 bar inc.)
¹⁄₄ NPT Female Electrical Form
C 15 amp at 125 or 250 VAC; ¹⁄₈ hp at 125 VAC; ¹⁄₄ hp at 250 VAC; .5 amp resistive,
Wetted Material 4, 5, 7 and 9 .04 amp inductive at 125 VDC
¹⁄₂ NPT Female CC 11 amp, ¹⁄₄ hp at 125 or 250 VAC; 5 amp resistive, 3 amp inductive at 28 VDC;
.5 amp resistive at 125 VDC
Temperature Range Z 15 amp at 125 or 250 VAC; ¹⁄₄ hp at 125 VAC; ¹⁄₂ hp at 250 VAC; 1 amp resistive,
Ambient: - 40°F to + 180°F .5 amp inductive at 125 VDC
(- 40°C to + 82°C) Enclosure
3 Meets or exceeds the requirements of NEMA Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X and 13
Media: - 40°F to + 300°F Miscellaneous
(- 40°C to + 149°C) A Epoxy paint exterior — extra protection for severe environments
B Viton O-Ring
Media temperature limits change C EPR O-Ring
with O-Ring selection E ⁷⁄₁₆" - 20 SAE port (Wetted Material 1 Only)
F Fire fuse — for fire-tested equipment (Wetted Material 4 & 5 only)
Adjustment J Annealed stainless steel port screws for H2S environments (Wetted Materials 4 and 5 only)
Concealed wrench flat adjustment — Consult factory for reduced system and proof pressure
with range scale L Neon indicator light — 115 VAC
M Gold electrical contacts for extremely low current applications
Shipping Weight P 5-Pin Brad Harrison connector (Reduce AC electrical rating to 8 amps — (Not for CC3 Electrical)
S Stainless steel diaphragm (Wetted Material 4 only)
Approximately 3 pounds W Stainless steel screws — exterior (Standard with Wetted Materials 4, 5, 7 and 9)
X UL and CSA Approved and CE Mark (Not available with L or P option)
Y 2" NPT Female port for viscous medias. Port Material is carbon steel (Wetted Material “3”)
— Order as 100P3xxxxY
Special (Consult representative or factory)

Non-catalog adjustable range and/or set point, deadband and proof pressure
Media temperature capability from -65°F to +400°F
Chemical seals installed
Manual reset — decreasing only (available in C3 only)
10 amps 125 VDC electrical rating
Ordering Procedure Example
When factory presetting is desired, Series
stipulate set point, increasing or Wetted Material
decreasing Adjustable Range
Electrical Form
Insert available option number or Enclosure
Weather Proof letter designation as required Miscellaneous
(NEMA 4 and 13)
100P 1 2 C 3 _
Field Adjustable
2.3 to 2800 psig Series 100P
Envelope Dimensions
3.50 Max. (range 1)

3.31 Max. (range 2-8)
(range 2-8)
Electrical Form
FORM "C" FORM "CC" FORM "Z"

(SPDT) INC (DPDT) (DOUBLE BREAK)
INC INC
P P P
RED NC1 RED NC1 RED NC NC BLK
BRN C1 BRN C1
BLU NO1 BLU NO1
GRN BLK NC2 BLU NO NO VIO
SCREW
YEL C2 GRN
SCREW
VIO NO2
GRN
SCREW
Basic Principles of Design
28150 Industry Drive, Valencia, CA 91355 Tel: 661-295-4000 Fax: 661-294-1750

Form #108-rev.d
FS-1, 2, 3
Echotel®
Model 910
Installation and Operating Manual
Ultrasonic
Level
Switch
Read this Manual Before Installing WARNING! Explosion hazard. Do not connect or
This manual provides information on the Echotel Model disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off
910 Ultrasonic Liquid Level Switches. It is important that or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
all instructions are read carefully and followed in
sequence. Detailed instructions are included in the Low Voltage Directive
Installation section of this manual. For use in Category II installations. If equipment is used
in a manner not specified by manufacturer, protection
Conventions Used in this Manual provided by equipment may be impaired.
Certain conventions are used in this manual to convey
specific types of information. General technical material, Notice of Trademark, Copyright, and Limitations
support data, and safety information are presented in Magnetrol & Magnetrol logotype and Echotel are regis-
narrative form. The following styles are used for notes, tered trademarks of Magnetrol International.
cautions, and warnings.
Copyright © 2011 Magnetrol International, Incorporated.
NOTES All rights reserved.
Notes contain information that augments or clarifies
Performance specifications are effective with date of issue
an operating step. Notes do not normally contain
actions. They follow the procedural steps to which and are subject to change without notice. Magnetrol
they refer. reserves the right to make changes to the product
described in this manual at any time without notice.
Cautions Magnetrol makes no warranty with respect to the accura-
cy of the information in this manual.
Cautions alert the technician to special conditions that
could injure personnel, damage equipment, or reduce Warranty
a component’s mechanical integrity. Cautions are also
used to alert the technician to unsafe practices or the All Magnetrol Model 910 Level Switches are
need for special protective equipment or specific mate- warranted free of defects in materials or workmanship for
rials. In this manual, a caution box indicates a poten- two full years from the date of original factory
tially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may shipment.
result in minor or moderate injury.
If returned within the warranty period; and, upon
WARNINGS factory inspection of the control, the cause of the claim is
determined to be covered under the warranty; then,
Warnings identify potentially dangerous situations or Magnetrol will repair or replace the control at
serious hazards. In this manual, a warning indicates an no cost to the purchaser (or owner) other than
imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, transportation.
could result in serious injury or death.
Magnetrol shall not be liable for misapplication, labor
Safety Messages claims, direct or consequential damage or expense arising
The Echotel Model 910 is designed for use in Category II, from the installation or use of equipment.
Pollution Degree 2 installations. Follow all standard There are no other warranties expressed or implied,
industry procedures for servicing electrical and computer except special written warranties covering some
equipment when working with or around high voltage. Magnetrol products.
Always shut off the power supply before touching any
components. Although high voltage is not present in this Quality Assurance
system, it may be present in other systems. The quality assurance system in place at Magnetrol guar-
antees the highest level of quality throughout the compa-
Electrical components are sensitive to electrostatic ny. Magnetrol is committed to providing
discharge. To prevent equipment damage, observe full customer satisfaction both in quality products and
safety procedures when working with electrostatic quality service.
sensitive components.
The Magnetrol quality assurance system
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. is registered to ISO 9001 affirming its
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: commitment to known international
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, quality standards providing the strongest
and (2) This device must accept any interference assurance of product/service quality
received, including interference that may cause unde- available.
sired operation.
51-604 Echotel Model 910

1.0 Introduction
Echotel Model 910 Level Switches utilize ultrasonic
contact technology for measuring level in clean liquid
applications.
1.1 Principle of Operation
The Model 910 Level Switch uses ultrasonic energy to

detect the presence or absence of liquid in a transducer gap.
The basic principle behind ultrasonic contact technology is
Ultrasonic
transducer
that high-frequency sound waves are easily transmitted
across a transducer gap in the presence of a liquid medium,
but are severely attenuated when the gap is dry. The
Model 910 uses an ultrasonic frequency of 3 MHz to
perform this liquid level measurement in a wide variety of
process media and application conditions.
The transducer uses a pair of piezoelectric crystals that are

Transmit Receive encapsulated in epoxy at the tip of the 316 stainless steel
crystal crystal
transducer. The crystals are made of a ceramic material,
that vibrates at a given frequency when subjected to an
applied voltage. The transmit crystal converts an electrical
signal from the Model 910 electronics into an ultrasonic
signal. When liquid is present in the gap, the receive
crystal is able to sense the ultrasonic signal from the
transmit crystal and convert it back to an electrical signal.
This signal is sent to the electronics to indicate the pres-
Ultrasonic signal transmission ence of liquid in the transducer gap. When there is no
across transducer gap
liquid present, the ultrasonic signal is attenuated, and is
Figure 1 not detected by the receive crystal.
2.0 Installation
2.1 Unpacking
Unpack the instrument carefully. Inspect all units for

damage. Report any concealed damage to carrier within
24 hours. Check the contents of the packing slip and
purchase order. Check and record the serial number for
future reference when ordering parts.
Model # _____________________________________
Serial # _____________________________________
51-604 Echotel Model 910 3

2.2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Handling Procedure
Magnetrol electronic instruments are manufactured to the

highest quality standards. These instruments use electronic
components that may be damaged by static electricity
present in most work environments.
The following steps are recommended to reduce the risk of

component failure due to electrostatic discharge.
• Ship and store circuit boards in anti-static bags. If an anti-
static bag is not available, wrap the board in aluminum
foil. Do not place boards on foam packing materials.
• Use a grounding wrist strap when installing and removing
circuit boards. A grounded workstation is recommended.
• Handle circuit boards only by the edges. Do not touch
components or connector pins.
• Make sure that all electrical connections are completely
made and none are partial or floating. Ground all equip-
ment to a good, earth ground.
2.3 Preliminary Operational Check
After unpacking and before installation, perform the

following operational check on the unit in a non-
hazardous area:
1. Apply proper operating voltage to terminals L1 and L2/N.
Power supply ground should be connected to the green
ground screw in housing base.
2. Fill a suitable container with liquid.
3. Place transducer gap in the liquid. The relay output should
actuate.
4. Remove transducer from the liquid. The relay output
should de-actuate. In case of malfunction, consult
Section 3.1, Troubleshooting on page 8.
Caution: This unit contains CMOS electronics which may become
damaged by static electricity. Do not touch any semicon-
ductor devices unless you are properly grounded.
4 51-604 Echotel Model 910

2.4 Mounting
Filling line
High alarm Low alarm
Gap must be High alarm

turned vertical
Pump protection
Top View of
Horizontal Mounting
Pump
Low alarm
Figure 2
Conduit Typical Mounting Orientations
connection
Never tighten by Model 910 level switches are shipped as integral units with
turning housing the electronics assembled to the transducer. They may be
3 4 " NPT Use wrench here
mounted in a variety of positions as shown in Figures 2
thread through 5.
Figure 3
Vertical Mounting Proper orientation of the transducer gap will provide
Gap must be
maximum performance in difficult applications. When
turned vertical Install so that the switch is mounted horizontally, the transducer gap
to allow medium wrench flats
are vertical must be turned vertical to allow proper drainage of the
to fall through
liquid media. See Figures 2 and 4.
Screw transducer into the opening using pipe compound

or thread tape. If flanged, bolt unit to mating flange with
proper gasket.
Tank wall Caution: Never tighten unit on the tank connection by turning the
Figure 4 housing. Use a wrench on the transducer mounting nut
Horizontal Mounting flats. Use thread tape or suitable pipe compound on the
threads. Do not overtighten.
Gap must
extend 1" (25 mm) When installed in a nozzle or pipe, the transducer gap
beyond
end of must extend into the tank at least one inch beyond the
nozzle inside tank wall. Refer to Figure 5.
Figure 5
Nozzle Mounting

2.5 Wiring
2.5.1 Power
Power connections are made at the two-position terminal
block labeled TB1 within the electronics enclosure.
Use of 14–22 AWG wire is recommended.
NOTE: Observe all applicable electrical codes and proper wiring
procedures.
1. Make sure the power is turned off.

2. Unscrew and remove the housing cover.
3. Prevent moisture seepage into housing by installing an
approved seal-drain fitting in the conduit run leading to
the unit.
4. Route wires into housing.
5. Connect ground wire to green ground screw located in
the base of the housing. DO NOT proceed until ground
connection is made.
6. After grounding is complete, connect the power leads to
proper terminals as follows:
VAC Units VDC Units
L1, L2/N +, –
Caution: In hazardous areas, do not power the unit until the
conduit is sealed and the enclosure cover is screwed
down securely.
7. Dress wiring to ensure no interference or contact with

cover or circuit board components.
TB1 Power Wiring

2.5.2 Relay
Model 910 switches have a number of possible relay
wiring options. The table below lists the relay contact
positions for all possible combinations of power failure,
condition of the transducer gap, and fail-safe jumper
position. The user must decide which combinations
constitute fail-safe and alarm conditions, and then select
the appropriate relay wiring and fail-safe position.
1. Run relay output wiring to the terminal blocks labeled
TB2 and TB3. Ensure that the load to be controlled is
within the relay’s rated capacity as shown in Section 3.3.2,
Electrical on page 10.
2. Select high or low fail-safe using the P1 jumper.
P1 Fail-safe Line Transducer Relay Terminals

Jumper Position Power Gap CM to NC CM to NO
Dry Closed Open
On
Wet Open Closed
Low level
Dry Closed Open
Failure
Wet Closed Open
Dry Open Closed
On
Wet Closed Open
High level
Dry Closed Open
Failure
Relay Output Wiring Wet Closed Open
3. Replace housing cover. Installation is complete.
Caution: Never tighten unit to the tank connection by turning the

housing. Use a wrench on the transducer mounting nut
flats. Use thread tape or suitable pipe compound on
P1
threads. Do not overtighten.
P1
LL HL
P1 Fail-safe Jumper

3.0 Reference Information
3.1 Troubleshooting
Caution: In hazardous areas, do not remove housing cover until power is disconnected and atmosphere is deter-
mined to be safe.
3.1.1 No signal with level change

a. Verify power and control circuit wiring.
b. Make sure liquid is filling the transducer gap.
c. Check for dense foam on surface or dried product in the gap. Unit will not function properly if
either condition exists.
d. Check transducer phone plugs for proper insertion in J1 and J2.
e. If control circuit does not actuate, consult factory.
3.1.2 Calibration
Model 910 switches do not require field calibration. The set point is not adjustable.
3.1.3 Switch chatter
a. Check voltage to make sure it is within tolerances shown in Section 3.3.2.
b. Check for turbulence. Relocate control or isolate from turbulence.
c. Check for excessive aeration.
d. Consult factory.
3.1.4 Control output will not de-actuate
a. Check transducer for plugged gap.
b. Check for dense foam or liquid in gap.
c. If control circuit does not de-actuate, consult factory.
3.2 Agency Approvals

AGENCY APPROVED MODEL PROTECTION METHOD AREA CLASSIFICATION
FM 910-XXXX-XXX Explosion Proof Class I, Div. 1; Groups B, C & D

Class II, Div. 1; Groups E, F, & G
Class III, NEMA Type 4X, T6
910-XXXX-XXX Non-Incendive Class I, Div. 2; Groups A, B, C, & D
Class II, Div. 2; Groups F & G
Class III, NEMA Type 4X, T5
CSA 910-XXXX-XXX Explosion Proof Class I, Div. 1; Groups C & D
Class II, Div. 1; Group E, F, & G
Class III, Type 4X, T6
910-XXXX-XXX Non-Incendive Class I, Div. 2; Groups A, B, C, & D
Class II, Div. 2; Groups E, F, & G
Class III, Type 4X, T5
ATEX 910-5XXX-XXX II 1/2 G EEx d II C T6/EEx e II T6
910-PXXX-XXX
Note: Consult factory for Brazilian INMETRO BR-Ex d IIC T6 IP66 approval. These units have been tested to EN 50081-2
and EN 50082-2 and are in compliance with
the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.

3.3 Specifications
3.3.1 Physical
inches (mm)
4.63 4.63
(117) Dia. (117) Dia.
3.00 Rotation 3.44 (87)
(76) clearance Rotation clearance
3/4"NPT
2.75 2.75
4.48 plugged (70)
(70) 4.48
(113) (113)
6.25 6.25 3/4" NPT
(158) 3/4" NPT (158)
3.50 3.50
Optional (88) Optional (88)
mounting mounting
flange flange
3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT
tank connection Actuation length ➀➁ tank connection Actuation length ➀➁
Actuation point .25 (6) Actuation point .25 (6)
.875 (22) Dia. .875 (22) Dia.
316 stainless steel housing Aluminum sand cast housing

(Single 3⁄4" NPT conduit) (Dual 3⁄4" NPT conduits)
4.63
(117) Dia.
3.44 (87) 4.63
Rotation clearance (117) Dia. 3.44 (87)
3/4"NPT Rotation clearance
2.75 3/4" NPT
plugged (70) 2.75
4.48 (plugged)
(113) 4.48 (70)
6.25 (113)
3/4" NPT
(158) 3/4" NPT
.25 (6)
1" BSP Actuation length ➁
process connection Actuation length ➀➁
Actuation point .25 (6) Actuation point .25 (6)
.875 (22) Dia. .875 (22) Dia.
Aluminum sand cast housing Aluminum sand cast housing

(Dual 3⁄4" NPT conduit w/1" BSP process connection) (Dual 3⁄4" NPT conduit with hygienic flange)
1" (Code 001) minimum with NPT threaded process connections.

2" (Code 002) minimum with hygienic or ANSI flanged process connections.
25 (Code 003) mm minimum with NPT threaded process connections.

50 (Code 005) mm minimum with 1" BSP, and hygienic or ANSI flanged process connections.

3.3.2 Electrical
Power Supply: 120 VAC (+10%/-15%), 50/60 Hz

240 VAC (+10%/-15%), 50/60 Hz
24 VDC (±10%)
Power Consumption: 2.5 VA nominal
Relay Output: Gold flash DPDT relay: 10 amps @ 120 VAC, 240 VAC, 24 VDC
Hermetically sealed DPDT relay: 5 amps @ 120 VAC, 24 VDC, and
3 amps @ 240 VAC
Repeatability: 0.078" (2 mm)
Fail-safe Configuration: Field selectable high or low
Calibration: None required
Ambient Temperature: Electronics: -40° to +158° F (-40° to +70° C)
Process Temperature: Transducer: -40° to +250° F (-40° to +121° C)
Operating/Non-Operating Pressure: 800/1500 psig (55/103 bar)
Shock ANSI/ISA-S71.03 Class SA1
Vibration ANSI/ISA-S71.03 Class VC2
Gold flash DPDT relay is rated at 8 amps when used with housing codes 5 or P
3.4 Replacement Parts
No. Description Part Number

120 VAC w/10 amp relay Z30-2043-003
240 VAC w/10 amp relay Z30-2043-004
24 VDC w/10 amp relay Z30-2043-002
1 PC Board
3 120 VAC w/5 amp HS relay Z30-2043-011
1 240 VAC w/3 amp HS relay Z30-2043-012
4
24 VDC w/5 amp HS relay Z30-2043-010
Aluminum w/FM and CSA 004-9182-002
Aluminum w/all 3 approvals 004-9182-008
2 Housing
2 Base 316 SS w/FM and CSA 004-9140-001
316 SS w/CENELEC 004-9140-001
Aluminum w/FM and CSA 004-9105-001
Aluminum w/all 3 approvals 004-9105-005
5 3 Housing
Cover 316 SS w/FM and CSA 004-9142-001
316 SS w/CENELEC 004-9142-001
4 O-Ring 012-2101-345
5 Transducer Consult factory
WARNING! Explosion hazard — Substitution of com-

ponents may impair suitability for Class 1,
Division 2 rating.
WARNING! Explosion hazard — Do not disconnect

equipment unless power has been switched
off, or the area is known to be non-
hazardous.

3.5 Model Numbers
3.5.1 Model 910
HOUSING
A Aluminum sand cast with 3⁄4" NPT dual conduit, FM or CSA approvals
Y 316 stainless steel with 3⁄4" NPT single conduit, FM or CSA approvals
P Aluminum sand cast with 3⁄4" NPT dual conduit, FM, CSA and ATEX approvals
5 316 stainless steel with 3⁄4" NPT single conduit, ATEX approval
TRANSDUCER UNIT OF LENGTH

1 English (actuation length in inches)
M Metric (actuation length in centimeters)
PROCESS CONNECTION
A 3
⁄4" NPT
2 1" NPT
9 1" BSP
3 11⁄2" hygienic flange (Compatible with Tri-Clamp® fittings)
4 2" hygienic flange (Compatible with Tri-Clamp® fittings)
1 1" 150 lb. ANSI raised face flange
C 11⁄2" 150 lb. ANSI raised face flange
D 2" 150 lb. ANSI raised face flange
E 1" 300 lb. ANSI raised face flange
F 11⁄2" 300 lb. ANSI raised face flange
G 2" 300 lb. ANSI raised face flange
INPUT POWER
0 120 VAC with 10 amp DPDT gold flash relay
1 240 VAC with 10 amp DPDT gold flash relay
2 24 VDC with 10 amp DPDT gold flash relay
H 120 VAC with 5 amp DPDT hermetically sealed relay
J 240 VAC with 3 amp DPDT hermetically sealed relay
K 24 VDC with 5 amp DPDT hermetically sealed relay
ACTUATION LENGTH
1" to 96" in 1" increments (with Transducer Unit of Length
code 1) Example: 4 inches = 004
3 cm to 244 cm in 1 cm increments (with Transducer Unit
of Length code M) Examples: 6 centimeters = 006
9 1 0
1" (code 001) minimum with NPT process connections, 2" (code 002) minimum with hygienic or ANSI flanged process connections.
2.5 cm (code 003) minimum with NPT process connections, 5 cm (code 005) minimum with 1" BSP, or hygienic or ANSI flanged
process connections.
Consult factory for longer lengths.

ASSURED QUALITY & SERVICE COST LESS
Service Policy Return Material Procedure

Owners of Magnetrol may request the return of a control So that we may efficiently process any materials that are
or any part of a control for complete rebuilding or replace- returned, it is essential that a “Return Material
ment. They will be rebuilt or replaced promptly. Controls Authorization” (RMA) number be obtained from the
returned under our service policy must be returned by factory, prior to the material’s return. This is available
Prepaid transportation. Magnetrol will repair or replace through a Magnetrol local representative or by contacting
the control at no cost to the purchaser (or owner) other the factory. Please supply the following information:
than transportation if: 1. Company Name
1. Returned within the warranty period; and 2. Description of Material
2. The factory inspection finds the cause of the claim 3. Serial Number
to be covered under the warranty. 4. Reason for Return
If the trouble is the result of conditions beyond our con- 5. Application
trol; or, is NOT covered by the warranty, there will be Any unit that was used in a process must be properly
charges for labor and the parts required to rebuild or cleaned in accordance with OSHA standards, before it is
replace the equipment. returned to the factory.
In some cases it may be expedient to ship replacement A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) must accompany
parts; or, in extreme cases a complete new control, to material that was used in any media.
replace the original equipment before it is returned. If All shipments returned to the factory must be by prepaid
this is desired, notify the factory of both the model and transportation.
serial numbers of the control to be replaced. In such
cases, credit for the materials returned will be determined All replacements will be shipped F.O.B. factory.
on the basis of the applicability of our warranty. NOTE: See Electrostatic Discharge Handling Procedure
No claims for misapplication, labor, direct or consequen- on page 4.
tial damage will be allowed.
5300 Belmont Road • Downers Grove, Illinois 60515-4499 • 630-969-4000 • Fax 630-969-9489 • www.magnetrol.com
145 Jardin Drive, Units 1 & 2 • Concord, Ontario Canada L4K 1X7 • 905-738-9600 • Fax 905-738-1306
Heikensstraat 6 • B 9240 Zele, Belgium • 052 45.11.11 • Fax 052 45.09.93
Regent Business Ctr., Jubilee Rd. • Burgess Hill, Sussex RH15 9TL U.K. • 01444-871313 • Fax 01444-871317 BULLETIN: 51-604.16
EFFECTIVE: February 2011
Copyright © 2011 Magnetrol International, Incorporated. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. SUPERSEDES: July 2010
Tri-Clamp® is a registered trademark of Ladish Co.
FI
MAX FLOW SIZES FROM MAX LIQUID PRESSURE 300 PSI (20.69 BAR) MN SERIES
10 TO 160 GPM MAX LIQUID PRESSURE 500 PSI (34.48 BAR) MM SERIES
(60 TO 600 LPM) MAX LIQUID PRESSURE 2000 PSI (137.93 BAR) MH SERIES
MN Series, "A" style control box
Flow meters,
Flow switches and
Flow transmitters
A Medium Vane-Style
For Liquids
CSA Certified NRTL/C
CE Marked (as noted)
NIST Traceable Calibration

Certificate Available
DESCRIPTION CALIBRATION
These are variable area meters All flow meters are individually
with a spring biased semi-circular calibrated for fluids with the
vane that opens wider with more viscosity you specify (up to C
F
flow. They are installed in-line 3000 SSU/650 Centistokes). D A
G
in any position. Straight pipe We also compensate for your
runs before or after the meter fluid's specific gravity. For NIST B
are not required. The simple Traceability please consult factory.
mechanical connection directly E
drives pointers, switches and
transmitters. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
The meter body, internal moving Fluid enters at A, passes

READOUTS parts, and seals are offered in a around the semi-circular vane
variety of materials to suit a wide B, exits at outlet C. The vane
The flowmeter has outputs both range of applications, such as: resists the flow because of
visual and electronic. Visual water, synthetic and petroleum the spring D. The further the
displays are either pointer (with based oils, paint, corrosives and vane is pushed the larger
inscribed scale) or numeric solvents. See selections in the the passageway E becomes.
(digital LCD). Electronic outputs “How to Order” section. This minimizes the pressure
can be mechanical switch drop. The vane shaft turns
to operate the pointer F and
closure, 4-20 mA analog or
remote signal devices such
both (for signal redundancy). LINE CONNECTION
as the switch G.
The switches can be general
purpose or rated for hazardous Ports can be threaded or flanged.
locations (all classes, groups See selections in the “How to
and divisions). The 4-20 mA Order” section.
transmitters are Intrinsically Safe
if used with approved barriers.
Viton® and Kalrez are registered trademarks

for DuPont Performance Elastomers.
1
HOW TO ORDER Select appropriate symbols and build a model code number, as in example shown:
EXAMPLE: MN - B S B 7ØGM - 8- 32ØV.9 -

SERIES BY PRESSURE RATING
Normal pressure (300 PSI) = MN
Medium pressure (500 PSI) = MM
High pressure (2000 PSI) = MH
HOUSING MATERIAL WHERE USED

Aluminum with nylon flow chamber Lube oil = A
MN only
Brass with nylon flow chamber Water = B
Naval bronze with nylon flow chamber Specialty = W
Aluminum Lube oil = D
MN or MM
Aluminum (hard coated) Lube oil with exterior
corrosion protection = E
Brass Water = F
Naval bronze Sea water = U
Stainless steel (316) Chemicals, corrosives = I
MH, MM or MN
Cast iron Oil = C
Cast iron, nickel plated Water, oil with exterior
corrosion protection = N
Carbon steel Oil = M
Carbon steel, nickel plated Water, oil with exterior
corrosion protection = J
INTERNAL MOVING PARTS

Stainless steel (300 series) Standard for water, oil = S
Stainless steel (316 series) Chemicals and corrosives = I
Titanium Sea water = T
Monel Corrosives = L
SEAL MATERIAL
Buna N Water, oil = B
EPR Hot water, caustics = E
Viton Acids, some caustics = F
Kalrez Corrosives, solvents = J
Kalrez (dynamic) & Buna N (static) Specialty = A
Kalrez (dynamic) and EPR (static) Specialty = H
Kalrez (dynamic) and Viton (static) Specialty = K
Kalrez (dynamic) and Teflon (static) Corrosives, solvents
No good on A,B or W bodies = T
MAX FLOW RATE LIQUIDS

GPM 1Ø, 15, 2Ø, 3Ø, 4Ø, 5Ø, 6Ø, 7Ø, 8Ø, 9Ø, 1ØØ, 11Ø, 12Ø, 13Ø, 14Ø, 15Ø, 16Ø = GM
LPM 4Ø, 5Ø, 6Ø, 7Ø, 8Ø, 9Ø, 1ØØ, 15Ø, 2ØØ, 25Ø, 3ØØ, 35Ø, 4ØØ, 5ØØ, 6ØØ = LM
CMH 2.25, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 1Ø, 15, 2Ø, 25, 3Ø = CMH
Hand operated globe valve integral to flowmeter body (MN series only)
No Valve = No Symbol
Valve (brass) = V
Not available on carbon steel or stainless steel housings.
Restricted to port sizes to 1-inch and flows to 30 GPM (50 GPM in 1-1/2-inch port housings)
THREADED ATTACHMENT
Pipe Size NPT BSPP BSPT Max Flow
attachment method
In Inches In GPM
Pipe size and
1/2 4 8BP 8BT 25

3/4 6 12BP 12BT 50
1 8 16BP 16BT 70
1 1/4 1Ø 2ØBP 2ØBT 70
1 1/2 12 24BP 24BT 100
2 16 160
FLANGED
Ex: 4CS150RF = 1/2", Carbon Steel, Class 150, Raised Face flange
Pipe Size In Inches Attachment Material Class Style
4 = 1/2" FW=Welded CS=Carbon Steel 15Ø RF=Ansi
FT=Threaded raised face
6 = 3/4" S=316 Stainless 3ØØ
8 = 1" 6ØØ
10 = 11/4"
12 = 11/2"
16 = 2"
FLUID CHARACTERISTICS
Viscosity number followed by a ‘V’ (for SSU), ‘C’ (for centipoise), or ‘CS’ (for
centistokes) followed by the specific gravity. Example: 32ØV.9 would indicate a
fluid with a viscosity of 320 SSU with a specific gravity of .9. For dual viscosities
(where there is a start up viscosity or where there may be a range) put in both
2 values with a slash. Example: 32Ø/15ØV.9.
A1 W L- E- 1ØD
SERVICE
Oil and dust tight (Type 12) = N
Weatherproof (Type 4) = W
Weatherproof, corrosion proof (Type 4X) = X
FLOW DIRECTION
Left to right = R
Right to left = L
Up = U
Down = D
SPECIAL OPTIONS
High-temp- 400°F for A & R Box, 300°F for transmitter options = HT
Stainless steel ID tag for customer supplied information = ST
Pin connector (See explanation for special options.) = PCxM or PCx
CSA enclosure / PVC window = C
Tempered glass window = TG
Manual override (Required for field change of set point for switch) = E
Dual spring = DS
Clearance vane for ≥ 16 GPM = Z86
316 SS external bolts on MH-I but limits pressure max to 1500 PSI = Z67MH
SWITCH SETTING
No symbol = Lowest possible setting (usually 10% of maximum flow)
Desired set point is assumed to be in flow units already selected (GPM). Give flow rate 1ØD
followed by a “D” for flow going down (flow failure) or a “U” for flow going up.
Example, 1ØD indicates a setting of 10 GPM in declining flow.
CONTROL BOX & READOUT

Standard resolution High resolution Separate junction boxes
Basic Features Additional Options pointer and inscribed scale pointer and (with terminal strips)
inscribed scale for switch & transmitter
“A”, “L” and “Z” Box “R” Box “T” Box
Materials of Construction
Polysulfone Aluminum 316 Stainless Aluminum Aluminum
No switch AØ LØ ZØ RØ
One SPDT (3 wire), CE A1 L1 Z1 R1
One high vibration SPDT (3 wire), CE A1B L1B Z1B
These options all include Two SPDT (3 wire), CE A2 L2 Z2 R2
inscribed scale and pointer Two high vibration SPDT (3 wire), CE A2B L2B Z2B
plus one of the standard One SPDT (4 wire) A3 L3 Z3 R3
(non hazardous location) Two SPDT (4 wire) A4 L4 Z4 R4
switches selected to the One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature A61 L61 Z61 R61
right. Two SPDT (3 wire) high temperature A62 L62 Z62 R62
One SPDT (3 wire) gold contact A71 L71 Z71 R71
Two SPDT (3 wire) gold contact A72 L72 Z72 R72
One SPDT hazardous location

(all classes, groups and divisions) R7
One DPDT hazardous location
These options all contain Two SPDT hazardous location
inscribed scale with pointer (all classes, groups and divisions) R18
plus hazardous location Two DPDT hazardous location
switches selected to the (all classes, groups and divisions) R19
right. Note that the box is One SPST hazardous location proximity
not rated, only the switches. (all classes, groups and divisions) R3Ø
Two SPST hazardous location proximity
One SPDT (3 wire) hermetically sealed A53 L53 Z53
Two SPDT (3 wire) hermetically sealed A54 L54 Z54
No switches (Instinsically safe with barrier) AXØ LXØ ZXØ RXØ TTØ
One SPDT (3 wire), CE RX1 TT1
These options all contain a One SPDT (4 wire) RX3 TT3
4-20 mA transmitter and one One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature RX61 TT61
of the selections to the right. One SPDT (3 wire) gold contact TT71
One SPDT (3 wire) hermetically sealed TT53
These options all include a No switches TTLØ

4-20 mA transmitter with a One SPDT (3 wire), CE TTL1
digital LCD display plus one One SPDT (4 wire) TTL3
of the selections to the right. One SPDT (3 wire) high temperature TTL61
3
ENGINEERING DATA
Maximum fluid temperature: 200°F (95°C)

Optional max. fluid temperature: 300 & 400°F (150 & 205°C) (option HT)
Maximum ambient temperature: 150°F (65°C)
Readout accuracy, full scale: ±2%
Series MN max. operating pressures: (3:1 safety factor): 300 PSI (20.69 BAR)
Series MM max. operating pressures: (3:1 safety factor): 500 PSI (34.48 BAR)
Series MH max. operating pressures: (3:1 safety factor): 2,000 PSI (137.93 BAR)
Repeatability of switches 1% of actual flow rate
MAX BYPASS ONLY DUAL SPRING*

FLOW & PRESSURE DROP FLOW Minimum Max Minimum Max
RATE Flow Pressure Flow Pressure
Units with max flows to 80 GPM GPM/LPM GPM/LPM Drop GPM/LPM Drop
(300 LPM) impose a pressure drop that PSI PSI
increases with flow from 1.9 to 3.8 PSI. 90/340 20/75 4.5 10/40 6.0
Higher flow-rated models are made 100/380 30/100 4.5 10/50 8.0
possible by having either a partial 110/400 30/100 5.0 20/90 6.8
bypass (which raises minimum indi- 120/450 40/150 5.8 20/90 6.8
cated flow), dual springs (which raises 130/500 40/150 5.8 20/90 6.8
140/550 50/170 6.5 20/90 6.8
the pressure drop), or both. The table
150/570 50/170 6.5 30/100 6.8
shows minimum flow rates and pres- 160/600 50/170 6.5 30/100 7.5
sure drops (PSI) (at max flow rates) for
models rated from 100 to 160 GPM. *When dual-spring is ordered you must specify
special option DS. Some dual-spring units also
have partial bypass to achieve high flow ranges.
SPECIAL OPTIONS
High temperature: (option HT) re- pin connector. Check the chart below switch settings, etc. Same material as
quires all-metal construction of housing/ for the number of pins required for your internals specified.
orifice cover with seals of Viton, EPR, control box selection and current type.
Insert the number of pins in the code Clearance vane: (option Z86) the swing
Kalrez or Teflon (compatible with fluid).
PC__ for a mini connector or PC__M vane is modified to pro-vide extra clear-
A thermal barrier (heat-resistant cloth)
for a micro connector. For example, a ance for liquids that contain particulate.
is added between the housing and the
PC5 would be a 5 pin mini and PC5M Available for maximum flow range of
control box, which must be used with
would be a 5 pin Micro. (See table 16 GPM or greater, this reduces the
service option "W" (weatherproof) or
below for number of pins required for turndown to a minimum of 4 GPM.
"X" (corrosion resistant). A metal scale
is provided. each option.)
Identification tag: (option ST) cus- Tempered-glass window: (option
tomer-supplied information is stamped TG) replaces the standard window. A
on a stainless steel tag that is attached tempered-glass window is employed
to the nameplate. where airborne solvents or high-ambi-
ent temperatures are common.
Multi-pin connector: Pin connectors
(option PC) are available for rapid field Manual override: (option E) provides
installation. Meters are provided with an extended shaft you can manipulate
the male half of either a micro or a mini to clear debris, simulate flow, adjust
Number of pins required for various combinations of current type, box type and switch option.
AC switch options 1, 1B, 61, 71 3 53
DC switch options 0 1, 1B, 61, 71 3 2, 2B, 54, 62, 72 53
A 3 4 6 5 3 4
Box R 3 4 6 5 3 4
RT 3
TT 3 3 4 3 4
TTL 3 3 4 3 4
*This box allows micro pin connectors only. Eg. PC3M or PC5M.
4
CONTROL BOX SELECTION GUIDE
“A” Box “A” box is selected for price and simplicity.

It holds switches (general purpose and
hermetically sealed) or 4-20mA transmitter.
You get this control box when you order any CONTROL BOX
& READOUT starting with an “A” (see "How to Order" page).
Examples: A1WR is a one switch, weatherproof box with flow from
left to right.
This control box is made of Polysulfone (standard low cost “A”) with
options for aluminum (“L”) or 316 stainless steel (“Z”).
5.50 [140mm]
PORT TO PORT
3/4" NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
6.12 [155mm] APPROX.

SWING RADIUS
Maximum installation dimensions
“R” Box “R” box is selected for greater resolution (more increments on the
inscribed scale).
It holds switches (general purpose and hazardous location all
classes groups and divisions) and 4-20mA transmitter. Switch
(standard service) and transmitter are offered in this control box
together when signal redundancy is desired.
You get this control box when you order any CONTROL BOX
& READOUT starting with an “R” (see "How to Order" page).
Examples: R1WR is a one switch, weatherproof box with flow from
left to right.
This control box is made from aluminum that is epoxy coated when
ordered for weather proof and corrosion resistant (“X”).
5.50 [140mm]
PORT TO PORT
3/4" NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION.
BOX TYPE R
ONLY
9.44 [240mm] APPROX.

SWING RADIUS
Maximum installation dimensions
5
CONTROL BOX SELECTION GUIDE
“T” Box “T” box is selected for availability of two isolated junction boxes with terminal
strips. This means that no direct wiring to switches or transmitters is required.
Digital LCD display of flow is optional (“TTL”).
It holds switches (general purpose) and 4-20mA transmitter. Switch (standard
service) and transmitter are offered in this control box together when signal
redundancy is desired. These are wired to separate junction boxes for signal
isolation.
You get this control box when you order any CONTROL BOX & READOUT
starting with a “T” (see "How to Order" page). Examples: TT1WR is a one
switch with 4-20mA transmitter, weatherproof box with flow from left to right.
This control box is made from aluminum that is epoxy coated when ordered for
weather proof and corrosion resistant (“X”).
8.02
[204mm]
5.50 [140mm]
PORT TO PORT
1/2" NPT CONDUIT CONNECTION

(2) PLACES
Maximum installation dimensions 8.20 [208mm] APPROX.

SWING RADIUS
With 150 lb R.F. flanges 12.00

(for other flanges consult factory) [305mm]
Port
Size (inches) A
1/2 3-1/2
3/4 3-7/8 A
1 4-1/4
1-1/2 5
2 6
“Flow up” or “Flow down” dimensions are the same.

Scale numbers are turned 90° to be right reading.
Universal Flow Monitors, Inc.

1755 E. Nine Mile Road • P.O. Box 249 • Hazel Park, MI 48030
Tel: 248-542-9635 • Fax: 248-398-4274
www.flowmeters.com • E-mail: ufm@flowmeters.com
6 Catalog_MN_022311_Simp
CT Series
CT SERIES FW-1 HS.CT3.1093

REPLACES
HS.CT3.0890
Cartridge Filter Housings

DESIGN FEATURES BENEFITS
n Construction: Rugged, three-piece, all metal.
n Choice of Materials: Forged brass and n Choice of
stainless steel or all stainless steel. Materials for
n Design Flexibility: 1-, 2-, or 3-high cartridge Versatile
Models. Applications
n Drilled and Tapped Mounting Pads: Ready
for mounting bracket installation.
n Easy to
Options Mount -
n Choice of gasket materials.
Saves Time
n Mounting bracket available as accessory and Labor
equipment.
APPLICABLE FILTER
CARTRIDGES n Robust, All
Micro-Klean®III (U78 & G78 Series) Metal
Micro-Wynd®II Construction
Activated Carbon
Betapure® n Long Service

Betafine ® Life
The CT Series Cartridge Filter Housings are three-piece, MPF® II

all-metal housings with ring-nut closures. These housings
are designed to meet general industrial filtration needs. Zetapor® (70006 Series)
The CT Models offer a choice in construction materials
n Easy
and are available with a forged brass head and 304 stain- STANDARD MODEL Maintenance
less steel sump or in all-316 stainless steel in one-high SPECIFICATIONS and Clean-Up
(CT101), two-high (CT102), or three-high (CT103) de- Table 1 lists the specifications for the CT Series hous-
signs. The heads on all CT Models have tapped mounting ings. Note that the maximum operating pressure listed in
pads. Mounting brackets are available as an accessory. table 1 is the rating for the housing only. Actual filter op-
The CT Models have flow rates of up to 26 GPM, and a erating temperature is dependent on the temperature
maximum operating pressure of 300 psi at 200oF. capability of the filter cartridge.
MODEL CT101 CT102 CT103 CT101 CT102 CT103 CT101A CT102A CT103A
Maximum Operating Pressure & o
300 psig @ 200 F
Temperature
Maximum Flow Rate (GPM) See Table 2.
Materials of Construction
Head Forged Brass 316 S.S. 316 S.S.
Ring Nut Forged Brass Nickel Plated Brass Nickel Plated Brass
Sump 304 S.S. 304 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S.
Centerpost NA 304 S.S. 316 S.S. NA 316 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S.
Seal Plate 304 S.S. 304 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S 316 S.S. 316 S.S 316 S.S.
Head Gasket Nitrile
Connection Sizes
Inlet/Outlet (NPT) 3
4 " & 1" 3 "
4 1"
Vent Plug - 1 8" NPT NA NA 316 S.S.
Vent Plug - 1 4" NPT NA 316 S.S. NA
Vent Plug Gasket NA Fiber NA*
Drain Plug - 1 4 NPT NA NA 316 S.S. 316 S.S. 316 S.S.
Mounting Bracket Kit Zinc Plated Steel
Options (order separately) Optional Gasket material: fluorocarbon, neoprene, or EPR .
* Two piece assembly with metal to metal seal, vent o-ring not required.
TABLE 1. - CT SERIES HOUSINGS SPECIFICATIONS
sizing. Once the flow rate for a selected cartridge is
CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS known, then use Table 2 to check whether the housing’s
The CT101, 102, and 103 Series Cartridge Filter Hous- flow rates fall within the recommended guidelines.
ings can use one, two, or three 9 3 4 “ equivalent When sizing a filter, the amount of contaminant to be re-
single-length filter cartridges, respectively. The CT102 moved needs to be considered in addition to the flow rate
and 103 Series can also use one 19 1/2" and one 29 1/4" and pressure drop. Low initial pressure drop enhances
filter cartridge respectively. Applicable CUNO filter car- filter cartridge life.
tridges include:
Micro-Klean®III - Rigid, resin bonded filter featuring Housing
Model
Inlet/
Outlet Water 80 SSU
150
SSU
300
SSU
600
SSU
1000
SSU
graded density design, broad chemical compatibility, and 3 " 16 14 13 12 10 8
a broad range of removal ratings. CT
1"
4
26 22 20 18 16 13
Micro-Wynd®II - Blanket media filter cartridge with high
TABLE 2 - MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED FLOW RATES
flow rates, low extractable levels, choice of materials, and (GPM)
cleaner, more durable, construction than conventional
wound filters. SPARE PARTS LIST
PolyPro-Klean® - Precision engineered, absolute rated CUNO distributors stock spare parts for convenience and
filter cartridges featuring 100% non-woven, melt-blown customer service. To order, specify a description of the
polypropylene media designed for optimum efficiency, part, its material, and the part number.
service life, and flow characteristics..
Description Material Part No.
Nitrile 34737-13
Activated Carbon - Self contained activated carbon filter
EPR 89305-235
with built-in prefilter for sediment removal and post-car- Head Gasket
Neoprene 89120-235
bon filter to remove carbon fines. Ideal for the removal of
Fluorocarbon 33733-13
chlorine, color, and odors caused by dissolved organics.
TABLE 3 - SPARE PARTS LIST
Betapure® - Rigid, uniform density, filter cartridge avail-
able with bi-component fibers of polyethylene and STANDARD MODEL
polypropylene, or polyester and co-polyester. DIMENSIONS
Betafine®- Pleated, 100% polypropylene filter cartridge Table 4 lists dimensions in inches and shipping weights in
with large surface area for increased dirt holding, flow and pounds for the CT Models. To find a dimension, locate
filtration efficiency. the model and part number in the Part Number column of
Table 4 and the selected dimension symbol (A through C)
Zetapor® - Pleated Nylon 66 absolute rated membrane from Figure 1.
cartridges in both charge modified and non-charged ver- NOTE: All o-rings, ring nuts, and drain plugs are inter-
sions for submicron absolute particle removal. Ideal for changeable. However, CT-A components should not be
critical use applications. used with CT components.
FLOW RATES
Table 2 lists the maximum recommended flow rates in
Gallons Per Minute (GPM) for the CT Series filter hous-
ings. Use the data on Table 2 only as a guide in
establishing housing flow capability; do not use it for filter
Housing Model Part Number A B C Shipping Weight
CT101 44153-01 11 3 8 12 7
32 3 1
2 6
CT101 44153-03 11 11 16 12 1
2 3 1
2 6
CT101 44152-01 11 133 16 12 11 16 2 155 16 6
CT101A 47310-01 11 3 4 12 9 16 3 9 16 6
CT102 44153-02 21 3 16 22 1
32 3 1
2 7 1
2
CT102 44153-04 21 1
2 22 5
16 3 1
2 7 1
2
CT102 44152-02 21 5
16 22 3 16 2 15 16 7 12
CT102A 47310-02 21 1 2 22 5
16 3 9 16 7 1
2
CT103 44153-08 31 15 16 31 25 32 3 1
2 9
CT103 44153-09 31 1 4 32 1 16 3 1
2 9
CT103 44152-03 31 1 16 31 15 16 2 15 16 9
CT103A 47310-03 31 1 4 32 1 16 3 9 16 9
TABLE 4 -DIMENSIONS
FIGURE 1 — CT MODEL
CT SERIES ORDERING GUIDE
Plant Code 01 Product Code 021
Housing Model Basic Catalog Number Inlet/Outlet NPT Housing Material Mounting Bracket Kit
CT101 44153-01 3
4 "
CT101 44153-03 1" Brass Head & 304 S.S. Sump
CT102 44153-02 3
4 " without Vent
CT102 44153-04 1"
CT103 44153-08 3
4 " Brass Head & 316 S.S. Sump 35581-001*
35581-01
CT103 44153-09 1" without Vent
CT101 44152-01
" All 316 S.S. (wetted
( parts)
CT102 44152-02 3
4
with Vent
CT103 44152-03
CT101A 47310-01
66984-01*
All 316 S.S. (wetted parts)
CT102A 47310-02 1"
with Vent
CT103A 47310-03
*Order Separately.
WARRANTY
Seller warrants its equipment against defects in workmanship Seller to be defective. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY
and material for a period of 12 months from date of shipment OTHER WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AS
from the factory under normal use and service and otherwise TO DESCRIPTION, QUALITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
when such equipment is used in accordance with instructions FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, OR ANY OTHER
furnished by Seller and for purposes disclosed in writing at the MATTER. Under no circumstances shall Seller be liable to
time of purchase, if any. Any unauthorized alteration or modifi- Buyer or any third party for any loss of profits or other direct or
cation of the equipment by Buyer will void this warranty. Seller’s indirect costs, expenses, losses or consequential damages aris-
liability under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement or ing out of or as a result of any defects in or failure of its products
repair, F.O.B. point of manufacture, of any defective equipment or any part or parts thereof or arising out of or as a result of
or part which, having been returned to the factory, transportation parts or components incorporated in Seller’s equipment but not
charges prepaid, has been inspected and determined by the supplied by the Seller.
Your Area Distributor Is:
© CUNO INCORPORATED, 1994 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Installation and Operating Instructions
Model CT Series Filter Housing Fluid Purification
READ ME FIRST!
CAUTION! Always use the appropriate safety gear (i.e., goggles, glasses, etc.) when in-
stalling the filter housing or changing the filter cartridge. Ensure that system pressure has
been relieved or the filter pressure isolated from the system prior to opening the housing.
Never exceed the maximum operating pressure/temperature of the housing.
Liquid Service: 300 psi @ 200 F
Air/Gas Service: 180 psi @ 200 F
NOTE: Filter housings are normally shipped OPTIONAL MOUNTING

BRACKET
without cartridges. Before putting filter in serv-
ice, be certain that the proper filter cartridges
are installed.
HOUSING INSTALLATION
Note ARROW marking on filter head which in-
dicates direction of flow through the filter. DO
NOT install filter housing backwards. Install fil- DRAIN LOCATION
ter vertically with pipe connections at the top. BY PART NUMBER
NO DRAIN
47783-01
FILTER CARTRIDGE INSTALLATION AND 47783-02
47783-03
47783-04
REPLACEMENT
CENTER DRAIN
44152-01
A. Relieve pressure in filter housing:
1. If the outlet line can be opened to atmo- OFF-SET DRAIN
44152-02
spheric pressure, shut off the inlet line 44152-03

44152-04
44152-05
and open the outlet line. 44152-06
2. If the outlet line must remain pressurized,

shut-off the upstream and downstream
isolation valves and bleed-off pressure in
the section isolated. (This can be done
easily by installing an isolation valve with C. (Cartridge Replacement only) Empty liquid
a bleed-off.) from shell, retaining old cartridge. Then
NOTE: Some models are equipped with a take out old cartridge(s). Clean all parts
vent plug on head to permit bleeding off and replace the sump-to-head o-ring
the pressure. gasket if necessary.
B. Unscrew ring nut from head and slide D. Install new cartridges on top of the seal
sump down off the head. Some models are plate in models that have the seal plate
equipped with drain plugs to allow draining welded to the inside bottom of the sump.
the filter prior to dismantling. For all other models, slide the cartridge(s)
LITHSCT.0802 REPLACES LITHSCT.0302 © CUNO INCORPORATED, 1993 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

over post and seal plate assembly. Place REPLACEMENT PARTS
new cartridge(s) into sump and
Your CUNO Distributor stocks replacement
reassemble sump to head.
parts for your convenience. To order, specify
E. Hand-tighten the ring nut. After filter catalog number, description of part, ma-
hand-tighten, insert the ring nut tool (pin terial and quantity required.
wrench) into the ring-nut and tighten an
additional one-half turn. DO NOT operate
without meeting this minimum thread
engagement.
STARTING OPERATION
Slowly open the inlet valve to fill the filter.
Check for leaks. If the filter leaks, shut off the
inlet valve and relieve system pressure. Re-
move the ring nut. Inspect the o-ring for dirt,
contamination, or damage. Clean or replace
the o-ring if necessary. Check the seal areas
for damage. If o-ring and seal surfaces are in
good condition, re-tighten ring nut. Again,
check for leaks. Then open the inlet and the
outlet valves fully. Filter is now in operation.
CARTRIDGE LIFE
The period at which cartridges should be re- Your CUNO Master Distributor is:
placed can only be determined by actual ex-
perience in your own system. However, it is
generally recommended that cartridges be re-
placed when differential pressure across the
filter reaches 25--35 psi, or if the filter has
been in service for six months.
Service Worldwide
Visit us at www.cuno.com Fluid Purification
CUNO Pacific Pty Ltd CUNO GmbH CUNO Srl CUNO Filtration Asia Pte Ltd
140 Sunnyholt Road Wihl-Th-Römheld-Str. 32 Via Zara, 38 18 Tuas Link 1 (3rd Floor) CUNO Incorporated
Blacktown, NSW 2148 55130 Mainz 20032 Cormano (Mi) Singapore 638597
Australia Germany Italy 400 Research Parkway
CUNO Latina Ltda CUNO Europe SA CUNO K.K. CUNO Ltd
Meriden, CT 06450, U.S.A.
Rua Amf Do Brasil 251 19 Avenue de la Sablière Hodogaya Station 21 Woking Business Park Tele: (800) 243-6894
18120 Mairinque-Sp ZI de la Sablière Building 6F Albert Drive (203) 237-5541
Brazil BP 81 - 94372 Sucy en Brie Cedex 1-7 Iwai-cho, Hodogaya-ku Woking, Surrey GU215JY
France Yokohama 240 Japan United Kingdom Fax: (203) 238-8977
LITHSCT.0802 REPLACES LITHSCT.0302 © CUNO INCORPORATED, 1993 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

CV-1A,1B,1C
Check Valve 4000
1/2" up to 2"
Non-return valve for backflow prevention
• All wetted parts stainless steel

• Compact design
• Sealing material PTFE
Technical Data
Nominal sizes 1/2" - 2"
Body material Stainless steel 316 L
Material inner parts Stainless steel 316 Ti
Material seating seal Teflon (PTFE)
NPT-thread 1/2" - 2"
Connections
(welding ends on request)
Pressure class 580 psi
Maximum differential pressure
235 psi (higher on request)
(back pressure)
cracking/lifting pressure 3 psi
Temperature range -5°F to +390°F
Dimensions in inches
DN A H D S Lg Ls SW1 SW2 Cv value Weight Ordering
Rp lbs number
15 NPT 1/2" 1,69 0,84 0,08 2,56 3,15 1,06 0,98 3,02 0,55 4051500
20 NPT 3/4" 2,13 1,06 0,09 2,95 3,54 1,26 1,22 6,96 0,93 4051501
25 NPT 1" 2,54 1,33 0,10 3,54 3,94 1,61 1,54 13,34 1,43 4051502
32 NPT 1/ 1/4" 3,11 1,67 0,10 4,33 4,33 1,97 1,89 21,46 2,43 4051503
40 NPT 1 1/2" 3,54 1,90 0,10 4,72 4,72 2,36 2,17 32,48 3,31 4051504
50 NPT 2" 4,06 2,37 0,11 5,91 5,91 2,36 2,68 47,56 4,85 4051505
Body with Threaded Ends Body with Welded Ends

BULLETIN NO. 120/11
(SUPERSEDES BULLETIN NO. 120/02)
®
Mid-West Instrument DP
“Piston Type”
Differential Pressure Gauges
Switches & Transmitters
Model 120
A low cost differential pressure gauge for use in measuring the pressure drop across filters,
strainers, separators, valves, pumps, chillers, etc., and for local flow indication and control.
• Simple, rugged, compact design.

Model 120 • Working pressures up to 6,000 PSIG (400 bar)
0-50 PSID • Over-range protection to maximum pressure.
2-1/2” Dial • Body Materials: Aluminum or 316L Stainless Steel
with 316 stainless steel internals.
Aluminum Bronze & Monel available upon request.
• Weather-resistant construction standard.
• Shatter resistant acrylic lens.
• Variety of Dial type and Sizes: 2-1/2”, 3-1/2” & 4-1/2”
(Uni-directional or Bi-directional)
• Available DP Ranges: Inches H2O, PSID, bar, and Kpa
• ¼” FNPT & ½” FNPT Process Connections
Due to precision sizing of piston and • Multiple mounting options available
body bore, leakage across piston will • Temperature Limits: -40°F(-40°C) to +200°F(+93°C)
not exceed 15 SCFH air at 100 PSID
at ambient temperature.
Model 120
0-50 PSID
4-1/2” Dial
Model 120
0-50 PSID
With Special 3 Color Dial
An optional maximum indication follower pointer provides automatic indication of

maximum differential occurring during a time period or system cycle.
Model 120 0-30 PSID Reversed pressure ports are optionally available to facilitate installation and
With Maximum Follower Pointer readability depending on which side of a filter, etc., the instrument must be installed.
Max. ΔP MWP
Model Body Material Accuracy Min. ΔP Range Range PSIG (Bar) Switch Options
Aluminum & 0-5 PSID 0-110 PSID ALM.= 3,000 (200) 1 & 2 switch
120 316L S.S. ±2% (0-0.35 bar) (0-7 bar) S.S. = 6,000 (400) Hermetically Sealed
Proof Pressure: Two times rated working pressure at ambient temperature

Standards: Model 120 Gauge either conforms to and/or is designed to the requirements of the following standards:
ASME B1.20.1 NACE MR0175
ASME B40.100 NEMA Std. No. 250
CSA-C22.2 No. 14.25 and 30 SAE J514
EN-61010-1 UL Std. No. 50,508 and 1203
“Piston Type”
Differential Pressure Gauge
Switch & Transmitter Options
Models 120, 122, 123 & 124
The Model 120-124 Series DP gauges are available with one or two hermetically sealed reed switches or 4-20mA transmitter
depending on model. (See chart below)
The switches are adjustable (see table for adjustment range) within a defined percentage of the full scale range of the gauge and
are available in SPDT and SPST, normally open or normally closed configurations for various load power ratings. The switches can
be set to activate or deactivate on rising or falling pressure.
The standard reed switch is enclosed in a weather-resistant plastic housing. Adjustment of the switch setting is made with an
external screw adjustment.
The switch functionality will be different for gauges with bi-directional operation for positive and negative delta pressure. For
example a SPDT switch with positive .P applied to the gauge, the red wire will be N.O. and the black will be N.C.. For negative .P
the functionality will be reversed.
Location for a single SPDT (grommet or conduit) switch will be on the bottom of the gauge body for a normal port and on the top for
a reverse port. Locations for a single SPST (grommet or conduit) N.O. or SPST N.C. switch will be on the bottom and top
respectively for a normal port gauge. The locations will be reversed for a reverse port gauge.
A non-indicating (no dial) differential pressure switch is also available.
Hazardous Location switches are 3rd Party Certified Class I Div 2 or Class I Div 1 dependant on type of switch. Listings are for the
entire design and not just the enclosure. Standard and weatherproof units are CE marked for conformance with the Low Voltage
Directive to harmonized standard EN 61010-1.
Transmitters feature Microprocessor based, external zero interface, 8-28 Vdc loop powered, 2 wire interface. Standard output of
4-20mA with a max loop resistance of 1000 Ohms.
•120, •120,
^122,+123, •120,^122, ^122,+123, •120, •120,
Model +124 •123, +124 •123,•124 •123,•124 121, 124
Type SPDT SPDT SPST NO SPST NC SPST NO/NC 4-20mA
Power 3W 60 W 60 W 60 W 60 W 4-20 mA Loop Power
8-28 VDC Loop
Powered
Max Current 0.25 Amps 1.0 Amps 3.0 Amps 3.0 Amps 3.0 Amps 2-Wire interface
Max Voltage 1000 Ohm max Loop
VAC/VDC 125 240 240 240 240 resistance at 28 vdc
•10-90% •25-100% •25-95%
Setting ^10-100% ^25-100% ^25-100%

Full Scale +15-90% +25-95% •25-95% •25-95% 20-100%
Hysterisis
(Max / Norm) 10% / 5% (FS) 20% / 13% (FS) 15% / 8% (FS) 15% / 8% (FS) 15% / 8% (FS) N/A
Repeatability 1% F.S. 1% F.S. 1% F.S. 1% F.S. 1% F.S. 1% F.S
Leads 22 Awg (3) 24" (3) 24" (2) 24" (2) 24" (2) 24" N/A
6500 Dobry Dr. • Sterling Heights, MI 48314 USA • Tel: 800-648-5778 Tel: 586-254-6500 Fax: 586-254-6509
Web Site: www.midwestinstrument.com • Email: sales@midwestinstrument.com
®
Mid-West Instrument
Standard Dial Ranges: Model 120, 122, 123, 124
Range Type
PSID Kpa Bar Dual Scale
0-5 PSID 0-35 Kpa 0-1.0 Bar 0-5 PSID & 0-0.35 Kg/Cm2
0-10 PSID 0-70 Kpa 0-1.6 Bar 0-5 PSID & 0-35 KPA
0-15 PSID 0-100 Kpa 0-2.0 Bar 0-10 PSID & 0-0.7 BAR
0-20 PSID 0-160 Kpa 0-2.5 Bar 0-10 PSID & 0-0.7 KG/CM2
0-25 PSID 0-250 kpa 0-4.0 Bar 0-10 PSID & 0-70 KPA
0-30 PSID 0-400 Kpa 0-6.0 Bar 0-100 PSID & 0-7 BAR
0-50 PSID 0-600 Kpa 0-7.0 Bar 0-100 PSID & 0-7 KG/CM2
0-60 PSID 0-700 Kpa 0-100 PSID & 0-700 KPA
0-75 PSID 0-15 PSID & 0-1 BAR
0-100 PSID 0-15 PSID & 0-1 KG/CM2
0-110 PSID 0-15 PSID & 0-100 KPA
**0-150 PSID 0-20 PSID & 0-1.4 BAR
**0-200 PSID 0-20 PSID & 0-140 KPA
**0-250 PSID 0-25 PSID & 0-1.75 BAR
**0-300 PSID 0-25 PSID & 0-1.75 KG/CM2
**0-400PSID 0-25 PSID & 0-175 KPA
0-30 PSID & 0-2 BAR
Bi-Directional Bi-Directional Bi-Directional 0-30 PSID & 0-2 KG/CM2
5-0-5 PSID 40-0-40 Kpa 0.4-0-0.4 Bar 0-30 PSID & 0-200 KPA
10-0-10 PSID 60-0-60 Kpa 0.6-0-0.6 Bar 0-50 PSID & 0-3.5 BAR
15-0-15 PSID 100-0-100 Kpa 1-0-1 Bar 0-50 PSID & 0-3.5 KG/CM2
30-0-30 PSID 400-0-400 Kpa 4-0-4 Bar
50-0-50 PSID 600-600 Kpa 6-0-6 Bar
60-0-60 PSID
100-0-100 PSID
Bi-Directional ranges available for Model 120 4-1/2” Dials only.
The above mentioned ranges are some of the most popular requested today. Mid-West Instrument
can provide special un-cataloged dial range requirements. As well as multiple scale dials, multiple
color dials and special decals. Please consult factory for complete information.
Model Min. ΔP Range Max. ΔP Range
120 0-5 PSID (0-0.35 bar) 0-110 PSID (0-7 bar)
122 0-5 PSID (0-0.35 bar) 0-100 PSID (0-7 bar)
**123 0-150 PSID (0-10 bar) 0-100 PSID (0-7 bar)
0-5 PSID (0-0.35 bar) 0-110 PSID (0-7 bar)
**124 0-150 PSID (0-10 bar) 0-400 PSID (0-27.0 bar)
Proof Pressure: Two times rated working pressure at ambient temperature

Temperature Limits: -40°F (-40°C) to +200°F (+93°C) - These limits are based on the entire
instrument being saturated to these temperatures. System (process) temperatures may exceed these
limitations with proper installation. Contact our customer service representative for details.
Standards: Model 120 -124 Series gauges either conform to and/or are designed to the requirements
of the following standards:
ASME B1.20.1 NACE MR0175
ASME B40.100 NEMA Std. No. 250
CSA-C22.2 No. 14.25 and 30 SAE J514
EN-61010-1 UL Std. No. 50,508 and 1203
Standard Model Specifications: 120-AA-00-OO
3000 PSIG Working Pressure, Aluminum Body & End Plugs, Stainless Steel Piston,
Ceramic Magnet, Buna-N Seals, ¼” FNPT Back Connections,
2-1/2” round dial, Engineered Plastic Case with Shatter Resistant Acrylic Lens,
Accuracy ±2% Full Scale (Ascending)
Mid-West Instrument
Range 0-5 PSID to 0-110PSID (0.35 to 7.0 bar)
1-800-648-5778
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 0
Basic Model
Range:_________________
2 Material
A Aluminum Body / Stainless Steel Piston
S 316 S.S Body / Stainless Steel Piston
M Monel Body / Monel Piston
N Aluminum Bronze Body / Aluminum Bronze Piston
Z Special (Un-coded Options)
3 Dial Size & Type
A 2-1/2" Round Uni-Directional Dial w/Engineered Plastic Dial Case
C 4-1/2" Round Uni-Directional Dial w/Engineered Plastic Dial Case
D 4-1/2" Round Bi-Directional Dial w/Engineered Plastic Dial Case
E 3-1/2" Round Uni-Directional Dial w/Anodized Aluminum Housing Dial Case
G 4-1/2" Round Uni-Directional Dial w/Anodized Aluminum Housing Dial Case
H 4-1/2" Round Bi-Directional Dial w/Anodized Aluminum Housing Dial Case
T Non-Indicating DP Switch Only
4 Seal Materials
0 Buna-N (Standard)
1 Viton®-A Registered Trademark of Dupont
2 Neoprene
4 Teflon®-A Registered Trademark of Dupont
5 Ethylene Propylene
6 Perfluorelastomers
9 Special (Un-coded Options)
5 Process Connections
0 1/4" FNPT Back Connections (Standard) (Not available on M & N body materials)
2 1/4" FNPT End Connections
3 1/4" FNPT Bottom Connections
4 1/2" FNPT End Connections
6 7/16"-20 Straight Thread "O" Ring Port (Back Connection)
9 Special (Un-coded Options)
Factory preset switches at no charge (Specify Setting)
Standard Model Specifications – continued Model 120
6 Additional Options
O None
A Reversed High / Low Process Connections. (Not available with Electrical options J & K)
C Mounting Holes in Gauge Body for Field Mounting Electrical Configurations Options A & B
D Mounting Holes in Gauge Body for Field Mounting Electrical Configurations Options L & M
E Two (2) 1/4-20 Mounting Holes (not available with C, D, E or F electrical switch options)
F Carbon Steel 2" Pipe Mounting Kit (not available with C, D, E or F electrical switch options)
G Stainless Steel 2" Pipe Mounting Kit (not available with C, D, E or F electrical switch options)
K 1/2" FNPT S.S. Adapter (not available with E or F switch option combined w/back connections)
L Liquid Fill (4-1/2" available with "G" option Aluminum Dial Case only) (not available with shatterproof lens)
M Maximum Indicator Follower Pointer (not available with Liquid fill option) (not available with shatterproof lens)
N NACE (Available for Aluminum, Stainless Steel and Monel Gauge Bodies Only)
Q CRN (Canadian Registration Number) Available on Aluminum or S.S. Body only
S Shatter Proof Glass Lens (Available only with option “G” 4-1/2” Aluminum Dial Case) (not available with liquid fill)
T Oxygen Cleaning
U Stainless Steel Tag with S.S. Wire
Stainless Steel Tag and S.S. Screw
V (Contact Factory on Switch Options) Not on Gauge Body for Hazardous Locations
W Wall Mount Kit (not available with back connections or with C, D, E or F switch options)
NOTE: Not All Options Available in Combination with other Options
7 Electrical Configurations (CE marked, except E, F, J & K) (6)
A One (1) Switch in standard enclosure with grommet Wire Seal
B Two (2) Switch in standard enclosures with grommet Wire Seal
C One (1) Switch in standard enclosure with 1/4” FNPT electrical connection NEMA 4X
D Two (2) Switch in standard enclosures with 1/4” FNPT electrical connection NEMA 4X
E One (1) Switch in general purpose enclosure, Division 2 Hazardous Locations (1) (3) (4) (5)
F Two (2) Switches in general purpose enclosure, Division 2 Hazardous Locations (1) (3) (4) (5)
G One (1) Switch & gauge in NEMA 4X plastic enclosure (Not available with end connections)
H Two (2) Switches & gauge in NEMA 4X plastic enclosure (Not available with end connections)
J One (1) Switch in explosion proof enclosure w/glass window cover, Div. 1 Hazardous Locations (2) (3) (4) (5)
K Two (2) Switches in explosion proof enclosure w/glass window cover, Div.1 Hazardous Locations (2) (3) (4) (5)
L One (1) Switch in standard enclosure with plug-in connector (DIN 43650/IP65-PG11)
M Two (2) Switch in standard enclosures with plug-in connector (DIN 43650/IP65-PG11)
(1) Complete assembly 3rd Party Certified Class I, Div.2, Groups A, B, C, & D; Class II, Div.2, Groups F and G.
(2) Complete assembly 3rd Party Certified Class I, Div.1, Groups C & D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, & G.
(3) 5000 PSIG SWP for Stainless Steel: 3000 PSIG SWP for Aluminum
(4) Not available in M and N material options
(5) 1/2" FNPT conduit connection
(6) Contact factory for Bi-directional scales with switches
8 Electrical Specifications (For Resistive Loads)
A SPDT 3W, 0.25 Amp, 125 VAC/VDC (standard) (Switch adjustable range of 10-90%)
E SPST 60W, 3.0 Amp, 240 VAC/VDC (Normally Open) (Switch adjustable range of 25-95%)
F SPST 60W, 3.0 Amp, 240 VAC/VDC (Normally Closed) (Switch adjustable range of 25-95%)
SPST 60W, 3.0 Amp, 240 VAC/VDC (1) Normally Open, (1) Normally Closed (Switch adjustable range of 25-
G 95%)
H SPDT 60W, 1.0 Amp, 240 VAC/VDC (Switch adjustable range of 25-100%)
If you are in need of additional information please visit our web site at www.midwestinstrument.com or contact
us toll free at 1-800-648-5778 and one of our knowledgeable sales coordinators will be happy to assist you…
6500 Dobry Dr. • Sterling Heights, 48314 MI USA • Tel: 800-648-5778 Tel: 586-254-6500 Fax: 586-254-6509
Web Site: www.midwestinstrument.com • Email: sales@midwestinstrument.com
IM120/10
3VM1
DS9596-1211
DUPLEX STRAINER f DUAL BALL TYPE f THREE PIECE BODY

DS-1
TITAN
® ANSI CLASS 125 / 150 f FLANGED & THREADED ENDS
TITAN FLOW CONTROL, INC.
new
Three-Piece
Design!
MODELS: DS 595-CI
( T h read ed - C as t I ro n )
DS 695-CI
( F l an ged - C as t I ron )
DS 596-CS/SS
( T h read ed - C ar b on o r S ta i n l e ss S te e l )
DS 696-CS/SS 2" DS 695-CI

( F l an ged - C ar b o n o r S ta i n l e ss S te e l )
s

F
FE ATURES
d ua l - b a l l d i v e rt e r d e s i g n
SIZE RANGE: 3/4 "

t h i s d u p l e x i s d e s i g n e d w i t h t w o s ta i n l e s s s t e e l b a l l s t h at e f f i c i e n t ly
~ 4" TECHNICAL
T
PRESSURE/ TEMPERATURE RATING (1)
CAST IRON - A126 GR. B - CLASS 125
d i v e rt t h e p i p e l i n e f l o w f ro m o n e b a s k e t c h a m b e r to t h e ot h e r . t e f l o n
s e at s e n s u r e a p o s i t i v e s e a l a n d h e l p to p r e v e n t s e e pa g e i n to t h e c h a m b e r
WOG (Non-shock): 200 PSI @ 150 °F
t h at i s b e i n g s e rv i c e d f o r c l e a n i n g .
Saturated Steam: Not Recommended
s e a s y to o p e r at e Max Liquid: 200 PSI @ 150 °F
t i ta n f c i ' s d u p l e x s t r a i n e r f e at u r e s a l o w to r q u e , e a s y to o p e r at e h a n d l e
t h at d o e s n ot r e q u i r e a g e a r b ox . a d d i t i o n a l ly , t h e h a n d l e ' s p o s i t i o n PRESSURE/ TEMPERATURE RATING (1)
c l e a r ly i n d i c at e s w h i c h b a s k e t i s i n s e rv i c e a n d w h i c h b a s k e t c a n s a f e ly b e CARBON STEEL - A216 GR. WCB - CLASS 150
r e m ov e d f o r c l e a n i n g .
WOG (Non-shock): 200 PSI @ 150 °F
s reduced "in-line" maintenance
Saturated Steam: Not Recommended
t i ta n ' s d u p l e x h a s n u m e ro u s at t r i b u t e s t h at h e l p r e d u c e m a i n t e n a n c e
Max Liquid: 200 PSI @ 150 °F
d u r i n g c l e a n i n g o p e r at i o n s . f i r s t , t h e d u a l b a l l d e s i g n i s o l at e s e a c h
c h a m b e r a n d k e e p s t h e s e rv i c i n g c h a m b e r d ry d u r i n g c l e a n i n g . next, there
PRESSURE/ TEMPERATURE RATING (1)
a r e n o s p e c i a l to o l s r e q u i r e d to a c c e s s a n d r e m o v e t h e s t r a i n i n g e l e m e n t STAINLESS STEEL- A351 GR. CF8M - CLASS 150
f ro m t h e c h a m b e r . f i n a l ly , t h e d u p l e x p ro v i d e s c o v e r v e n t s , d r a i n p l u g s ,
a n d f o ot pa d s o n e a c h c h a m b e r . WOG (Non-shock): 200 PSI @ 150 °F
s endless screen options Saturated Steam: Not Recommended
t h i s s t r a i n e r c a n b e f i t t e d w i t h v i rt u a l ly a n y c o n f i g u r at i o n o f Max Liquid: 200 PSI @ 150 °F
p e r f o r at i o n o r m e s h l i n e d s t r a i n i n g e l e m e n t s . straining elements can also
1. The above listed temperatures are theoretical and
b e c o n s t r u c t e d f ro m s p e c i a l m at e r i a l s s u c h a s a l l oy 2 0 .
may vary during actual operating conditions.
APPLICATIONS
g e n e r a l a p p l i c at i o n : t h e d u p l e x s t r a i n e r i s a u n i q u e p ro d u c t w i t h i n t h e p i p e l i n e i n d u s t ry . l i k e ot h e r
b a s k e t s t r a i n e r s , t h e d u p l e x s t r a i n e r p rot e c t s e x p e n s i v e d o w n s t r e a m e q u i p m e n t b y m e c h a n i c a l ly r e m o v i n g
A
s o l i d s f ro m f l o w i n g f l u i d s v i a a p e r f o r at e d , m e s h , o r w e d g e w i r e s t r a i n i n g e l e m e n t . h o w e v e r , t h e d u p l e x
s t r a i n e r i s d e s i g n e d w i t h t w o b a s k e t c h a m b e r s a n d a f l o w d i v e rt e r s y s t e m t h at a l l o w s t h e p i p e l i n e f l o w
to b e s w i t c h e d f ro m o n e c h a m b e r to t h e ot h e r , c o m p l e t e ly i s o l at i n g t h e f l o w to a s i n g l e c h a m b e r . this
m a k e s t h e d u p l e x s t r a i n e r i d e a l f o r n o n - i n t e r u p ta b l e a p p l i c at i o n s t h at c a n n ot b e s h u t d o w n d u r i n g
ro u t i n e m a i n t e n a n c e a n d c l e a n i n g o p e r at i o n s .
The above data represents common market and ser vice a p p l i c a t i o n s . N o re p re s e n t a t i o n o r g u a ra n t e e , e x p re s s e d o r i m p l i e d , i s g i v e n d u e t o t h e n u m e ro u s v a r i a t i o n s

of concentrati o ns , te mpe rature s and fl ow co nditio ns that m ay o c c ur dur i ng ac t ual se r v i c e .
TITAN FLOW CONTROL, INC.

YOUR PIPELINE TO THE FUTURE!
Tel: 910-735-0000 s Fax: 910-738-3848 s titan@titanfci.com s www.titanfci.com
290 Corporate Drive s PO Box 7408 s Lumberton, NC 28358
DS9596-1211
DUPLEX BASKET STRAINER
TITAN FLOW CONTROL, Inc. DS 595/695-CI
ANSI
290 Corporate Drive E-mail: titan@titanfci.com DS 596-CS/SS Class
TITAN Lumberton, NC 28358 Web: www.titanfci.com DS 696-CS/SS
Tel: 910.735.0000 Fax: 910.738.3848 125/150
®
Dual Ball Type • 3-Piece Body • Threaded and Flanged Ends
Cut View
7
BILL OF MATERIALS (1)
6
No. Part DS 595/695-CI DS 596/696-CS DS 596/696-SS
Seat
Cast Iron Carbon Steel Stainless Steel
1 Main Body / Basket Housing
A126 Gr. B A216 Gr. WCB A351 Gr. CF8M
2 Straining Element (2) Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel 8
Cast Iron Carbon Steel Stainless Steel

3 Cover
A126 Gr. B A216 Gr. WCB A351 Gr. CF8M
3
4 Ball Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
5 O-Ring Straining Element Buna-N Buna-N Viton

1
6 Seat Seal Teflon (PTFE) Teflon (PTFE) Teflon (PTFE)
7 Seals Buna-N Buna-N Viton 5

Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel
8 Handle
Zinc Coated Zinc Coated Zinc Coated
1. Bill of Materials represents standard materials. Equivalent or better materials may be substituted at the 2
4
manufacturer's discretion.
2. Denotes recommended spare parts. Cut parts shown with hatch.
Illustrations are representative of a 1" DS696-CS (Flanged
model). Please ask for certified drawings when required.
Front View
DIMENSIONS AND PERFORMANCE DATA (1)
in (4) 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 (5) (5)
3/4 3 4
SIZE (2)
mm 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
E C AF DIMENSION in --- 7.0 9.37 9.37 10.6 13.5 13.5 16.0
Basket Height FLANGED FACE TO FACE mm --- 178 238 238 270 343 343 406
Removal with
D in 5.59 5.59 7.5 7.5 10.0 11.5 --- ---
Handle AT DIMENSION
Center
THREADED FACE TO FACE
Line to mm 142 142 191 191 254 292 --- ---
Bottom B DIMENSION in 12.95 12.95 15.12 15.12 18.43 22.05 22.0 26.85
UNIT WIDTH (including plug)
mm 329 329 384 384 468 560 560 682
B C DIMENSION in 11.0 11.0 14.2 14.2 17.7 22.0 22.0 25.2
Unit Width HEIGHT WITH HANDLE
mm 280 280 360 360 450 560 560 640
D DIMENSION in 5.83 5.83 8.3 8.3 10.7 13.7 13.7 15.9
Top View CENTER LINE TO BOTTOM
mm 148 148 211 211 271 347 347 403
E DIMENSION in 15.4 15.4 21.3 21.3 26.4 35.0 35.0 41.0
BASKET REMOVAL
mm 390 390 541 541 670 885 885 1040
AF / AT
Face to Face APROXIMATE WEIGHT lb --- 46.3 73.9 73.9 121.3 237.0 238.1 373.7
CAST IRON, FLANGED
kg --- 21 33.5 33.5 55 107.5 108 169.5
APROXIMATE WEIGHT lb 43.7 43.0 69.9 69.5 119.0 227.0 --- ---
CAST IRON, THREADED
kg 19.8 19.5 31.7 31.5 54 103 --- ---
Dimensions and Performance Data Notes: APROXIMATE WEIGHT lb --- 47.4 77.2 78.3 133.4 250.2 253.5 384.7
1. Dimensions, weights, and flow coefficients are provided for CS / SS STEEL, FLANGED
kg --- 21.5 35 35.5 60.5 113.5 115 174.5
reference only. Always request certified drawings.
APROXIMATE WEIGHT lb 45.2 44.8 75.0 73.9 125.7 231.5 --- ---
2. Larger sizes (5" ~ 8") are available upon request. Please contact
CS / SS STEEL, THREADED
factory for pricing and delivery. kg 20.5 20.3 34 33.5 57 105 --- ---
3. Flow Coefficients are based on clean, perforated screens. Flow Coefficient (3) Cv 13 14 19 24 42 68 105 180
4. Flanged units are not available in 3/4" size.
5. Threaded units are not available in 3" or 4" sizes. REFERENCED STANDARDS & CODES
Code Description
STANDARD SCREEN SELECTIONS
ASME/ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
Size Liquid Open Area Steam Open Area
ASME/ANSI B16.4 Cast Iron Pipe Threaded Fittings
3/4" ~ 4" 1/16 (.0625) 41% Not Recommended
ASME/ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME/ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding, and Threaded
MATERIAL TEMPERATURES
Seat/Seal/Ball Temp Range PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE RATING
Teflon (PTFE) -100 ~ 400 °F Class 125/150 DS 595/695-CI DS 596/696-CS DS 596/696-SS
Buna-N -20 ~ 250 °F WOG (Non-shock) 200 PSI @ 150 °F 200 PSI @ 150 °F 200 PSI @ 150 °F
Viton -40 ~ 400 °F Saturated Steam Not Recommended Not Recommended Not Recommended
Stainless Steel Ball Max 450 °F Max Liquid 200 PSI @ 150 °F 200 PSI @ 150 °F 200 PSI @ 150 °F
Titan FCI makes every effort to ensure the information presented on our literature accurately reflects exact product specifications. However, as product changes occur, there may be short-term differences between actual product
specifications and the information contained within our literature. Titan FCI reserves the right to make design and specification changes to improve our products without prior notification. When required, request certified drawings.
INDUSTRIAL HEAVY-DUTY
REPAIRABLE STAINLESS GAUGES SERIES PR
• Stainless Steel Case and Bayonet Ring CPI
• Stainless Steel Wetted Parts • Repairable
• All Welded Construction (4”& 6”) • Glycerine Filled or Dry/Fillable
• Blowout Relief (Safety Feature - 4”& 6”)
Specifications
Case: 304 Stainless Steel
Ring: Stainless Steel Bayonet, Repairable
Lens: Laminated Safety Glass (4” & 6”), Plastic (2.5”, 3.5”)
Dial: Aluminum, Black Figures on White Background
Pointer: Adjustable
Wetted Parts: 316 Stainless Steel with Restrictor Screws
Accuracy: 1.6% Full Scale (2.5”, 3.5”)
1.0% Full Scale (4” & 6”)
Applications
The PR Series gauge offers rugged, all-welded
stainless steel construction. In 4” and 6” dials, the
tube, socket and case are all welded together,
offering superior case sealing and gauge integrity.
The stainless steel case, tube and socket make the
gauge ideal for applications involving corrosive
environment or media. Liquid Filling (at the factory
or in the field) is usually recommended for severe
service. The removable bayonet ring makes the PR
gauge field repairable.
HOW TO ORDER
PR 40 S 1 C 2 P23 G
Dial: Case: Tube & Mounting: Connection: Range Code: Filling:

25 = 2.5” S = 304 St. Steel, Socket: A= Bottom 4 = 1/4” NPT See Page 12 for D = Dry (Fillable)
Bayonet Ring Range Codes
1 = 316 St. (2.5”, 4”)
35 = 3.5” G = Glycerine
Plastic Lens (2.5”) Steel Standard Ranges:
40 = 4” B= Bottom/Rear Flange 2 = 1/2” NPT
Laminated Glass 3 = Monel (4”, 6”) 2.5”,3.5” vac to 10,000 PSI Other fills on request.
60 = 6” (4” & 6”) 4”,6” vac to 15,000 PSI
C= Back 5 = 1/4” High Higher Ranges Available
Pressure to 50,000 PSI
D= Back /“U” or “O” Clamp Female Options:
Conn. • Custom / Logo Dials • Chemical Seals
E= Back/Front Flange 8 = 1/8” NPT • Removed Restrictor Screw • Peak Indicators (2.5” & 4”)
(2.5”) • Electric Contacts 4” optional
5
Service Inspired, Quality Driven
SERIES RTDX Series PR40
4” Heavy-Duty Repairable Stainless Gauge ¡ ¢ £ ¢ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © ª
REOTEMP’s Series PR gauge offers rugged, all-welded stainless steel construction ideal for heavy-duty industrial
applications. The stainless steel case, tube, and socket are welded together for superior case sealing and gauge
integrity. The twist-off bayonet ring offers easy-access for field repair and calibration services. Liquid filling (at the
factory or in the field) is recommended for applications involving vibration. For high-corrosive, high-temp, or severe
service applications, a diaphragm seal is recommended.
PI
) . & & 2 % * ,
3 # ! 3 /
4 5 * & 6 ! 2
3 * / / & + 4 / 4 / 7 /
* 3

! "

# $ % & '
( % "

) * # * # + , - . (
, - / % * &

, - ) * # * # + ) & 0 * !

1 + ' % & )
*dimensions in inches
HOW TO ORDER
PR 40 S 1 A 4 P18 G
Dial: Case: Tube & Socket: Mounting: Connection: Range Code: Filling: Options:
40 = 4” S = 304SS 1 = 316SS 4 = 1/4” NPT See Page 12 of - - = Dry Custom Dial
A= Bottom Press. Product
3 = Monel 2 = 1/2” NPT G = Glycerine Max Pointer
Catalog for
B= Bottom/Rear Flange 5 = 1/4”Female Range Codes S = Silicone Hi-Vis Dial
High - Pressure Diaph. Seal
C= Lower Back Vac. to 20,000 PSI
D= Back U-Clamp
E= Back/Front Flange
F= Back/Rear Flange
n o p q r s t u v w x r s y x s z { q t u | o } ~
T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ ` a b \ ^ ] c d \ e f b g h i j k l m c m k m
8 9 : ; < < = > ? ; @ A A B A J I J K L J M N H O K M
P Q R P S
C D : ; E ; = A ; ? @ < A F < G G G H I J K L J M N H O K M

12
Telephone: (800) 648-7737 FAX (858) 784-0720 • sales@reotemp.com • www.reotemp.com
TI
Bimetal Thermometers Back Connected
Industrial 3”, 4”, 5” Dial (Angle Form)
REOTEMP Angle Form thermometers are ideal

for local, eye-level temperature readings in most
process applications.
Standard Features
• All Stainless Steel Construction

• Hermetically Sealed (ASME B40.3)
• Accurate to 1% of Full Scale
• Standard External Reset
• Silicone Fillable for Vibration
How to Order
AA 060 1 F43 SF
Models Stem Connection Temperature Ranges Options

Length See pg.13 for full list.
Standard Models Standard Threaded Fahrenheit Ranges PS = Pointed Stem
025 = 2.5” 1 = 1/2” NPT (std.) F23 -40 TO 160ºF
AA = Model A
F55* 25 TO 125ºF SF = Silicone Fill
(3” dial, reset) F43
040 = 4” 4 = 1/4” NPT 0 TO 200ºF (max temp 550ºF)
F47 0 TO 250ºF
BB = Model B F63 50 TO 300ºF
060 = 6” 5 = 3/4” NPT adapter SS = 316 SS Stem
(5” dial, reset) F67 50 TO 500ºF
090 = 9” F69 50 TO 550ºF S3 = 3/8” dia. Stem
CC = Model C X = Plain Hex Bushing F81 150 TO 750ºF
(4” dial, reset) (no threads) F85 200 TO 1000ºF
120 = 12” PC = Acrylic Window
Celsius Ranges
B = 1/2” BSPT C23 PY = Polycarbonate
Non-Reset Models 150 = 15”
-40 TO 70ºC
C55* 0 TO 50ºC Window
RR = Model R C43 0 TO 100ºC
(3” dial, no reset) 180 = 18” Sanitary
C47 -20 TO 120ºC TG = Tempered Glass
C59 0 TO 150ºC Window
SS = Model S 240 = 24” C67 0 TO 250ºC
(5” dial, no reset) C69 0 TO 300ºC MM = Max/Min Pointer
300 = 30” C81 50 TO 400ºC
CN = Model CN C85 100 TO 500ºC CC = Certificate of
(4” dial, no reset) 360 = 36” Dual F/C Ranges Conformance
For more information on D23 -40 TO 160ºF & -40 TO 70ºC
Sanitary Thermometers D55* 25 TO 125ºF & -5 TO 50ºC C1 = 1 Point Calibration
see page 12 D43 0 TO 200ºF & -10 TO 90ºC Cert.
-Intermediate D47 0 TO 250ºF & -20 TO 120ºC
D63 50 TO 300ºF & 10 TO 150ºC C3 = 3 Point Calibration
lengths available
up to 80” D67 50 TO 500ºF & 10 TO 260ºC Cert.
D69 50 TO 550ºF & 10 TO 290ºC
-Specify length in D81 150 TO 750ºF & 70 TO 400ºC For Thermowells
see pg. 14
inches + tenths D85 200 TO 1000ºF & 100 TO 500ºC
*- Not available in 2.5” stem.
REOTEMP INSTRUMENT CORPORATION

Telephone: (800) 648-7737 FAX (858) 784-0720 • sales@reotemp.com • www.reotemp.com
4
Product Line Technical Data
RV-5
Forged Regular Port Globes Design and Manufacturing Standards
Valve Design: API 602 & B16.34
Socket Weld
Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch: ASME B1.20.1
Class 800 & 1500
Socket Welding & Threaded: ASME B16.11
Sizes: 1/2” thru 2”
Tested in Accordance with: API 598
P d1
C S
Class 800 Class 1500

Size End Size End
IN H L W P d1 Wt. IN H L W P d1 Wt.
B C S B C S
DN (NPT) DN (NPT)
1/2 5.67 2.99 3.35 0.37 0.86 0.38 0.54 3.3 1/2 5.91 3.62 3.82 0.37 0.86 0.38 0.54 5.1
1/2 1/2
15 144.0 76 85 9.40 22 10 13.7 1.5 15 150 92 97 9.40 22 10 13.7 2.3
3/4 6.06 3.62 3.82 0.50 1.07 0.50 0.54 4.8 3/4 7.05 4.09 3.82 0.50 1.07 0.50 0.54 7.0
3/4 3/4
20 153.9 92 97 12.7 27 13 13.7 2.1 20 179 104 97 12.7 27 13 13.7 3.2
1 6.97 4.09 3.82 0.69 1.33 0.50 0.69 6.2 1 9.09 5.51 5.39 0.63 1.33 0.50 0.69 13.4
1 1
25 177.0 104 97 17.5 34 13 17.52 2.8 25 231 140 137 16.0 34 13 17.52 6.1
1-1/4 8.86 5.51 5.39 1.16 1.68 0.50 0.71 12.3 1-1/4 10.16 5.75 6.18 1.06 1.68 0.50 0.71 23.1
1-1/4 1-1/4
30 225.0 140 137 29.5 43 13 18.0 5.6 30 258 146 157 26.9 43 13 18.0 10.5
1-1/2 8.86 5.51 5.39 1.16 1.92 0.50 0.72 12.3 1-1/2 10.16 5.75 6.18 1.06 1.92 0.50 0.72 23.1
1-1/2 1-1/2
40 225.0 140 137 29.5 49 13 18.3 5.6 40 258 146 157 26.9 49 13 18.3 10.5
2 10.00 5.75 6.18 1.38 2.41 0.62 0.76 18.7 2 11.85 8.27 6.18 1.38 2.41 0.62 0.76 28.6
2 2
50 254.0 146 157 35.1 61 16 19.3 8.5 50 301 210 157 35.1 61 16 19.3 13.0
Note: Pipe threads, general purpose, inch: B1.20.1. Socket welding and thread: B16.11
Note: Dimensions: Inches/Millimeters - Weights: Pounds/Kilograms. Dimensions are
subject to change without notice.
21 www.NewmansValve.com
Rev: 081710
Toll Free: 800.231.3505
Product Line Technical Data
How to Order OIC Forged Products

Figure Number
The figure number shown below identifies specific valve configuration details of OIC valves such as valve type, pressure class, end
connections, body/bonnet & trim materials, and special features.
Please specify end connections, body materials, and trims not listed below.
When placing an order, please refer to the respective product section of the catalog for size availability. A detailed description must be
included with any special orders.
8 G T- 6 L - SW - U - G - * *
PRESSURE CLASS END CONNECTIONS
1 = 150 BLANK = RF FLANGED
3 = 300 SW = SOCKET WELD
6 = 600 X = S/W X THRD
8 = 800 RTJ = RTJ
15 = 1500 BW = BUTT WELD
RF = RAISED FACE FLANGE
TYPE
GT = GATE
TRIM MATERIAL API #
GL = GLOBE
U = FULL STELLITE = 16
SC = SWING
1/2U = HALF STELLITE = 12
CK = PISTON
BLANK = 316 = 10
AN = ANGLE
BODY/BONNET MATERIALS PACKING & GASKET

6L = ASTM A182-F316L / 316 DUAL CERTIFIED MATERIALS
4L = ASTM A182-F304L / F304 DUAL CERTIFIED G = GRAPHITE
4H = ASTM A182-F304H T = TEFLON
17L = ASTM A182-F3117L / 317 DUAL CERTIFIED SPL = SPECIAL
21 = ASTM A182-F321 / F321H DUAL CERTIFIED
47 = ASTM A182-F347 / F347H DUAL CERTIFIED
A20 = ASTM AB462-N08020 (Alloy 20)
SUFFIX LETTERS
BP = BY-PASS LD = LOCKING DEVICE QS = QUADROSPHERE
BA = BARE STEM (CHAIN & LOCK, OR OTHER) RP = REGULAR PORT
BS = BELLOW SEAL LL = LOCKING LOOP SC = STOP CHECK
CL = CHLORINE SERVICE (LOOP WELDED TO BONNET) SL = SPRING LOADED
CR = CRYOGENIC SERVICE LS = LIMIT SWITCHES SPCL = SPECIAL CLASS - PRESSURE
CW = CHAIN WHEEL LV = LIVE LOADED PACKING SPL = SPECIAL (CUSTOMER TO
DR = DRAIN PORT MO = MOTOR OPERATED SPECIFY)
DTP = DRILL, TAP, & PLUG MP = MOUNTING PAD TD = TILTING DISC
EB = EXTENDED BONNET NC = NACE - MR-01-03 COMPLIANT TF = TEFLON INSERT
EXT = EXTENDED HAND WHEEL MATERIALS TM = TRUNNION MOUNTED
FP = FULL PORT OL = OUTSIDE LEVER & WEIGHT VB = VERTICAL BALL CHECK
FS = FIRE SAFE OX = OXYGEN SERVICE VL = VERTICAL LIFT CHECK
GI = GREASE INJECTION (CLEANED & BAGGED) VP = V-PORT DISC
GO = GEAR OPERATED PAR = PARALLEL SLIDE GATE VT = VITON INSERT
HB = HORIZONTAL BALL PI = POSITION INDICATOR WB = WELDED BONNET
HP = HORIZONTAL PISTON PO = PNEUMATIC OPERATOR WGO = WORM GEAR OPERATOR
HO = HYDRAULIC OPERATED PS = PRESSURE SEAL WS = WATER SEAL
INT = INTEGRAL FLANGED PT = PTFE SEATS Y = Y-PATTERN
24 www.NewmansValve.com
Rev: 081710
Toll Free: 800.231.3505

O&amp;M Manaul P000047

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

O&amp;M Manaul P000047

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Fuel Oil Treatment System

Operation and Maintenance Instructions Manual

PURCHASE ORDER NO: 411509836

ALFA LAVAL NO: P000047

Failure to follow the centrifuge maintenance schedule

Parts & Service

ALFA LAVAL INC. USA

Table of Contents and Revision Status P000047

Pradeep Shah Project Manager 02/04/13

SECTION 1: Storage & Preservation

SECTION 3: System Overview

SECTION 4: Installation System Reference & Drawings

SECTION 5: Operating Instruction

SECTION 6: Parameter List

SECTION 7: Alarms and Fault Finding

SECTION 8: Maintenance Instructions

SECTION 9: Spare Parts Catalog

SECTION 10: Bill of Materials / Catalog – Local Device

Rev Date Page Paragraph Nature of change

0 02/04/13 Original Issue.

Storage & Preservation

Viking Pump; Storage Policy (enclosed)

Centrifuge dive motor, Pump drive motor:

Motor starters and controls enclosure:

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (1) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

Basic Operating Instructions

Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (2) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (3) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (4) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (5) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (6) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

Note: Pump Selection and Centrifuge Mode can only be changed

Press to change “System In Local”. All controls from local HMI

Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (7) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

Skid Settings - Login Screen

Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (8) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

Skid Parameter Screen

Filename: SECTION 5 Operator Interface P000047.doc ABB Revised: 2/13/2013 11:15:00 AM

ABB Inc. – OEM Automation E-9587 (9) Of (18)

FUEL OIL TREATMENT SYSTEM

Control Panel Operating Instructions Manual

O&M Manaul P000047

O&M Manaul P000047